Seat Altea XL 2008 Owner’s Manual PDF

1 of 297
1 of 297

Summary of Content for Seat Altea XL 2008 Owner’s Manual PDF

SE AT

A LT

EA X

L O

W N

ER S

M A

N U

A L

In gl

s 5P

80 12

00 3B

H (

11 .0

8) (

G T9

)

5P 80

12 00

3B H

A LT

EA X

L In

gl s

(1 1.

08 )

Portada ALTEA XL.qxd 23/12/08 09:53 Pgina 3

efully to familiarise yourself with

ll contribute to preserve its value.

s and parts change.

as this should be kept with the

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 1 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Foreword This Instruction manual and its corresponding supplements should be read car

your vehicle.

Besides the regular care and maintenance of the vehicle, its correct handling wi

For safety reasons, note the information concerning accessories, modification

If selling the vehicle, give all of the onboard documentation to the new owner

vehicle.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 2 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Contents 3

shtrays*, cigarette lighter* and electrical

ockets* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

irst-aid kit, warning triangle, fire extinguisher

uggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ting, Ventilation and Air conditioning . .

eating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

limatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

eneral notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ddress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

afety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

nition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

tarting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . .

anual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

utomatic gearbox* / DSG automatic gearbox*

andbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

coustic parking aid system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ruise control system (CCS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ctical tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lligent technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

rakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

nti-lock brake system and traction control M-ABS

ABS and TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lectronic stabilisation programme (ESP)* . . . .

ing and the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

unning-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xhaust gasses purification system . . . . . . . . . .

conomical and ecological driving . . . . . . . . . .

riving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

144

147

148

151

151

153

157

161

163

163

164

165

166

169

170

174

176

179

183

183

183

184

185

190

190

191

192

194

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 3 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Contents

Manual structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Safety First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Proper sitting position for occupants . . . . . . . . .

Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Stowing luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brief Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Belt tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Side airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Deactivating airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Securing child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Digital display in the instrument panel . . . . . . .

Instrument panel menus* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Steering wheel controls* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Radio navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Radio frequency remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sliding/tilting roof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seats and stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The importance of correct seat adjustment . . . .

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear seat bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Stowage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A

s

F

L

Hea

H

C

2

G

Driv

A

S

Ig

S

M

A

H

A

C

Pra

Inte

B

A

(

E

Driv

R

E

E

D

5

6

7

7

7

10

16

17

19

19

20

23

27

29

29

33

36

40

43

45

45

47

49

53

53

53

55

58

64

73

83

83

83

87

91

91

97

98

100

102

104

106

109

109

117

120

121

125

128

128

129

131

133

135

Contents4

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 4 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instructions to follow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ball coupling of towing bracket* . . . . . . . . . . . .

Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fitting a towing bracket* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cleaning and caring for your vehicle . . . . . . .

General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle exterior maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle interior maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Accessories, parts replacement and

modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Accessories and parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Roof aerial* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Mobile telephones and radiotelephones . . . . .

Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . .

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades . . . .

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If and when . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel . . . . . . . .

Wheel change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tyre repair kit (Tyre-Mobility-System)* . . . . . . . .

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bulb change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Towing and tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General notes on the technical data . . . . . . .

Outstanding information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Data on fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking fluid levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Petrol engine 1.4 63 kW (85 bhp) . . . . . . . . . . .

Petrol engine 1.4 92 kW (125 bhp) . . . . . . . . . .

Petrol engine 1.6 75 kW (102 bhp) . . . . . . . . . .

Petrol engine 1.8 litre 118 kW (160 hp). Manual

Petrol engine 1.8 litre 118 kW (160 hp).

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Diesel engine 1.9 TDI 77 kW (105 bhp). . . . . . .

Diesel engine 2.0l 103 kW (140 bhp). . . . . . . . .

Diesel engine 2.0l 125 kW (170 bhp) . . . . . . . .

Dimensions and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

195

195

196

196

197

199

199

200

206

208

208

208

209

209

210

210

211

212

213

216

220

222

226

227

230

230

238

238

240

247

249

253

262

265

269

269

269

271

272

273

273

274

275

276

278

279

280

282

283

285

287

Manual structure 5

Manual structure What you should know before reading the on-board manual This manual contains a description of the equipment supplied with the

vehicle at the time of press. Some of the equipment hereunder described will

not be available until a later date, or is only available in certain markets.

Because this is a general manual for the ALTEA XL, some of the equipment and functions that are described in this manual are not included in all types or variants of the model or model year; they may vary or be modified depending on the technical requirements and on the market; this is in no way deceptive advertising.

The illustrations are intended as a general guide, and may vary from the

equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details.

The direction indications (left, right, front, rear) appearing in this manual

refer to the normal forward working direction of the vehicle except when

otherwise indicated.

The equipment marked with an asterisk* is supplied as standard on certain

versions of the model only, it can be supplied as an option on some models,

or else it is only on sale in certain countries.

All registered marks are indicated with . Although the copyright symbol

does not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.

The section is continued on the following page.

This shows the end of the section.

WARNING

Texts preceded by this symbol contain safety information. They warn you of serious dangers, possibly involving accident or injury.

Caution Texts preceded by this symbol draw your attention to a possible risk of

damage to your vehicle.

For the sake of the environment Texts preceded by this symbol refer to relevant points concerning environ-

mental protection.

Note Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 5 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Content6

Content This manual is structured to provide the information you need in an organised

way. The content of this Manual is divided into sections which belong to

chapters (e.g. Air conditioning). The entire manual is divided into five large

parts which are:

1. Safety First Information on the vehicle equipment relating to passive safety such as seat

belts, airbags, seats, etc.

2. Controls and equipment Information about the distribution of controls in the driver position of your

vehicle, about the seat adjustment possibilities, about how to create a suit-

able climate in the passenger compartment, etc.

3. Practical tips Advice relating to the driving, caring and maintenance of your vehicle and

certain problems you can solve yourself.

4. Technical Data Figures, values and the dimensions of your vehicle.

5. Alphabetic index At the end of this manual there is a detailed alphabetical index, this will help

you to rapidly find the information you require.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 6 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Safe driving 7

Safety Fir Technical Data

s a part of the occupant protection

the risk of injury in the event of acci-

he safety of your passengers in danger. In the

ty equipment may reduce the risk of injury. The

f the safety equipment in your SEAT:

e front and rear side seats,

e front seats,

r the front seats,

eat backrests,

straints*,

ts for child seats in the rear side seats with the

straints,

e position and non-use position,

n.

ned above works together to provide you and

t possible protection in the event of accidents.

not neither help you nor your passengers if you

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 7 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Safety First

Safe driving

Brief introduction

Dear SEAT Driver

Safety first!

This chapter contains important information, tips, suggestions and

warnings that you should read and consider for both your own safety

and for your passengers safety.

WARNING

This manual contains important information concerning the driver's and passengers' handling of the vehicle. The other booklets in the on board manual also contain further information that you should be aware of for your own safety and for the safety of your passengers.

Ensure that the onboard documentation is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is especially important when lending or selling the vehicle to another person.

Safety equipment

The safety equipment i

system and can reduce

dent.

Never put your safety and t

event of an accident, the safe

following list includes most o

three-point seat belts,

belt tension limiters for th

belt tension devices for th

belt height adjustment fo

front airbags,

side airbags in the front s

curtain airbags,

crash-active front head re

ISOFIX anchorage poin

ISOFIX system,

height-adjustable head re

head restraints with in-us

adjustable steering colum

The safety equipment mentio

your passengers with the bes

But this safety equipment can

Safe driving8

gers in the rear seats always have the

-use position page 14.

adjust the head restraints according to

propriate child seats and properly

age 45.

ing position. Instruct your passengers

r sitting position. page 10.

ecurely. Instruct your passengers also to

roperly page 19.

fety?

determined by your driving style and

of all occupants.

sible for yourself and your passengers.

r driving safety is affected by any circum-

self as well as others on the road ,

be distracted from the traffic around you,

elephone conversations.

riving ability is impaired (e.g. by medica-

d speed limits.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 8 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

or they are sitting in an incorrect position or do not properly adjust or use this

equipment.

Therefore, information is provided about why this equipment is so important,

how it protects you, what you have to consider when using it and how you and

your passengers can achieve the greatest possible benefit from the safety

equipment fitted. This manual includes important warnings that you and your

passengers should note in order to reduce the risk of injury.

Safety is everyone's business!

Before every trip

The driver bears the responsibility for his passengers and the

operational worthiness of the vehicle.

For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, always note

the following points before every trip:

Ensure that the vehicle's lights and turn signals operate flaw-

lessly.

Check tyre pressure.

Ensure that all windows provide a clear and good view of the

surroundings.

Securely restrain all parcels page 17.

Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals.

Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrors properly acoording

to your size.

Ensure that the passen

head restraints in the in

Instruct passengers to

their height.

Protect children with ap

applied seat belts p

Assume the correct sitt

also to assume a prope

Fasten your safety belt s

fasten their seat belts p

What affects driving sa

Driving safety is largely

the personal behaviour

As a driver, you are respon

When your concentration o

stance, you endanger your

for this reason:

Do not allow yourself to

e.g. by passengers or t

Never drive when your d

tion, alcohol, drugs).

Observe traffic laws an

Safe driving 9

Safety Fir Technical Data

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 9 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Always reduce your speed as appropriate for road, traffic and

weather conditions.

When travelling long distances, take breaks regularly - at least

every two hours.

If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or are in tension.

WARNING

When driving safety is impaired during a trip, the risk of injury and acci- dents increases.

Safe driving10

reduce the risk of injury in the event of an

he following adjustments for the driver:

el so that there is a distance of at least

ering wheel and the centre of your chest

rwards or backwards so that you are able

, brake and clutch pedals to the floor with

angled .

ch the highest point of the steering

nt so that its upper edge is at the same

head, or as close as possible to the same

head fig. 2.

upright position so that your back rests

Fig. 2 Proper head restraint position for driver

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 10 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Proper sitting position for occupants

Proper sitting position for driver

The proper sitting position for the driver is important for a

safe and relaxed driving.

For your own safety and to

accident, we recommend t

Adjust the steering whe

25 cm between the ste

fig. 1.

Move the driver's seat fo

to press the accelerator

your knees still slightly

Ensure that you can rea

wheel.

Adjust the head restrai

level as the top of your

level as the top of your

Move the backrest to an

completely against it.

Fig. 1 The proper distance between driver and steering wheel

Safe driving 11

Safety Fir Technical Data

for front passenger

st sit at least 25 cm away from the

airbag can provide the greatest

he event that it is triggered.

reduce the risk of injury in the event of an

the following adjustments for the front

ger seat back as far as possible .

n upright position so that your back rests

int so that its upper edge is at the same

head, or as close as possible to the same

r head page 13.

otwell in front of the front passenger seat.

securely page 19.

e passenger airbag in exceptional circum-

ow to adjust the front passenger's seat, see

tion of the front passenger can lead to severe

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 11 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Fasten your safety belt securely page 19.

Keep both feet in the foot well so that you have the vehicle under

control at all times.

Adjustment of the driver's seat page 128.

WARNING

An incorrect sitting position of the driver can lead to severe injuries.

Adjust the driver's seat so that there is at least 25 cm distance between the centre of the chest and the centre of the steering wheel page 10, fig. 1. If you are sitting nearer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you properly.

If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a qualified workshop. The workshop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.

When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. This reduces the risk of injury when the driver airbag is triggered.

Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and head.

To reduce the risk of injury to the driver during sudden braking manoeu- vres or an accident, never drive with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the back- rest is in an upright position and the driver is wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting position!

Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve optimal protection.

Proper sitting position

The front passenger mu

dash panel so that the

possible protection in t

For your own safety and to

accident, we recommend

passenger:

Move the front passen

Move the backrest to a

completely against it.

Adjust the head restra

level as the top of your

level as the top of you

Keep both feet in the fo

Fasten your safety belt

It is possible to deactivate th

stances page 24.

For detailed information on h

page 131.

WARNING

An incorrect sitting posi injuries.

Safe driving12

the correct position page 14.

ot well in front of the rear seat.

securely page 19.

d restraint system when you take children

5.

rear seat are not sitting properly, they could

properly in order to achieve maximum protec-

e optimal protection when backrests are in an sengers are wearing their seat belts properly. are not sitting in an upright position, the risk itioning of the belt web increases.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 12 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Adjust the front passenger seat so that there is at least 25 cm between your breastbone and the dash panel. If you are sitting nearer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you properly.

If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a qualified workshop. The workshop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.

Always keep your feet in the footwell when the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the instrument panel, out the window or on the seat. An incor- rect sitting position exposes you to an increased risk of injury in case of a sudden braking or an accident. If the airbag is triggered, you could sustain severe injuries due to an incorrect sitting position.

To reduce the risk of injury to the front passenger in events such sudden braking manoeuvres or an accident, never travel with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the backrest is in an upright position and the front passenger is wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting position!

Adjust the head restraint properly in order to achieve maximum protection.

Correct sitting position for passengers in the rear seats

Passengers in the rear seats must sit up straight, keep their

feet in the foot well s and wear their seat belts properly.

To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking

manoeuvre or an accident, passengers on the rear bench seat must

consider the following:

Adjust the headrest to

Keep both feet in the fo

Fasten your safety belt

Use an appropriate chil

in the vehicle page 4

WARNING

If the passengers on the sustain severe injuries.

Adjust the head restraint tion.

Seat belts can only provid upright position and the pas If passengers on the rear seat of injury due to incorrect pos

WARNING (continued)

Safe driving 13

Safety Fir Technical Data

properly in order to achieve maximum

int so that its upper edge is at the same

head or as close as possible to the same

r head and, at the very least, at eye level

page 128.

restraints removed or improperly adjusted injuries.

d restraints could result in death in the event of

d restraints also increase the risk of injury d driving or braking manoeuvres.

t always be adjusted according to the

d into their seats during a rear end collision. The

e backrest activates the crash-active head

hich moves rapidly forwards and upwards at the

duces the distance between the occupant's

reducing the risk of head injuries such as brain

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 13 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Correct adjustment of front seat head restraints

Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of

passengers protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in

most accident situations.

Adjust the head restraint

protection.

Adjust the head restra

level as the top of your

level as the top of you

fig. 3 and fig. 4

Adjusting the head restraints

WARNING

Travelling with the head increases the risk of severe

Incorrectly adjusted hea a collision or accident.

Incorrectly adjusted hea during sudden or unexpecte

The head restraints mus passenger's height.

Headrests in use*

Vehicle occupants are presse

resulting body pressure on th

restraint* on the front seat, w

same time. This movement re

head and the head rest, thus

trauma.

Fig. 3 Properly adjusted head restraint viewed from the front

Fig. 4 Properly adjusted head restraint viewed from the side

Safe driving14

ear seat head restraints

restraints are an important part of the

can reduce the risk of injuries in

s.

Fig. 5 Head restraints in correct position

Fig. 6 Head restraint position warning label

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 14 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

WARNING

Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted increases the risk of severe injuries.

Incorrectly adjusted head restraints could result in death in the event of a collision or accident.

Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres.

The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the passenger's height.

Note The crash-active head restraints* could also be triggered if a vehicle occupant

applies a high level of pressure on the backrest (e.g. by falling back into the

seat when entering the vehicle) or if pressure is applied to a front seat head

restraint from the rear. This accidental activation is, however, not dangerous

as the crash-active head restraints will return to the original position immedi-

ately and are thus once again ready.

Correct adjustment of r

Properly adjusted head

occupant protection and

most accident situation

Safe driving 15

Safety Fir Technical Data

itting positions

ition can lead to severe injuries to

timal protection only when the belt webs

ncorrect sitting positions substantially

tion of seat belts and increase the risk of

t web position. As the driver, you are

occupants, especially children.

o assume an incorrect sitting position in

lling .

amples of sitting positions that could be

The list is not complete, but we would like to

.

icle is in motion:

,

r to the rear,

sh panel,

h,

e of a seat,

w,

a window,

dash panel,

surface of a seat,

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 15 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Rear outer seat head restraints

The rear outer seat head restraints have 3 positions.

Two positions for use page 14, fig. 5. In these positions, the

head restraints are used normally, protecting passengers along

with the rear seat belts.

And one position for non-use.

To fit the head restraints in position for use, pull on the edges

with both hands in the direction of the arrow.

Centre rear head restraint

The centre head restraint only has two positions, in-use (head

restraint up) and non-use (head restraint down).

WARNING

Under no circumstances should the rear passengers travel while the head restraints are in the non-use position. See the warning label located on the rear side fixed window page 14, fig. 6.

Do not swap the centre rear head restraint with either of the outer seat rear head restraints.

Injury risk in case of an accident!

Caution Note the instructions on the adjustment of the head restraints page 129.

Examples of incorrect s

An incorrect sitting pos

occupants.

Seat belts can provide op

are properly positioned. I

reduce the protective func

injury due to incorrect bel

responsible for all vehicle

Never permit anyone t

the vehicle while trave

The following list contains ex

dangerous for all occupants.

make you aware of this issue

Therefore, whenever the veh

Never stand in the vehicle

never stand on the seats,

never kneel on the seats,

never tilt your backrest fa

never lean against the da

never lie on the rear benc

never sit on the front edg

never sit sideways,

never lean out of a windo

never put your feet out of

never put your feet on the

never put your feet on the

Safe driving16

e pedal must be pressed down thoroughly in

port your feet properly and give you a good

on can lead to critical situations while driving.

e driver footwell. An object could move into al operation. In the event of a sudden driving

ill not be able to operate the brake, clutch or ident!

r side

used which can be securely fastened

ot impair operation of the pedals.

ats are securely fastened during the trip

pedals .

ve the pedals clear and which are secured to

ou can obtain suitable floor mats from a quali-

d, an accident may occur. Risk of serious inju-

s are always securely attached.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 16 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

never travel in a foot well ,

never travel on a seat without wearing the seat belt,

never carry any person in the luggage compartment.

WARNING

Every incorrect sitting position increases the risk of severe injuries.

Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the occupants to severe injuries if airbags trigger, by striking a passenger who has assumed an incorrect sitting position.

Before the vehicle moves, assume the proper sitting position and main- tain it throughout the trip. Before every trip, instruct your passengers to assume the proper sitting position and to maintain it during the trip page 10, Proper sitting position for occupants.

Pedal area

Pedals

The operation of all pedals must never be impaired by objects

or floor mats.

Ensure that you can always press the accelerator, brake and

clutch pedals unimpaired to the floor.

Ensure that the pedals can return unimpaired to their initial posi-

tions.

Use only floor mats which leave the pedal area free and can be securely

fastened on the foot well.

If a brake circuit fails, the brak

order to stop the vehicle.

Wear suitable shoes

Always wear shoes which sup

feeling for the pedals.

WARNING

Restricting pedal operati

Never place objects on th the pedal area and impair ped or braking manoeuvre, you w accelerator pedal. Risk of acc

Floor mats on the drive

Only floor mats may be

in the foot well and do n

Ensure that the floor m

and do not obstruct the

Only use floor mats which lea

prevent them from slipping. Y

fied dealership.

WARNING

If the pedals are obstructe ries.

Ensure that the floor mat

Safe driving 17

Safety Fir Technical Data

he luggage compartment and secure them on

traps to secure heavy objects.

res or accidents, loose objects can be thrown upants or passers-by. This increased risk of ed if a loose object is struck by an inflating cts can be transformed into missiles. Risk of

tre of gravity may shift when transporting ct the vehicle's handling and lead to an acci-

ial to adjust your speed and driving style nts.

d axle loads or allowed maximum weight. If the wed total weight is exceeded, the driving char- y change, leading to accidents, injuries and

unattended, especially when the tailgate is nto the luggage compartment closing the door in trapped without help and there is a mortal

lay in or around the vehicle. Close and lock doors when you leave the vehicle. Before you that there are no adults or children in the

ers in the luggage compartment. Every belted in page 19.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 17 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original floor mats. This would reduce the pedal area and could obstruct the pedals. Risk of accident.

Stowing luggage

Loading the boot

All luggage and other loose objects must be safely secured in

the luggage compartment.

Unsecured objects which shift back and forth could impair the

driving safety or driving characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the

centre of gravity.

Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compartment.

Lay and stow heavy luggage as far forward as possible in the

luggage compartment.

Stow heavy luggage as low as possible in the luggage compart-

ment.

Secure heavy objects to the fitted fastening rings*.

WARNING

Loose luggage and other objects in the boot could cause serious inju- ries.

Always stow objects in t the fastening rings.

Use suitable specialist s

During sudden manoeuv forward, injuring vehicle occ injury will be further increas airbag. If this happens, obje fatal injury.

Please note that the cen heavy objects; this may affe dent. Therefore, it is essent accordingly, to avoid accide

Never exceed the allowe allowed axle load or the allo acteristics of the vehicle ma damage to the vehicle.

Never leave your vehicle open. Children could climb i behind them; they will rema risk.

Never allow children to p both the tailgate and all the lock the vehicle, make sure vehicle.

Never transport passeng passenger must be properly

WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)

Safe driving18

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 18 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Note Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce fogging of the windows. Used

air escapes through ventilation slits in the side trim of the luggage compart-

ment. Ensure that the ventilation slits are never covered.

Straps for securing the load to the fastening rings are commercially

available.

Seat belts 19

Safety Fir Technical Data

ble seats must never be transported in your

ehicle must properly fasten and wear the seat eat. Children must be protected with an appro- .

*

as a reminder to the driver to fasten

e:

securely.

rs to fasten their seat belts properly before

ng a child seat according to the child's

itched on, the warning lamp on the instru-

driver has not fastened his/her seat belt, and a

e vehicle is driven at more than 30 km/h for 90

ion

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 19 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Seat belts

Brief Introduction

Before driving: remember your seat belt!

Wearing a seat belt properly can save your life!

In this chapter you will learn the importance of wearing seat belts,

how they work and how to properly fasten, adjust and wear them.

Read and consider all the information as well as the warnings in

this chapter.

WARNING

If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe injuries increases.

Properly worn seat belts can reduce severe injuries in case of sudden braking manoeuvres or accidents. For safety reasons, you and your passen- gers must always wear the seat belts properly while the vehicle is moving.

Pregnant women or people with physical disabilities must also use seat belts. Like all other passengers, these people can also sustain severe inju- ries if they are not wearing their seat belts properly.

Number of seats

Your vehicle has five seats, two on the front part and three on the rear part.

Each seat is equipped with a three-point seat belt.

WARNING

More people than availa vehicle.

Every passenger in the v belt belonging to his or her s priate child restraint system

Seat belt warning lamp

The warning lamp acts

the seat belt.

Before starting the vehicl

Fasten your safety belt

Instruct your passenge

driving off.

Protect children by usi

height and weight.

After the ignition has been sw

ment panel lights up1) if the

warning signal* is heard if th

seconds.

1) Depending on the model vers

Seat belts20

ws of physics work in the case of a head-on

s moving fig. 7 there is a certain amount of

rgy, both in the vehicle and in the occupants.

depends on the speed of the vehicle and the

assengers. The higher the speed and the

nergy there is to be released in an accident.

wever, is the speed of the vehicle. If the speed

m/h, for example, the kinetic energy is multi-

r example are not restrained by seat belts, the

y has to be absorbed at the point of impact

50 km/h, the forces acting on bodies in a colli-

ne (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are

elts are not attached to the vehicle. In a

e forward at the same speed their vehicle was

Fig. 8 The vehicle hits the wall: the occupants are not wearing seat belts

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 20 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

The warning lamp* is switched off if the driver seat belt is fastened while

the ignition is switched on.

Why wear seat belts?

Physical principles of frontal collisions

In the event of a frontal collision, a large amount of kinetic

energy must be absorbed.

It is easy to explain how the la

collision: When a vehicle start

energy known as kinetic ene

The amount of kinetic energy

weight of the vehicle and its p

greater the weight, the more e

The most significant factor, ho

doubles from 25 km/h to 50 k

plied by four.

Because the passengers in ou

entire amount of kinetic energ

fig. 8.

Even at speeds of 30 km/h to

sion can easily exceed one ton

even higher.

Passengers not wearing seat b

frontal collision, they will mov

Fig. 7 Vehicle about to hit a wall: the occupants are not wearing seat belts

Seat belts 21

Safety Fir Technical Data

s acting on the body in a collision are so great

oneself with one's hands. In a frontal collision,

wn forward and will make violent contact with

rd, windscreen or whatever else is in the way

bstitute for the seat belts. When triggered,

al protection. All passengers (including the

roperly during the trip. This will reduce the risk

t of an accident regardless of whether an

not.

gered only once. To achieve the best possible

t always be worn properly so that you will be

ch no airbag is deployed.

r passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they

rward violently in an accident. Rear passengers

danger not only themselves but also the front

Fig. 10 The unbelted rear passenger is thrown forward violently, hitting the driver wearing a seat belt.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 21 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to frontal acci-

dents, but to all accidents and collisions.

The danger of not using the seat belt

The general belief that the passengers can protect them-

selves with their hands in a minor collision is false.

Even at low speeds the force

that it is not possible to brace

unbelted passengers are thro

the steering wheel, dashboa

fig. 9.

The airbag system is not a su

airbags provide only addition

driver) must wear seat belts p

of severe injuries in the even

airbag is fitted for the seat or

Note that airbags can be trig

protection, the seat belt mus

protected in accidents in whi

It is also important for the rea

could otherwise be thrown fo

who do not use seat belts en

occupants fig. 10.

Fig. 9 A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrown forward violently.

Seat belts22

n seat belts before every trip, even when "just

ear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics

ring seat belts is an effective mean of substan-

y and improving the chances of survival in a

, properly worn seat belts improve the protec-

event of an accident. For this reason, wearing

n most countries.

ped with airbags, the seat belts must be

irbags, for example, are only triggered in some

bags will not be triggered during minor frontal

s, rear collisions, rolls or accidents in which the

in the control unit is not exceeded.

wear your seat belt and ensure that your

ir seat belts properly before you drive off!

sing seat belts

rrectly, they can reduce the risk of

elt as described in this booklet.

ts can be fastened at all times and are not

incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe inju- rotection from seat belts can be achieved only

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 22 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Seat belts protection

Passengers not wearing seat belts risk severe injuries in the

event of an accident.

Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle occupants in the correct sitting posi-

tions and substantially reduce the kinetic energy in the event of an accident.

Seat belts also help to prevent uncontrolled movements that could lead to

severe injuries. In addition, properly worn seat belts reduce the danger of

being thrown from the car.

Passengers wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the ability

of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. The front part of your vehicle and other

passive safety features (such as the airbag system) are also designed to

absorb the kinetic energy released in a collision. Taken together, all these

features reduce the releasing kinetic energy and consequently, the risk of

injury.

Our examples describe frontal collisions. Of course, properly worn seat belts

substantially reduce the risk of injury in all other types of accidents. This is

why it is so important to faste

driving around the corner".

Ensure that your passengers w

have shown properly that wea

tially reducing the risk of injur

serious accident. Furthermore

tion provided by airbags in the

a seat belt is required by law i

Although your vehicle is equip

fastened and worn. The front a

frontal accidents. The front air

collisions, minor side collision

airbag trigger threshold value

Therefore, you should always

passengers have fastened the

Safety instructions on u

If seat belts are used co

injury in an accident.

Always wear the seat b

Ensure that the seat bel

damaged.

WARNING

If the seat belts are worn ries increases. The optimal p if you use them properly.

Fig. 11 Driver wearing the seat belt properly: is secured by the belt in sharp braking

Seat belts 23

Safety Fir Technical Data

a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts ified in any way.

lean, otherwise the retractors may not work

nt and rear occupants are locked into

its full protection if the belt web is not

Fig. 12 Belt buckle and latch plate of seat belt

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 23 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Fasten your seat belt before every trip - even when driving in town. The other passengers must also wear the seat belt, otherwise they may be danger of injury!

The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the belt web is not posi- tioned correctly.

Never allow two passengers (even children) to share the same seat belt.

Keep both feet in the foot-well in front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in motion.

Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.

The belt webbing must never be twisted while it is being worn.

The belt webbing should never lie on hard or fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.) because this can cause injuries.

Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.

Never wear the seat belt under the arm or in any other incorrect posi- tion.

Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat over a jacket) impairs the proper fit and function of the belts, reducing their capacity to protect.

The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or other objects, as this can prevent the latch plate from engaging securely.

Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings or similar instruments to alter the position of the belt webbing.

Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the connections, belt retractors or parts of the buckle could cause severe injuries in the event of an acci- dent. Therefore, you must check the condition of all seat belts at regular intervals.

Seat belts which have been worn in an accident and stretched must be replaced by a qualified workshop. Renewal may be necessary even if there is no apparent damage. The belt anchorage should also be checked.

Do not attempt to repair must not be removed or mod

The belts must be kept c properly page 207.

Seat belts

Seat belt adjustment

The seat belts for the fro

position by a latch.

The seat belt cannot offer

positioned correctly.

WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)

Seat belts24

ximum protection only when they are

Fig. 13 Correct belt web and head restraint posi- tions, viewed from front

Fig. 14 Correct belt web and head restraint posi- tions, viewed from side

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 24 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.

To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch plate and pull it slowly

across your chest and lap.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and

push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click

page 23, fig. 12.

Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in

the buckle.

The seat belts are equipped with an automatic retractor on the shoulder

strap. Full freedom of movement is permitted when the shoulder belt is pulled

slowly. However, during sudden braking, during travel in mountains or bends

and during acceleration, the automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is

locked.

The automatic belt retractors on the front seats are fitted with belt tension

devices page 27.

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.

The seat belts offer best protection only when the backrests are in an upright position and the seat belts have been fastened properly.

Never put the latch plate in the buckle of another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will not protect you properly and the risk of injury is increased.

If an occupant is incorrectly belted in, the belt cannot protect him or her properly. An incorrectly positioned belt web can cause extremely severe injuries.

Always engage the retractor lock when you are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+ or 1 page 45.

Seat belt position

Seat belts offer their ma

properly positioned.

Seat belts 25

Safety Fir Technical Data

also fasten their seat belts properly

the unborn child is for the mother to

erly at all times during the pregnancy.

ximum protection only when the belt web

page 24.

nd head restraint correctly page 10.

, pull the belt evenly across your chest and

r the pelvis fig. 15.

to the buckle for the corresponding seat

it is securely locked with an audible click

that the latch plate is securely engaged in

Fig. 15 Positioning seat belts during pregnancy

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 25 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

The following features are available to adjust the seat belt in the shoulder

region:

belt height adjustment for the front seats.

front seat height adjustment*.

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.

The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the torso page 24, fig. 13.

The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the pelvis page 24, fig. 14. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack.

Read and observe the warnings page 22.

Pregnant women must

The best protection for

wear the seat belt prop

The seat belt provides ma

is properly positioned

Adjust the front seat a

Holding the latch plate

as low as possible ove

Insert the latch plate in

and push it down until

.

Pull the belt to ensure

the buckle.

Seat belts26

and so that it rolls up easily and the trim

hile the vehicle is in motion. If you do, you g severe or fatal injuries.

height

rs can be used to adjust the position

oulder.

he front seats can be used to adjust the

shoulder.

Fig. 17 Location of the belt height adjuster

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 26 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.

For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat belt must lie as low as possible over the pelvis, never across the stomach, and always lie flat so that no pressure is exerted on the abdomen.

Read and observe the warnings page 22.

Seat belt release

The seat belt must not be unfastened until the vehicle has

come to a standstill.

Press the red button on the belt buckle fig. 16. The latch plate

is released and springs out .

Guide the belt back by h

is not damaged

WARNING

Never unbuckle a seat belt w increase the risk of sustainin

Adjusting the seat belt

Seat belt height adjuste

of the seat belt at the sh

The seat belt adjuster for t

proper belt position at the

Fig. 16 Removing latch plate from buckle

Seat belts 27

Safety Fir Technical Data

es

sion device

n, the seat belts on the front seats are

.

cupants are equipped with belt tension devices.

elt tension devices during severe head-on,

d only if the seat belt is actually being worn. This

t belts, reducing the forward motion of the occu-

e triggered only once.

not be triggered in the event of a light frontal,

hicle overturns, or in situations where no large

r rear of the vehicle.

are triggered, a fine dust is produced. This is

tion of fire in the vehicle.

ements must be observed when the vehicle or

scrapped. A qualified workshop is familiar with

pleased to pass on the information to you.

f belt tension devices

components of the seat belts that are installed

you work on the belt tension devices or remove

when performing other repair work, the seat

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 27 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Press the upper part of the shoulder belt guide and hold it in this

position page 26, fig. 17.

Move the shoulder belt guide up or down until you have adjusted

the seat belt page 24.

After adjusting, pull the shoulder belt sharply to check that the

catch on the shoulder belt guide is engaged securely.

Incorrectly fastened seat belts

Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe injuries.

Seat belts can provide optimal protection only if the belt web is

properly worn. The seat belts must be fastened exactly in the order

described in this chapter. An incorrect sitting position impairs

substantially the protection a seat belt offers and can lead to severe

or fatal injuries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is especially

increased when a deploying airbag strikes an occupant who has

assumed an incorrect sitting position. As driver, you are responsible

for all vehicle occupants, especially children. Therefore:

Never permit anyone to assume an incorrect sitting position in

the vehicle while travelling .

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat belt increases the risk of severe injuries.

Before every trip, instruct your passengers to adjust their seat belts properly and to wear them during the trip.

Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of seat belts page 22.

Belt tension devic

Function of the belt ten

During a frontal collisio

retracted automatically

The seat belts for the front oc

Sensors will only trigger the b

lateral and rear collisions, an

retracts and tightens the sea

pants.

The belt tension device can b

The belt tension devices will

side or rear collision, if the ve

forces act on the front, side o

Note If the belt tension devices

normal and it is not an indica

The relevant safety requir

components of the system are

these regulations and will be

Service and disposal o

The belt tension devices are

in the seats of your vehicle. If

and install parts of the system

Seat belts28

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 28 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

belt may be damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an acci-

dent, the belt tension devices function incorrectly or not at all.

So that the effectiveness of the belt tension device is not reduced and that

removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution, regula-

tions, which are known to the qualified workshops, must be observed.

WARNING

If repairs are not carried out by a professional, or if the belt tension devices are used incorrectly, the risk of severe or fatal injuries increases. The belt tension devices may fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong circumstances.

Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the belt tension devices or seat belts.

The belt tension device and seat belt including its automatic retractor cannot be repaired.

Any work on the belt tension devices and seat belts, including the removal and refitting of system parts in conjunction with other repair work, must be performed by a qualified workshop only.

The belt tension devices will only provide protection for one accident and must be changed it they have been activated.

Airbag system 29

Safety Fir Technical Data

t critical or fatal injuries on the occupant. This

possible distance between yourself and the

nt airbags can completely deploy when trig-

um protection.

at will trigger an airbag are: the type of acci-

nd the speed of the vehicle.

ered depends primarily on the vehicle deceler-

collision and detected by the control unit. If the

g during the collision and measured by the

e specified reference values, the front, side

t be triggered. Take into account that the visible

in an accident, for whatever reason, is not an

gs had been triggered.

correctly or assuming an incorrect sitting posi- tal injuries.

children, who are not properly belted can es if the airbag is triggered. You should always 2 years of age on the rear seat. Never transport y are not restrained or the restraint system is , size or weight.

eat belt, if you lean forward or to the side while rrect sitting position, there is a substantially increased risk of injury will be further y an inflating airbag.

ry from an inflating airbag, always wear the 9.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 29 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Airbag system

Brief introduction

Why wear a seat belt and assume the correct sitting position?

For the inflating airbags to achieve the best protection, the

seat belt must always be worn properly and the correct sitting

position must be assumed.

For your own safety and the safety of the passengers, please ensure

the following before driving:

Always wear the seat belt properly page 19.

Adjust the driver's seat and the steering wheel correctly

page 10.

Adjust the front passenger seat correctly page 11.

Adjust the head restraint correctly page 13.

Use the correct child restraint system to protect children in your

vehicle page 45.

The airbag is deployed at high speed in fractions of a second. If you have an

incorrect seating position at the time the airbag is deployed, it could cause

you critical injuries. Therefore, it is essential that all passengers in the vehicle

assume a correct sitting position while travelling.

A sharp braking before an accident may cause a passenger not wearing a seat

belt to be thrown forward into the area of the deploying airbag. In this case,

the inflating airbag may inflic

also applies to children.

Always maintain the greatest

front airbag. This way, the fro

gered, providing their maxim

The most important factors th

dent, the angle of collision a

Whether the airbags are trigg

ation rate resulting from the

vehicle deceleration occurrin

control unit remains below th

and/or curtain airbag will no

damage in a vehicle involved

indication as to why the airba

WARNING

Wearing the seat belt in tion can lead to critical or fa

All occupants, including sustain critical or fatal injuri transport all children up to 1 children in the vehicle if the not appropriate for their age

If you are not wearing a s travelling or assume an inco increased risk of injury. This increased if you are struck b

To reduce the risk of inju seat belt properly page 1

Airbag system30

er airbag can strike the rear-facing child seat ainst the door, the roof or the backrest.

ances, it is necessary to transport a child in a ront passenger seat, it is absolutely essential g safety measures:

nger airbag page 43, Deactivating

approved by the child seat manufacturer for seat with front or side airbag.

instructions given by the child seat manufac- ety instructions page 45, Child safety.

ing the child seat, push the front passenger ds so that the greatest possible distance to g is ensured.

prevent the front passenger seat from being

nt passenger seat must be in an upright

and belt tension device system

itors the airbag and belt tension

l airbags and belt tension devices in the

s and wiring connections.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 30 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Always properly adjust the front seats.

The danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger seat

Rear-facing child seats must never be used on the front

passenger seat when the front passenger airbag is enabled.

An enabled front airbag on the front passenger side is potentially a major

danger to a child. The front passenger seat is life threatening to a child if

he/she is transported in a rear-facing child seat. You should always transport

all children up to 12 years of age on the rear seat.

If a rear-facing child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, an inflating

airbag can strike it with such great force that critical or fatal injuries may

result.

Therefore we strongly recommend you to transport children on the rear seats.

That is the safest place for children in the vehicle. Alternatively, the front

passenger airbag can be disabled with a key-operated switch page 43.

When transporting children, use a child seat appropriate to the age and size

of each child page 45.

For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the airbag off,

an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.

WARNING

If a child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, the risk to the child of sustaining critical or fatal injuries in the event of an accident increases.

Never secure a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat if the front passenger airbag is enabled. The child can suffer critical or fatal inju- ries when the front passenger airbag is triggered.

An inflating front passeng and hurl it with great force ag

If, under special circumst rear-facing child seat on the f that you observe the followin

Disable the front passe airbags*.

The child seat must be use on a front passenger

Follow the installation turer and observe the saf

Before properly install seat completely backwar the front passenger airba

Ensure that no objects pushed completely back.

The backrest of the fro position.

Warning lamp for airbag

This warning lamp mon

device system.

The warning lamp monitors al

vehicle, including control unit

WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)

Airbag system 31

Safety Fir Technical Data

nd disposal of the airbags

are installed in various places in your vehicle.

tem or remove and fit parts of the system when

, parts of the airbag system may be damaged.

t, in the event of an accident, the airbag inflates

at all.

nts must be observed when the vehicle or

scrapped. The specialist workshops and the

familiar with these requirements.

out by a professional, or if the airbags are used e or fatal injuries is increased. The airbags may e in the wrong circumstances.

thing on the steering wheel hub or the soft unit on the passenger side of the dashboard, fy them in any way.

ach any objects such as cup holders or tele- faces covering the airbag units.

eel or dash panel, you may use only a dry or a er clean the dash panel and the airbag module

ining solvents. Solvents cause the surface to g triggered, disintegrating plastic parts could

adjust, remove or install parts of the airbag

ystem or removal and installation of the airbag s (such as repairs to the steering wheel) should ified workshop. Qualified workshops have the mation and qualified personnel.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 31 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Monitoring of airbag and belt tension device system

Both the airbag and belt tension device systems operation is constantly

monitored electronically. Each time the ignition is switched on, the warning

lamp lights for several seconds and the display in the instrument panel*

shows AIRBAG / TENSIONER.

The system must be checked when the warning lamp :

does not light up when the ignition is switched on,

after the ignition is switched on, it turns off after 4 seconds,

it turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on,

lights up or flashes while the car is moving.

In the event of a malfunction, the warning lamp remains on continuously. In

addition, depending on the malfunction, a fault message appears in the

display of the combi-instrument for approx. 10 seconds and a short acoustic

signal is given. In this event, you should have a qualified workshop check the

system immediately.

If any of the airbags are de-activated by the Authorised Service Centre, the

indicator lights for several seconds more after the verification and will turn off

if there is no fault.

WARNING

If there is a malfunction, the airbag and belt tension device system cannot properly perform its protective function.

If a malfunction occured, have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, in the event of an accident, the airbag system and belt tension devices may not be triggered, or may not be trig- gered correctly.

Repairs, maintenance a

The parts of the airbag system

If you work on the airbag sys

performing other repair work

The consequence may be tha

incorrectly or does not inflate

The relevant safety requireme

components of the airbag are

Vehicle disposal centres are

WARNING

If repairs are not carried incorrectly, the risk of sever fail to inflate, or could inflat

Do not cover or stick any plastic surface of the airbag and do not obstruct or modi

It is important not to att phone mountings to the sur

To clean the steering wh water-moistened cloth. Nev surface with cleansers conta become porous. If the airba cause substantial injuries.

Never attempt to repair, system.

Any work on the airbag s components for other repair be performed only by a qual necessary tools, repair infor

Airbag system32

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 32 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

We strongly recommend you to go to a qualified workshop for all work on the airbag system.

Never attempt to alter the front bumper or the body.

The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.

WARNING (continued)

Airbag system 33

Safety Fir Technical Data

r is located in the steering wheel fig. 18 and

nger is located in the instrument panel

ied by the word AIRBAG.

elts, the front airbag system gives the front

ion for the head and chest in the event of a

ge 36, Safety notes on the frontal airbag

nction of restraining the occupants, the seat

front passenger in a position where the airbags

tion in a frontal collision.

bstitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part

e safety system. Please bear in mind that the

ffectively when the occupants are wearing their

djusted the head restraints properly. Therefore,

he seat belts at all times, not only because this

untries, but also for your safety page 19,

irbag system are:

monitoring system (control unit),

ag with gas generator) for the driver and front

dash panel insert page 30.

is monitored electronically. The airbag warning

conds every time the ignition is switched on

if the warning lamp

e ignition is switched on page 30,

ed on, it turns off after 4 seconds,

s up again after the ignition is switched on,

the car is moving.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 33 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Front airbags

Description of front airbags

The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.

The front airbag for the drive

the airbag for the front passe

fig. 19. Airbags are identif

In conjunction with the seat b

occupants additional protect

severe frontal collision pa

system.

In addition to their normal fu

belts also hold the driver and

can provide maximum protec

The airbag system is not a su

of the vehicle's overall passiv

airbag system can only work e

seat belts correctly and have a

it is most important to wear t

is required by law in most co

Brief Introduction.

The main parts of the front a

an electronic control and

the two front airbags (airb

passenger,

a warning lamp in the

The airbag system operation

lamp will light up for a few se

(self-diagnosis).

There is a fault in the system

does not light up when th

after the ignition is switch

it turns off and then light

lights up or flashes while

Fig. 18 Driver airbag located in steering wheel

Fig. 19 Front passenger airbag located in dash panel

Airbag system34

ags

the risk of head or chest injury.

so that the airbags for the driver and front

evere frontal collision.

e front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-

the airbags fill with a propellant gas and

d front passenger fig. 20. The fully deployed

ovement of the front occupants and help to

head and the upper part of the body.

ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-

ts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and

tected by the airbag. After the collision, the

the front occupants to see forward.

extra protection in an accident, the airbags

ly (within thousandth of a second). A fine dust

Fig. 20 Inflated front airbags

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 34 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

The front airbag system will not be triggered if:

the ignition is switched off,

there is a minor frontal collision,

there is a side collision,

there is a rear-end collision,

the vehicle turns over.

WARNING

The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the occupants are seated correctly page 10, Proper sitting position for occupants.

If a fault has occured in the airbag system, have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, during a frontal collision the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.

Operation of frontal airb

Inflated airbags reduce

The airbag system is designed

passenger are triggered in a s

In certain types of accident th

gered together.

When the system is triggered,

deploy in front of the driver an

airbags cushion the forward m

reduce the risk of injury to the

The special design of the airb

lant gas when an occupant pu

chest are surrounded and pro

airbag deflates sufficiently for

In order to provide the desired

have to deploy extremely rapid

Airbag system 35

Safety Fir Technical Data

g. 21 Airbag covers reacting when the front airbags e triggered

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 35 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-

tion of fire in the vehicle.

Airbag covers when the frontal airbags are triggered

The airbag covers fold out of the steering wheel and dash panel when the

driver and front passenger airbags deploy fig. 21. The airbag covers

remain connected to the steering wheel or the dash panel.

Fi ar

Airbag system36

ags

t a substitute for the seat belts.

ted in the driver's seat and front passenger's

rear side airbags are located in the rear wheel

re identified by the text AIRBAG in the upper

the rear wheel housing lining.

e side airbag system gives the front seat occu-

r the upper body in the event of a severe side

otes on the operation of the side airbag

bags reduce the risk of injury to passengers on

the body facing the impact. In addition to their

the occupants in a collision, the seat belts also

Fig. 22 Side airbag in driver seat

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 36 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Safety notes on the frontal airbag system

If you use airbags correctly, they can considerably reduce the

risk of injury in many kinds of accident.

WARNING

It is important for the driver and front passenger to keep a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel. If the minimum distance is not observed then the airbags do not correctly protect the vehicle occupants; risk of fatal injuries! In addition, the front seats and head restraints must always be positioned correctly for the height of the occupant.

If you are not wearing a seat belt, if you lean forward or to the side while travelling or assume an incorrect sitting position, there is a substantially increased risk of injury. This increased risk of injury will be further increased if you are struck by an inflating airbag.

Never let a child travel on the front seat without an appropriate restraint system. If the airbag is triggered in an accident, children can sustain serious or fatal injuries from the airbag as it inflates page 45, Child safety.

The deployment space between the front passengers and the airbags must not in any case be occupied by other passenger, pets and objects.

The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.

It is also important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.

Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.

Side airbags*

Description of side airb

The airbag system is no

The front side airbags are loca

seat backrests fig. 22. The

housing lining. The locations a

region of the backrests and in

Together with the seat belts, th

pants additional protection fo

collision page 39, Safety n

system.

In a side collision, the side air

the front seats to the areas of

normal function of protecting

Airbag system 37

Safety Fir Technical Data

r door panels have been removed or if the tly fitted.

f the loudspeakers in the door panels have oles left by the loudspeakers have been

enings are closed or covered if loudspeakers d in the interior door panels.

he doors should be made in a qualified author-

gs can only provide maximum protection if the tly page 10, Proper sitting position for

he airbag system, have the system checked orkshop. Otherwise, during a side collision,

er, or not trigger correctly.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 37 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

hold the passengers on the front seats and the outer rear seats in a position

where the side airbags can provide maximum protection.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part

of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the

airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their

seat belts. Therefore, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times,

not only because this is required by law in most countries, but also for your

safety page 19, Brief Introduction.

The side airbag system will not be triggered if:

the ignition is switched off,

there is a minor side collision,

there is a frontal collision,

there is a rear-end collision,

the vehicle turns over.

The main parts of the airbag system are:

an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit),

The front side airbags in the backrests of the front seats and the rear side

airbags in the lining of the rear wheel housing.

a warning lamp in the dash panel insert page 30.

The airbag system operation is monitored electronically. The airbag warning

lamp will light up for approx. 4 seconds every time the ignition is switched on

(self-diagnosis).

WARNING

In a side-on collision, the side airbags will not work, if the sensors do not correctly measure the pressure increase on the interior of the doors, due to air escaping through the areas with holes or openings in the door panel.

Never drive the vehicle if the interior panels have been removed.

Never drive if the interio panels have not been correc

Never drive the vehicle i been removed, unless the h correctly closed.

Always check that the op or other equipment are fitte

Any work carried out to t ised workshop.

The seat belts and airba occupants are seated correc occupants.

If a fault has occured in t immediately by a qualified w the system may fail to trigg

WARNING (continued)

Airbag system38

ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-

ts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and

tected by the airbag.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 38 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Function of side airbags

Inflated airbags can reduce the risk of head or chest injury in

many side impact collisions.

In some side collisions the side airbag is triggered on the impact side of the

vehicle fig. 23.

In certain types of accident the front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-

gered together.

When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas.

In order to provide the desired extra protection in an accident, the airbags

have to deploy extremely rapidly (within thousandth of a second). A fine dust

may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-

tion of fire in the vehicle.

The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the occupants of the

front seats and the outer rear seats and help to reduce the risk of injury to the

upper body.

The special design of the airb

lant gas when an occupant pu

chest are surrounded and pro

Fig. 23 Inflated side airbag on left side of vehicle

Airbag system 39

Safety Fir Technical Data

n incorrect sitting position, they expose them- f injury in the event of an accident. This is

hild is travelling on the front passenger seat ggered in an accident; this could have critical ious injury or death page 45, Child safety.

bag system or removal and installation of the r repairs (such as removal of the front seat) y a qualified workshop. Otherwise, faults may em operation.

y components of the airbag system in any way.

s are managed through sensors located in the ensure the correct functioning of the side and ors nor the door panels should be modified in akers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag tly. All work carried out on the front door must shop.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 39 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag system

If airbags are used correctly, they can considerably reduce the

risk of injury in side impact collisions.

WARNING

If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward, or are not seated correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk of injury if the side airbag system is triggered in an accident.

In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts fastened while travelling.

Occupants of the outer seats must never carry any objects or pets in the deployment space between them and the airbags, or allow children or other passengers to travel in this position. It is also important not to attach any accessories (such as cup holders) to the doors. This would impair the protection offered by the side airbags.

The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.

Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, must not be exerted upon the backrest bolster because the system may be damaged. In this case, the side airbags would not be triggered.

Under no circumstances should protective covers be fitted over the driver seat or front passenger seat unless the covers have been expressly approved for use in your vehicle. Because the airbag is triggered from the side of the backrest, the use of non-approved seat covers would obstruct the side airbag, seriously reducing the airbag's effectiveness page 208, Accessories, parts replacement and modifications.

Any damage to the original seat upholstery or around the seams of the side airbag units must be repaired immediately by a qualified workshop.

The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.

When children assume a selves to an increased risk o particularly the case if the c and the airbag system is tri consequences including ser

Any work on the side air airbag components for othe should only be performed b occur during the airbag syst

Do not attempt to modif

The side and head airbag interior of the front doors. To head airbags neither the do any way (e.g. fitting loudspe system may not work correc be made in a qualified work

WARNING (continued)

Airbag system40

ntries, but also for your safety page 19,

airbag system are:

onitoring system (control unit),

s with gas generator) for the driver, front

the rear seats,

ash panel insert page 30.

s monitored electronically.

l not be triggered

f,

. 24 Location of left curtain airbag

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 40 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Curtain airbags

Description of curtain airbags

The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.

The curtain airbags are located on both sides in the interior above the doors

fig. 24 and are identified with the text AIRBAG.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the curtain airbag system gives the occu-

pants additional protection for the head and upper body in the event of a

severe side collision page 41, Safety notes on the operation of the

curtain airbag system.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part

of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the

airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their

seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly. Therefore,

it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times, not only because this

is required by law in most cou

Brief Introduction.

The main parts of the curtain

an electronic control and m

the curtain airbags (airbag

passenger and passengers on

a warning lamp in the d

The airbag system operation i

The curtain airbag system wil

the ignition is switched of

Fig

Airbag system 41

Safety Fir Technical Data

he curtain airbag is triggered on the impact side

e front, side and curtain airbags may be trig-

, the airbag is filled with propellant gas. In the

rs the side windows and door pillars.

d extra protection in an accident, the airbags

idly (within thousandth of a second). A fine dust

deploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-

shion the movement of the front occupants and

ry to the upper body.

ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-

uts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and

tected by the airbag.

eration of the curtain airbag system

ctly, they can considerably reduce the

inds of accident.

ags to provide their maximum protection, the ust always be maintained with seat belts

ead air bag must be disconnected in those ger compartment separation screen. See an make this adjustment.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 41 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

there is a frontal collision,

there is a rear-end collision,

if the vehicle rolls,

during a minor side collision,

WARNING

If a fault has occured in the airbag system, have the system checked imme- diately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that during a collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.

Function of curtain airbags

Fully inflated airbags reduce the risk of head or chest injury in

a side collision.

During some side collisions t

of the vehicle fig. 25.

In certain types of accident th

gered together.

When the system is triggered

process, the curtain bag cove

In order to provide the desire

have to deploy extremely rap

may develop when the airbag

tion of fire in the vehicle.

The fully deployed airbags cu

help to reduce the risk of inju

The special design of the airb

lant gas when an occupant p

chest are surrounded and pro

Safety notes on the op

If you use airbags corre

risk of injury in many k

WARNING

In order for the side airb prescribed sitting position m fastened while travelling.

For safety reasons, the h vehicles fitted with a passen Authorised Service Centre to

Fig. 25 Deployed curtain airbags

Airbag system42

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 42 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

There must be no other persons, animals or objects between the occu- pants of the outer seats and the deployment space of the curtain airbags so that the curtain airbag can deploy without restriction and provide the greatest possible protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have not been expressly approved for use in your vehicle may not be attached to the side windows page 208, Accessories, parts replacement and modifica- tions.

The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. Please, do not hang the clothes on coat hangers.

The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.

Any work on the curtain airbag system or removal and installation of the airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the roof lining) should only be performed by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, faults may occur during the airbag system operation.

Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.

The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct functioning of the side and head airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag system may not work correctly. All work carried out on the front door must be made in a qualified workshop.

WARNING (continued)

Airbag system 43

Safety Fir Technical Data

g is deactivated, this means that only the

ed. All the other airbags in the vehicle

r airbag

h in the key operated switch in the glove

F fig. 26.

lamp OFF on the instrument panel

hen the ignition is switched on .

airbag

h in the key-operated switch in the glove

fig. 26.

Fig. 27 Warning lamp for deactivated passenger airbag in centre console

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 43 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Deactivating airbags*

Disabling front passenger airbag

If you fit a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat,

the front passenger airbag must be de-activated.

When the passenger airba

frontal airbag is deactivat

remain functional.

Disabling front passenge

Switch the ignition on.

Turn the ignition switc

box to the position OF

Check that the warning

fig. 27 remains lit w

Enabling front passenger

Switch the ignition on.

Turn the ignition switc

box to the position ON

Fig. 26 In the glovebox: key for enabling and disa- bling front passenger airbag

Airbag system44

er the front passenger airbag will deploy all your passengers of this.

ey to activate / deactivate the passenger front ont airbag will be activated / deactivated. The on the passenger side will remain active.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 44 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Check that the warning lamp on the instrument panel does

page 43, fig. 27 not light up when the ignition is switched on

.

WARNING

The driver is responsible for the proper position of the key-operated switch.

You should deactivate the front passenger airbag only if you have to use a rear-facing child seat in exceptional cases. page 45, Child safety.

Never install a child seat facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This represents a risk of fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is necessary in exceptional circumstances to transport a child in a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat, you must always disable the front passenger airbag.

As soon as the child seat is no longer needed on the front passenger seat, enable the front passenger airbag again.

Only deactivate the passenger airbag when the ignition is off, other- wise a fault may occur in the airbag system, this will create a danger that in case of an accident, the airbag does not deploy properly or does not deploy at all.

When the passenger airbag is deactivated, if the warning lamp AIRBAG OFF is not continuously lit up when the front passenger airbag is disabled, there may be a fault in the airbag system:

Have the airbag system inspected immediately by a qualified work- shop.

Do not use a child seat on the front passenger seat! The front passenger airbag could be triggered despite the fact that there is a fault in the system and, as a result, a child could sustain serious or fatal inju- ries.

It is predictable wheth during an accident! Warn

When using the ignition k airbag, only the passenger fr side airbag and head airbag

WARNING (continued)

Child safety 45

Safety Fir Technical Data

e together with the on-board documentation,

t instructions manual.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 45 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Child safety

Brief introduction

Introduction

Statistics show that children are generally safer on the rear

seat than on the front passenger seat.

We recommend that children under 12 years of age are transported on the

rear seats. Children travelling on the rear seat must use a child restraint

system or the seat belts provided, depending on their age, height and

weight. For safety reasons, the child restraint system should be installed in

the centre of the rear seat or behind the front passenger's seat.

The physical laws involved and the forces acting in a collision apply also to

children. page 20, Why wear seat belts?. But unlike adults, children do

not have muscle and bone structures fully developed. This means that chil-

dren are subject to a greater risk of injury.

To reduce this risk, children must always use special child restraint systems

when travelling in the vehicle.

We recommend the use of child safety products from the SEAT Genuine Acces-

sories Program including systems for all ages made by Peke2).

These systems have been especially designed and approved, complying with

the ECE-R44. regulation.

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-

ments when installing and using child seats. Always read and observe

page 46, Safety notes on using child seats.

We recommend you to includ

the manufacturer's Child Sea

2) Not for all countries

Child safety46

bies on your lap, this can result in potentially

ransported in a vehicle without being properly eel on a seat while travelling. In an accident, gh the vehicle, causing possibly fatal injuries er passengers.

roper sitting position when the car is moving, reater risk of injury in the event of sudden ccident. This is particularly important if the

t passenger seat and the airbag system is trig- could cause serious injury or even death.

protect your child!

sed child alone on a child seat or in the

nditions, it may become extremely hot or cold e fatal.

n 1.5 metres tall must not wear a normal seat system, as this could cause injuries to the ring a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an

bing to become twisted or jammed, or to rub

ts can cause injuries even in a minor collision vres.

ximum protection only when the belt web is 23, Seat belts.

y a child seat page 47, Child seats.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 46 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Safety notes on using child seats

Proper use of child seats substantially reduces the risk of

injury in an accident!

As the driver, you are responsible for any children you transport in

your vehicle.

Protect your children by properly using appropriate child seats

page 47.

Always ensure that the belt webbing is properly positioned

according to the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the

child seat.

When travelling, do not allow children to distract you from traffic.

Take breaks regularly during long trips. Take a break at least

every two hours.

WARNING

Never install a child seat facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This could lead to a risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is necessary, in exceptional cases, to transport a child in the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must always be disabled page 43, Deactivating airbags*. If the passenger seat has a height adjustment option, move it to the highest position.

For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the airbag off, an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.

All passengers, especially children, must assume the proper sitting position and be properly belted in while travelling.

Never hold children or ba fatal injuries to the child!

Never allow a child to be t secured, or to stand up or kn the child could be flung throu to themselves and to the oth

If children assume an imp they expose themselves to g braking manoeuvre or in an a child is travelling on the fron gered in an accident; as this

A suitable child seat can

Never leave an unsupervi vehicle.

Depending on weather co inside the vehicle. This can b

Children who are less tha belt without a child restraint abdominal and neck areas du accident.

Do not allow the belt web on any sharp edges.

Incorrectly worn seat bel or in sudden braking manoeu

The seat belt provides ma properly positioned page

Only one child may occup

WARNING (continued)

Child safety 47

Safety Fir Technical Data

eats

d a correctly adjusted seat belt can

r child.

ut 9 months old and 10 kg in weight the most

aring in the illustration fig. 28.

out 18 months old and 13 kg in weight the most

aring in the illustration.

tructions and observe any statutory require-

sing child seats.

e together with the on-board documentation,

t instructions manual.

formation and warnings concerning the use of notes on using child seats on page 46.

Fig. 28 A group 0 rear- facing child seat fitted on the rear seat.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 47 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Child seats

Categorisation of child seats into groups

Use only child seats that are officially approved and suitable

for the child.

Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-R 44. ECE-R. It means that:

Economic Commission for Europe Regulation

The child seats are grouped into 5 categories:

Group 0: Children up to 10 kg

Group 0+: Children up to 13 kg

Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg

Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg

Group 3: from 22 to 36 kg

Child seats that have been tested and approved under the ECE R 44 standard

bear the test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test number

below it).

Group 0 and 0+ child s

A suitable child seat an

help you to protect you

Group 0: For babies from abo

suitable seats are those appe

Group 0+: For babies from ab

suitable seats are those appe

Follow the manufacturer's ins

ments when installing and u

We recommend you to includ

the manufacturer's Child Sea

WARNING

Read and always observe in child seats in Safety

Child safety48

ts

a correctly adjusted seat belt can

child.

tructions and observe any statutory require-

ing child seats.

together with the on-board documentation,

instructions manual.

weighing between 15 and 25 kg are best

ts together with properly adjusted seat belts.

ighing between 22 and 36 kg but less than 1.5

by seat cushions with head restraints together

fig. 30.

Fig. 30 Forward-facing child seat installed on rear seat.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 48 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Group 1 child seats

A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can

help you to protect your child.

Child seats using the ISOFIX system or seats in which the child faces the

rear of the car are most appropriate for babies and small children weighing

between 9 and 18 kg.

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-

ments when installing and using child seats.

We recommend you to include together with the on-board documentation,

the manufacturer's Child Seat instructions manual.

WARNING

Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats in Safety notes on using child seats on page 46.

Group 2 and 3 child sea

A suitable child seat and

help you to protect your

Follow the manufacturer's ins

ments when installing and us

We recommend you to include

the manufacturer's Child Seat

Group 2 child seats

Children under 7 years of age

protected by group 2 child sea

Group 3 child seats

Children over 7 years of age we

metres tall are best protected

with properly worn seat belts

Fig. 29 A category 1 forward-facing child seat fitted on the rear seat.

Child safety 49

Safety Fir Technical Data

iversal approved restraining systems for use in this age

ersal retention systems are those fitted using the adult

enger seat as far to rear as possible, as high as possible

activate the airbag.

ention systems using the ISOFIX anchors.

g, children must be secured in the vehicle with a uitable for age, weight and size.

child seat facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front less the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This njuries to the child! However, if it is necessary, in excep- nsport a child in the front passenger seat, the front

must always be disabled page 43, Deactivating ve the seat to its highest position, in case it has this

ys observe information and warnings concerning the use in Safety notes on using child seats on page 46.

Weight

Seat locations

Front passenger

Rear outer Rear centre

<10 kg U* U/L U

<13 kg U* U/L U

9-18 kg U* U/L U

5-36 kg U* U U

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 49 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

WARNING

The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie approximately on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm. The seat belt must lie close to the upper part of the body. The lap belt part must lie across the pelvis, not across the stomach, and always fit closely. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack page 23, Seat belts.

Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats in Safety notes on using child seats on page 46.

Securing child seats

Ways to secure a child seat

A child seat can be secured differently on the rear seat and on

the front passenger seat.

You can secure a child seat to the rear seat or front passenger seat in the

following ways:

Child seats in groups 0 to 3 can be secured with a seat belt.

Group 0, 0+ and 1 child seats with the ISOFIX system can be secured to

the ISOFIX retaining rings. In this case, seat belts are not necessary.

U: Suitable for un

category (univ

seat belt).

*: Move the pass

and always de

L: Suitable for ret

WARNING

When travellin restraint system s

Never install a passenger seat un could cause fatal i tional cases, to tra passenger airbag airbags* and mo adjustment.

Read and alwa of child seats

Category

Group 0

Group 0+

Group 1

Group 2 / 3 1

Child safety50

ntings are available in your Authorised Service

signed only for use with ISOFIX child seats.

without the ISOFIX system, retaining belts gs this can result in potentially fatal injuries

t is secured correctly by using the ISOFIX

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 50 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Securing child seat with the ISOFIX system

The child seat with ISOFIX system can be secured quickly,

easily and safely on the rear outer seats using the system

When removing or fitting the child seat, please be sure to follow the

manufacturer's instructions.

Move the seat as far to rear as it will go.

Press the child seat onto the ISOFIX retaining rings until the

child seat can be heard to engage securely.

Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure that it is secure.

Two ISOFIX retaining rings are fitted on each rear seat. In some vehicles, the

rings are secured to the seat frame and, in others, they are secured to the rear

floor. The access to ISOFIX rings is between the rear back rest and the seat.

Child seats with ISOFIX mou

Centres.

WARNING

The retaining rings are de

Never secure child seats or objects to the fastening rin to the child.

Ensure that the child sea anchors.

Fig. 31 ISOFIX securing rings

51

Safety Fir Technical Data

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 51 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

52

Fig. 3

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 52 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

2 Instrument panel

Cockpit 53

Safety Fir Technical Data

entilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

r deactivated front passenger airbag . . . . .

irbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

nt lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

rtment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ntre console:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ntrol* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

r / Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ht switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ontrol lever* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

151

153

157

132

43

29

135

170

140

91

185

231

176

144

126

174

114

165

163

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 53 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Operating instructions

Cockpit

Overview

Overview of the instrument panel

This overview will help you to familiarise yourself with the

controls and displays.

Door release lever

Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lighting control for instrument and control lighting . . . . . . . .

Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Air vent

Turn signal and main beam lever and cruise control system* .

Instrument panel:

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Indication lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Horn (works only when the ignition is on)/ and driver front

airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever and operation of

the multi-function display* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Controls on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Left seat heating button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Controls for

Heating* and v

Climatic* . . . .

Climatronic* .

Radio/Navigator*

Right seat heating

Indication lamp fo

Front passenger a

Glove compartme

Gear shift lever .

Cup holder compa

Controls on the ce

Central locking

ESP* . . . . . . . .

Tyre pressure co

Park Pilot* . . .

Cigarette lighte

Wing mirror adj

Handbrake . . . . .

Hazard warning lig

Pedals

Ignition lock . . . .

Steering column c

A1

A2 109

A3 113

A4 113

A5

A6 116, 179

A7

55

58

73

A8

29

A9

121, 60

A10 83

A11 132

A12

A13

A14

A15

A16

A17

A18

A19

A20

A21

A22

A23

A24

A25

Cockpit54

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 54 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Handle for releasing the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Button for opening and closing the front windows . . . . . . . . .

Safety switch* for the rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Control* for opening and closing the rear windows . . . . . . . . .

Note Some of the items of equipment listed here are fitted only on certain

models/model years or are optional extras.

A26 213

A27 104

A28 104

A29 104

Cockpit 55

Safety Fir Technical Data

g. 33 Detailed view of instrument panel: instrument nel

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 55 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Instruments

Instrument overview

The instruments display the vehicle operating status.

Detailed view of instrument panel: instrument panel

Fuel gauge page 56

Multi-function display

Engine coolant temperature gauge page 56

Rev counter page 57

Time adjustment button / trip recorder reset button page 57

Speedometer

Fi pa

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

Cockpit56

ture display

ngine coolant temperature.

heavy engine loads fig. 35.

the needle should be in the middle section of

y also rise when the engine is working hard,

peratures. This is no cause for concern as long

light up and no warning* text appears in the

, fig. 48 will light up if the needle is in the

arning appears on the instrument panel

Fig. 35 Instrument panel: engine coolant tempera- ture gauge

A2

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 56 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Fuel gauge and reserve indicator

Instrument panel: fuel gauge

The fuel tank has a capacity of approx. 55 litres.

When the needle reaches the reserve zone fig. 34 (arrow), the warning

lamp will light and an acoustic signal will sound reminding the driver to refuel. At this point there are still about 7 litres of fuel in the tank.

The following text appears on the instrument panel display3) PLEASE REFUEL [XXX]*

Engine coolant tempera

This gauge shows the e

Needle in cold zone

Avoid high engine speeds and

Needle in normal zone

In normal driving conditions,

the scale. The temperature ma

especially at high outside tem

as the warning lamp does not

combi-instrument display.

Needle in warning zone

The warning lamp* page 73

warning zone. The following w

3) Depending on the model version

Fig. 34 Instrument panel: fuel gauge

AA

AB

AC

Cockpit 57

Safety Fir Technical Data

nvironment rs early will help you to save fuel and minimise

d with a digital odometer and a trip counter, in

s display.

the instructions shown on page 190 should

k*

ted in the instrument panel display.

page 55, fig. 33 clockwise until the

our. The hour will flash. To change the

.

lockwise to the second click to set the

ill flash. To change the minutes, press the

A5

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 57 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

display4). Stop the car and switch off the engine. Check the coolant level

page 220 .

Even if the coolant level is correct do not continue driving. You should obtain

technical assistance.

WARNING

When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warn- ings page 213.

Caution Accessories in front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect of the coolant. At

high outside temperatures and high engine loads, there is a risk of the

engine overheating.

Rev counter

The rev. counter displays the engine speed in revolutions per

minute.

The start of the red zone page 55, fig. 33 indicates the maximum

engine speed operating at service temperature. However, it is advisable to

change up a into a higher gear, move the selector lever to D or lift your foot

off the accelerator before the needle reaches the red zone.

Caution The rev counter needle must never enter the red zone on the scale. Risk of

engine damage.

For the sake of the e Changing up into higher gea

engine noise.

Speedometer

The speedometer is equippe

addition to a service interval

During the running-in period,

be followed.

Setting the digital cloc

The digital clock is loca

Turn the setting knob first click to set the h

hour, press the button

Turn the setting knob c

minutes. The minutes w

button.

4) Depending on the model version

A4

Cockpit58

ment panel shows the mileage and

he selector lever position.

On the right of the display: Selector lever posi-

atic gearbox*. The actual position of the

which is engaged (for Tiptronic) are high-

tomatic displays in this field.

those on the multi-function display (MFD)

ormation texts and warnings.

nformation and which can be used to make

shown: Instrument panel menus

le service interval display.

Fig. 37 Digital display in the instrument panel

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 58 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Digital display in the instrument panel

Display (without warning or information texts)

The display in the instrument panel shows, amongst other

things, the mileage and trip recorder as well as the selector

lever position.

Digital clock display page 57. On the right of the display: Selector

lever position display for the automatic gearbox*. The current position of

the selector lever or the gear which is engaged (for Tiptronic)* is high-

lighted.

Ambient temperature.

Distance display or flexible service interval display.*

Displayed categories*

The display in the instru

trip recorder as well as t

Clock: Setting the time.

tion display for the autom

selector lever or the gear

lighted.

There are optional and au

Optional indicators: e.g.

Automatic indicators: Inf

Menus providing further i

diverse settings are also

Ambient temperature:

Distance display or flexib

Fig. 36 Detail of the instrument cluster: screen with different indicators

A1

A2

A3

A1

A2

A3

A4

Cockpit 59

Safety Fir Technical Data

pear in the mileage displays if a service is due

pears and the display km with the distance

ext service appointment is due. The display will

0 seconds. A clock symbol appears and the

ice appointment should be carried out. The

in the instrument panel display: SERV. IN... KM age will disappear approximately 20 seconds

on or the engine is running. The normal display

the reset button on the trip counter or by

the MFI page 60, fig. 39 .

, you can call up the current service message by

t knob for 2 seconds.

d by a minus sign in front of the mileage or day

AB

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 59 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Recommended gear display*

This display helps to save fuel.

Use the gear display to save fuel. If you are driving in the correct gear, a dot

will be shown next to the gear display. If you are not in the correct gear, an

arrow will appear next to the gear display indicating whether you should

change up or down.

Mileage display or Service Interval Display

Distance display

The left-hand counter in the display registers the total amount of distance

covered by the vehicle.

The right-hand counter registers the short journeys. The last digit indicates

steps of 100 metres. The trip recorder counter may be reset by holding down

the reset button page 55, fig. 33 for a few seconds.

Service interval display

A Service pre-warning will ap

soon. A spanner symbol ap

that can be driven until the n

change after approximately 1

number of days until the serv

following message is shown

OR... DAYS. The service mess

after the ignition is switched

can be resumed by pressing

pressing the rocker switch of

With the ignition switched on

pressing the trip counter rese

An overdue service is indicate

information.

Fig. 38 Gear display

A6

Cockpit60

uses two automatic memories: 1 - Actual ory. The selected memory will be shown

rner of the display.

, briefly press button fig. 39 on the

to change from one memory to another or

steering wheel controls fig. 39.

you would like to reset.

n the windscreen wiper lever or button

ontrols for at least 2 seconds.

travel and consumption rates from the

ed on until it is switched off. If the journey is

switching off the ignition, the new values will

corder memory. The memory will automatically

errupted for more than two hours.

s the journey data for any number of individual

s switched off for longer than two hours) up to

utes travel time, 9,999 km distance travelled

d. The memory will automatically be deleted if

ached.

AA

AA

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 60 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Display with multi-function display (MFD)*

The multi-function display (MFD) shows you information on

the journey and fuel consumption.

The multi-function system

memory and 2 - Total mem in the upper right-hand co

Selecting a memory

When the ignition is on

windscreen wiper lever

press button on the

Resetting a memory

Select the memory that

Hold down button o

on the steering wheel c

The trip memory 1 collects the

moment the ignition is switch

continued within two hours of

be added to the existing trip re

be deleted if the journey is int

The journey memory 2 collect

journeys (even if the ignition i

a total of 99 hours and 59 min

and 999 litres of fuel consume

one of the named values is re

Fig. 39 Rocker buttons A and B. Steering wheel controls.

Fig. 40 Digital display in the instrument panel

AA

AA

Cockpit 61

Safety Fir Technical Data

stance you can travel with the remaining fuel)

n

play

wn on the display.

t of time which has elapsed since the ignition

n both memories is 99 hours and 59 minutes.

ly be deleted once this value has been reached.

own after running a distance of approximately

ar in the display until that time. The display will

while the vehicle is in motion.

ce travelled since the ignition was switched on.

n both memories is 9999 km. The memory will

e this value has been reached.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 61 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Displays in the multi-function display (MFD)*

You can switch between the following displays in the multi-function display

(MFD) by operating the rocker switch fig. 41 on the windscreen wiper

lever.

Memory displays

Driving speed

Journey duration

Average speed

Distance

Distance to empty (the di

Average fuel consumptio

Current fuel consumption

Ambient temperature dis

Speed warning

Km/h - Driving speed

Driving speed is digitally sho

min - Journey duration

The display shows the amoun

was switched on.

The maximum display value i

The memory will automatical

km/h - Average speed

The average speed will be sh

100 metres. Dashes will appe

be updated every 5 seconds

km - Distance travelled

The display shows the distan

The maximum display value i

automatically be deleted onc

Fig. 41 Rocker buttons A and B. Steering wheel controls.

Fig. 42 Digital instru- ment panel display: average fuel consumption indicator.

AB

Cockpit62

ng the rocker switch in steps of 5 km/h

memory value.

e road surface even if the snowflake symbol this reason, not rely exclusively on this

or travelling at very low speeds, the tempera-

higher than the actual ambient temperature as

om the engine.

text in the display*

display with warning lamps and

ports.

rtain components and functions when the igni-

he vehicle is moving. Functional faults are indi-

gs and information texts in the display. An

rtain cases.

s (priority 1) and yellow warning symbols

es given on a fault, you will receive information

r will be asked to carry out certain tasks.

AB

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 62 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Km - Fuel range

The fuel range is calculated using the figures for tank content and current fuel

consumption. It shows how far the vehicle can travel using the same condi-

tions as a reference.

litre/100 km - Average fuel consumption

The average fuel consumption will be shown page 61, fig. 42 after a

distance of approximately 100 metres has been travelled. Dashes will appear

in the display until that time. The display will be updated every 5 seconds

while the vehicle is in motion. The amount of fuel used will not be shown.

ltr/100 km or ltr/hr - Current fuel consumption

The display will show the current fuel consumption in litre/km whilst the

vehicle is in motion or in litre/hour when the vehicle is in a stationary position

with the engine running.

Using this display you can see how your driving style affects fuel consump-

tion page 192.

Ambient temperature display

The measurement margin extends from -45C to +58C. At temperatures

lower than +4C, an ice crystal symbol is displayed and a warning sounds

if the vehicle is moving at more than 20 km/h (ice warning). This symbol will

flash for about 10 seconds and remains lit until the exterior temperature rises

above +4C or 6C if it was already lit.

Set speed indicator

When driving at the required speed, enter the speed indicator mode and

press the button (Reset), the display remembers the indicated speed. If

the indicated speed is exceeded, a warning text is displayed on the screen5)

and a warning signal sounds.

This may be deactivated by pressing the button (Reset).

The speed may be altered usi

within 5 seconds of the initial

WARNING

There could be black ice on th is not shown. You should, for display - Risk of accident!

Note When the vehicle is stationary

ture displayed may be slightly

a result of the heat radiated fr

Warning or information

Faults are shown in the

warning/information re

The system runs a check on ce

tion is switched on and while t

cated by symbols with warnin

audible warning is given in ce

Warning symbols

There are red warning symbol

(priority 2)

Information text

In addition to warning messag

in the display on procedures o 5) Depending on the model version, the message on the screen may vary and may be

represented by flashing of the speed indication or by a speed message.

AA

AA

Cockpit 63

Safety Fir Technical Data

eports are detected at the same time, the

ter the other for about 2 seconds at a time. After

xt will disappear and the symbol will be shown

he display.

ll not be shown until all Priority 1 warning

!

g reports (yellow):6)

e information text PLEASE REFUEL.

symbol with the information text REFILL . Refill the windscreen washer tank

he model.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 63 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Note In the case of screens without warning or information texts, faults are indi-

cated exclusively by the warning lamps.

Warning reports, Priority 1 (red)*

If one of these faults occurs, the warning lamp will flash or light up and will

be accompanied by three audible warnings. This is a danger warning. Stop

the car and switch off the engine. Check the fault and correct it. Obtain profes-

sional assistance if necessary.

If several priority 1 faults are detected at the same time, the symbols will be

displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time and will continue

until the fault is corrected.

No menus will be shown in the display for the duration of a priority 1 warning

report.

Examples of priority 1 warning reports (red)

Brake system symbol with the warning text STOP BRAKE FLUID SERVICE MANUAL or STOP BRAKE FAULT SERVICE MANUAL.

Coolant symbol with the warning text STOP SEE COOLANT SERVICE MANUAL.

Engine oil pressure symbol with the warning text STOP ENGINE OIL PRESSURE LOW! SERVICE MANUAL.

Warning reports, Priority 2 (yellow)*

If one of these faults occurs, the warning lamp lights up, and is accompanied

by one audible warning. The function should be checked as soon as possible.

If several priority 2 warning r

symbols are displayed one af

a set time, the information te

as a reminder at the side of t

Priority 2 warning reports wi

reports have been dealt with

Examples of priority 2 warnin

Fuel warning light with th

Windscreen washer fluid

WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID page 222.

6) Depending on the version of t

Cockpit64

ning will be used as an example of how to

ood idea if you are, for example, using

suited for the top speed of the vehicle.

th the MFD lever

or two seconds to return to main menu

y be necessary to repeat this operation

displayed.

uration with the MFD lever

m the menu, press the upper or lower end

e selected option is displayed between

also be a triangle on the right.

tion.

Fig. 44 Steering wheel controls: button A to confirm the menu selec- tion and switch B to change the menu

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 64 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Instrument panel menus*

Example of menu use

All the menus on the instrument panel may be used according

to the following procedure. The instrument panel menus may

vary according to the version of the model.

The setting of a speed war

use the menus. This is a g

winter tyres which are not

1. Open the main menu wi

Switch the ignition on.

Hold down button f

from other menu. It ma

until the main menu is

2. Open the menu Config

To choose an option fro

of the rocker switch. Th

two lines and there will

Select menu Configura

Fig. 43 Windscreen wiper lever: button A to confirm the menu selection and rocker switch B to change the menu

AB

Cockpit 65

Safety Fir Technical Data

uipment one or more of these menus will be

n f menu displayed

rent set speed is displayed

es will be shown if the function is deactivated.

nction is activated or deactivated

value increases by 10 km/h

value decreases by 10 km/h

nu Winter tyres is closed and the last dis-

menu is shown.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 65 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Press button on the windscreen wiper lever. The Configura- tion menu is opened.

2. Access the Configuration menu with the steering wheel controls

To access the Configuration menu, press button

page 64, fig. 44 until the menu is displayed. Now you are in

this menu.

3. Open the main menu Winter tyres

Select option Winter tyres using switch .

Press button . The menu Winter tyres is opened.

4. Program a speed limit warning

Use switch to select the menu entry + 10 km/h or - 10 km/h

and press button to either increase or decrease the set speed.

5. To activate and deactivate the speed limit warning

Use switch to select the menu point On / Off and press the

button to switch the speed warning on or off. If the speed

warning is deactivated, three dashes will be displayed ---

6. To close the menu Winter tyres

In the menu select Back.

The function Winter tyres sends an optical and an acoustic signal when the

vehicle reaches the set speed.

Example menu Winter tyres

Note For electronic and vehicle eq

displayed.

AA

AC

AB

AA

AB

AB

AB

On the display Winter tyres

Functio Name o

X km/h The cur

or --- or dash

On / Off If the fu

+10 km/h The set

-10 km/h The set

Back The me

played

Cockpit66

t button for at least 2 seconds. It may

this operation until the main menu is

in menu

m the menu, press the upper or lower end

e selected option is displayed between

ct the entry.

64

Function

to the multi-function display (MFD): Multi-

n display (MFD)

rent station will be shown when the radio is

d on.

nu is only available if the vehicle is fitted with

ation system. The navigation system must be

d on. When the route guidance is activated,

ing arrows and proximity bars are displayed.

play is similar to that of the Navigation sys-

ute guidance is not activated, the direction of

ompass) and the name of the street along

ou are driving are shown.

AB

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 66 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Main menu

The menu provides access to the different display functions

(only with the MFD lever).

Open main menu

Switch the ignition on.

Press and hold the ejec

be necessary to repeat

displayed.

Select a menu from the ma

To choose an option fro

of rocker switch . Th

two horizontal lines.

Press button to sele

Example of menu use page Fig. 45 Windscreen wiper lever (MFD): button A to confirm the menu selec- tion and rocker switch B to change the menu

Fig. 46 Digital instru- ment panel display: Main menu

Main menu

Multi-function dis- play

Change

functio

Audio The cur

switche

Navigation This me

a navig

switche

the turn

The dis

tem.

If the ro

travel (c

which y

AB

AA

Cockpit 67

Safety Fir Technical Data

menu (MFD)

lay (MFD) shows you information on

nsumption.

FD) has two automatic memories: 1 - Trip y. The selected memory is shown on the upper

lay fig. 47 at all times.

ay menu

display menu from the main menu page 66

on the windscreen wiper lever or the multifunc-

ory to another, briefly press button

ge 64 on the windscreen wiper lever or the

ion lever page 64, fig. 44 page 64 while

n.

Fig. 47 Multifunction display (MFD) instrument panel display.

AA

OK

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 67 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Note For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be

displayed.

Multi-function display

The multi-function disp

the journey and fuel co

The multifunction display (M

memory and 2 - Total memor right hand section of the disp

Open the multifunction displ

Select the Multifunction and press the button

tion lever*.

Selecting a memory

To change from one mem

page 64, fig. 43 pa

button on the multifunct

the ignition is switched o

Telephone This menu is only available if the vehicle is fitted with

a telephone mounted by the manufacturer: Fixed tel-

ephone installation

Vehicle condition This menu displays current warning or information

texts: Vehicle status menu

This option flashes when one of these texts is dis-

played.

Configuration This option allows the time, the speed warning when

using winter tyres, units, language, independent

heating, the Light and visibility menu and the Con-

venience menu to be reset.

OK

Cockpit68

displays are shown on the instrument panel

function Display Data from the Configuration

ted or deactivated individually by marking the

he button on the windscreen wiper lever or

eel*.

t of time which has elapsed since the ignition

both memories is 99 hours and 59 minutes.

y be deleted once this value has been reached.

100km or l/h

nt fuel consumption in mpg whilst the vehicle

hen the vehicle is in a stationary position with

how your driving style affects fuel consump-

km

will be shown after a distance of approximately

. Dashes will appear in the display until that

ted every 5 seconds while the vehicle is in

ed will not be shown.

ing the figures for tank content and current fuel

r the vehicle can travel using the same condi-

OK

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 68 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Resetting a memory

Select the memory where you wish to erase the values.

Hold down button on the windscreen wiper lever or the button on

the multifunction* steering wheel for at least 2 seconds.

The journey memory 1 collects the travel and consumption data from the

moment the ignition is switched on until it is switched off. If the journey is

continued within two hours of switching off the ignition, the new values will

be added to the existing trip recorder memory. The memory will automatically

be deleted if the journey is interrupted for more than two hours.

The total journey memory 2 collects the journey data for any number of indi-

vidual journeys (even if the ignition is switched off for longer than two hours)

up to a total of 99 hours and 59 minutes travel time or 9999 miles distance

travelled. The memory will automatically be deleted if one of the named

values is reached.

Memory indications

The following data can be viewed on the multifunction display using the

rocker switch page 64, fig. 43 page 64 on the windscreen wiper

lever or by pressing button or page 64, fig. 44 on the multifunction

steering wheel*.

Duration

Current fuel consumption

Average fuel consumption

Distance to empty (the distance you can travel with the remaining fuel)

Distance

Average speed

Digital display of speed7)

Speed warning to --- km/h

Personal selection of display

The driver can establish which

display as required:

Select the submenu Multi menu page 70.

The displays can be activa

required option and pressing t

the multifunction steering wh

Duration in h and min

The display shows the amoun

was switched on.

The maximum display value in

The memory will automaticall

Current fuel consumption in l/

The display will show the curre

is in motion or in litres/hour w

the engine running.

Using this display you can see

tion page 192.

Average consumption in l/100

The average fuel consumption

100 metres has been travelled

time. The display will be upda

motion. The amount of fuel us

Fuel range in km

The fuel range is calculated us

consumption. It shows how fa

tions as a reference.

7) It is not possible to see whether the alternative speed display is activated.

AA OK

AB

Cockpit 69

Safety Fir Technical Data

he road surface even if the snowflake symbol r this reason, not rely exclusively on this

ent panels; therefore the multifunction display

nary or travelling at very low speeds, the

e slightly higher than the actual ambient

heat radiated from the engine.

ion steering wheel* do not have buttons on the

ultifunction display can only be controlled from

tion steering wheel*.

ing or information texts

enu

cle status from the main menu: Main

n on the windscreen wiper lever

on the multifunction steering wheel*

til the Vehicle Status menu is displayed.

nd information texts: Information and warning

automatically disappear from the screen after a

Vehicle status menu.

OK AA

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 69 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Distance travelled in km

The display shows the distance travelled since the ignition was switched on.

The maximum display value in both memories is 9999 miles. The memory will

automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.

Average speed in km/h

The average speed will be shown after a distance of approximately 100

metres has been travelled. Dashes will appear in the display until that time.

The display will be updated every 5 seconds while the vehicle is in motion.

Digital display of speed

The instrument panel display gives the speed in digital format7).

Speed warning to --- km/h

This function may help you to keep within the speed limits. Press the

button on the windscreen wiper lever or the multifunction steering wheel*

to select the current speed. The instrument panel display gives the selected

speed, for example, Speed warning 120 km/h. You have five seconds to reset

the speed between 30 km/hand 250 km/h using rocker switch or buttons

or on the multifunction steering wheel*. Press the button or wait

five seconds until the speed is stored and the warning is activated. If the set

speed is exceeded, an acoustic signal is heard and a warning message is

displayed until the speed is reduced to at least 4 km/h below the stored

speed. The function is switched off by pressing the button again. Speed warning --- km/h is now displayed on the instrument panel.

Ambient temperature display

The measurement margin ranges from -40C (-40F) to +50C (+125F). At

outside temperatures below +4C (+39.2F), a snowflake symbol (ice

warning) appears in addition to the outside temperature display. This symbol

flashes for a few seconds and remains lit until the outside temperature rises

above +6C (+42.8F).

WARNING

There could be black ice on t is not shown. You should, fo display - Risk of accident!

Note There are different instrum

may vary.

When the vehicle is statio

temperature displayed may b

temperature as a result of the

Vehicles with a multifunct

windscreen wiper lever. The m

the buttons on the multifunc

Vehicle status menu

This menu shows warn

Open Vehicle Condition m

Select the option Vehi menu and press butto

page 66, fig. 45 or

Press button or

page 64, fig. 44 un

Priority 2 warning messages a

messages on the screen will

time and will be stored in the

OK

AA

AB

OK

OK

Cockpit70

equipment one or more of these menus will be

m this menu it is it possible to alter the vehi-

lighting settings.

hours and minutes of the clock and the navi-

ion system can be changed. Choose between

or 24-hour format and change to summer

e.

menu allows the setting of a speed at which

optical and acoustic warning will be given by

system. You can use this function, for exam-

, if you have fitted winter tyres which are not

ted for the top speed of your vehicle. Please

the section Wheels and tyres.

display texts and the navigation system texts

be seen in different languages.

s option allows you to select the units for dis-

ying temperature, fuel consumption values

distances.

instrument panel also displays the speed in

ther different unit of measurement (mph or

/h) to that given on the speedometer.

sult service messages and reset service inter-

display here.

manufacturer's predefined values for the

ctions of this menu are restored.

s returns to the main menu

ver is used (MFD).

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 70 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

The warning and information texts may be viewed in this menu. If there is no

warning or information message, the option Vehicle status is not displayed.

If there are several messages, each one is shown for a few seconds.

Example of menu use page 64.

Note If there are no warning messages, this menu is not available.

Configuration menu

This menu is used to make the settings for the vehicle func-

tions.

Open Configuration menu

Select the option Configuration from the main menu: Main

menu and press button page 64, fig. 43 on the wind-

screen wiper lever or

Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel*

page 64, fig. 44 until the Configuration menu is displayed.

Example of menu use page 64

Note For electronic and vehicle

displayed.

Displayed on the screen Function

Multifunction display data

This menu is used to establish the data in the

multifunction display menu to be displayed on

the instrument panel page 67

Convenience The convenience set-up mode is used to make

the settings for the convenience functions in the

vehicle.

OK AA

Lights and visibility Fro

cle

Time The

gat

12

tim

Winter tyres The

an

the

ple

sui

see

Settings: Language The

can

Units Thi

pla

and

Aux. Speed The

ano

km

Inter Service Con

val

Manufacturer's settings The

fun

Backa) Thi

a) Only of the windscreen wiper le

Cockpit 71

Safety Fir Technical Data

uipment one or more of these menus will be

Function

door: Individual unlocking activated.

o. locking: the doors are automatically locked

n the vehicle is travelling at more than approx

m/h.

o unlock: the doors are unlocked when the key

moved from the ignition.

ning and closing electric windows: this deter-

es whether to open or close all the windows

n the vehicle is unlocked or locked. The open

tion can also be activated for the driver's door

.

nchronised adjustment is selected, when the

er's side wing mirror is adjusted, the passen-

wing mirror is also moved.

manufacturer's predefined values for the func-

s of this menu are restored.

returns to the Configuration menu

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 71 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

SEAT dealers are able to programme other functions or change the

existing functions depending upon the vehicle equipment.

The Configuration menu is only accessible when the vehicle is at a

standstill.

Convenience menu

From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle conven-

ience settings.

Open menu Convenience

Choose the option Configuration from the main menu and press

the button page 64, fig. 43on the windscreen wiper

lever.

Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel*

page 64, fig. 44 until the Configuration menu is displayed.

Choose the option Convenience from the main menu and press

the button on the windscreen wiper lever.

Example of menu use page 64 Note

For electronic and vehicle eq

displayed.

OK AA

AA

Displayed on the screen

Open door One

Aut

whe

15 k

Aut

is re

Elec. window control Ope

min

whe

func

only

Wing mirror adjust. If sy

driv

ger

Manufacturer's set- tings

The

tion

Back This

Cockpit72

ipment one or more of these menus will be

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 72 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Lights and visibility menu

From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle lighting

settings.

Open Lights and visibility Menu

Select the option Configuration from the main menu: Main

menu and press button page 64 on the windscreen

wiper lever or

Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel*

page 64, fig. 44 until the Configuration menu is displayed.

Select the option Lights & visibility from the menu and press

button on the windscreen wiper lever.

Example of menu use page 64

Note For electronic and vehicle equ

displayed.

Displayed on the screen

Function

Coming Home/ Leaving Home

This option permits the adjustment of the time

during which the headlamps remain lit after the

vehicle is locked, and also permits the function to

be connected and disconnected

Indicator conf. The comfort indicator function can be activated or

deactivated here. With the comfort mode acti-

vated, the indicator will blink at least three times

when turned on.

Manufacturer's set- tings

The manufacturer's predefined values for the func-

tions of this menu are restored.

Back This returns to the Configuration menu.

OK AA

AA

Cockpit 73

Safety Fir Technical Data

g. 48 Instrument panel with warning lamps. Some of e items of equipment listed here are fitted only on rtain models/model years or are optional extras.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 73 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Warning lamps

Overview of the warning lamps

The warning lamps indicate a number of different functions and possible faults.

Fi th ce

Cockpit74

g lamps and warning messages can result in mage to your vehicle.

creases if your vehicle breaks down. Use a attention of other road users in order to

ctive page 79

ake applied

ke fluid level or

ke system

page 79

pressure page 80

trol system switched on page 80

indicator page 80

chanical steering page 80

e emission control system page 81

: electronic stabilisation pro-

SP) is working

ns lit: ESP malfunction or off

page 81

selector lever lock (auto-

rbox) page 82

immobiliser page 82

Meaning of warning and control lamps

Further information

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 74 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

WARNING

Failure to observe warnin serious personal injury or da

The risk of an accident in warning triangle to draw the prevent danger to thirds.

Item Symbol Meaning of warning and control lamps

Further information

Fuel level / reserve page 75

Coolant level / coolant temperature page 75

Rear fog light switched on page 76

Turn signals in operation page 76

Engine fault (petrol engine) page 76

Glow plug system for diesel engine page 76

Main beam switched on page 77

Pollen accumulation in the diesel

engine particulate filter page 77

ABS system fault page 77

Windscreen washer fluid level page 78

Alternator fault page 78

Fasten seat belts! page 19

Tyre pressure page 78

Airbag or belt tension device system

fault or airbag disabled

page 27

page 30

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

A8

A9

A10

A11

A12

A13

Bulb defe

Parking br

or low bra

fault in bra

Engine oil

Cruise con

Door open

Electrome

Fault in th

If flashing gramme (E

If it remai

Automatic

matic gea

SAFE Electronic

Item Symbol

A14

A15

A16

A17

A18

A19

A20

A21

A22

Cockpit 75

Safety Fir Technical Data

rature

s up if the coolant temperature is too

vel is too low.

not go out again after a few seconds.

p or flashes while the vehicle is moving, while

ls are emitted.

olant level is too low or the coolant temperature

s the following message9): CHECK COOLANT age 220.

erature gauge. The coolant temperature is too

warning area on the dial. Stop the vehicle, it for it to cool down. Check the coolant level.

he overheating may be caused by a malfunction

radiator fan fuse and have it replaced if neces-

again after driving on for a short distance, stop gine off. Contact an Authorised Service Centre

s the following message10): STOP CHECK NUAL.

he model.

he model.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 75 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

The engine compartment is a dangerous area! Before you open the bonnet to work on the engine or in the engine compartment, you must switch the engine off and allow it to cool to reduce the risk of scalding or other kind of injuries. Read and observe the relevant warnings page 213.

Note The appropriate warning lamp for a fault will light up in vehicles without

warning or information texts in the display.

In vehicles with warning or information texts on the screen, the appro-

priate warning lamp for a fault will light up and a warning or information text

will also appear on the screen.

Fuel level / reserve

This symbol lights up to indicate that the fuel tank under the

reserve level.

It lights up when only 7 litres of fuel remain in the tank. Also, an audible warning is given. This serves as a reminder to fill up with fuel at the earliest

opportunity page 210.

The instrument panel displays the following message8): PLEASE REFUEL!.

Coolant Level* / tempe

The warning lamp light

high or if the coolant le

There is a fault if:

The warning symbol does

The warning lamp lights u

three acoustic warning signa

This means that either the co

is too high.

Coolant temperature too high

The instrument panel display

INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL p

First look at the coolant temp

high if the needle is over the

switch the engine off and wa

If the coolant level is correct, t

of the radiator fan. Check the

sary page 249.

If the warning lamp lights up

the vehicle and switch the en or a qualified workshop.

Coolant level too low

The instrument panel display

COOLANT INSTRUCTIONS MA

8) Depending on the version of the model.

WARNING (continued)

9) Depending on the version of t 10) Depending on the version of t

Cockpit76

icators page 116.

itors the engine management system

nic Power Control) lights up when the ignition

e lamp is working properly. It should go out

nic engine management system while you are

l light up. Stop the vehicle and seek technical

ine fault

up to show that the glow plugs are

there is an engine fault.

while the glow plugs are preheating. When the

gine should be started straight away.

e management system while you are driving,

. Take the vehicle to an Authorised Service

d have the engine checked.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 76 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

First look at the coolant temperature gauge. If the needle is in the normal

range, top up with coolant at the earliest opportunity .

WARNING

If your vehicle is immobilised for any technical reasons, move it to a safe distance from traffic. Turn the engine off, turn the hazard lights on and place the warning triangle.

Never open the bonnet if you can see or hear steam or coolant escaping from the engine compartment. Risk of scalding. Wait until you can no longer see or hear escaping steam or coolant.

The engine compartment is a dangerous area! Before carrying out any work in the engine compartment, switch off the engine and allow it to cool down. Always note the corresponding warnings page 213.

Rear fog light

This warning lamp lights up when the rear fog light is switched on . Further

information page 109.

Turn signals

The warning lamp flashes when the indicators are in opera-

tion.

Depending on which indicator is operating, either the left or right indi-

cator lamp flashes. Both warning lamps will flash at the same time when the

hazard warning lights are switched on.

If any of both indicators fails, the warning lamp will start flashing twice faster

than normal.

Further information on the ind

Engine management*

This warning lamp mon

for petrol engines.

The warning lamp (Electro

is switched on to show that th

once the engine is started.

If there is a fault in the electro

driving, this warning lamp wil

assistance.

Glow plug system / Eng

The warning lamp lights

preheating. It flashes if

Warning lamp is lit

The warning lamp lights up

warning lamp goes off, the en

Warning lamp flashes

If a fault develops in the engin

the glow plug lamp will flash Centre as soon as possible an

Cockpit 77

Safety Fir Technical Data

(ABS)

monitors the ABS.

light up for a few seconds when the ignition is

after the system has run through an automatic

s not light up when the ignition is switched on.

ot go out again after a few seconds.

p when the vehicle is moving.

d in the normal way (except that the ABS control

ase take the vehicle to a qualified workshop as

information on the ABS see the page 183.

e ESP* warning lamp will also light up.

ights up together with the brake warning lamp

ult in the ABS function, but also a possible fault

et, read and observe the warnings on e engine compartment.

p should light up together with the ABS ehicle immediately and check the brake fluid e 226, Brake fluid. If the fluid level has ark you must not drive on. Risk of accident. .

correct, the fault in the brake system may have he ABS system. This could cause the rear

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 77 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Main beam headlights

This warning lamp lights up when the main beams are on.

The warning lamp is switched on once main beams are on or once the

headlight flasher is operating.

Further information page 116.

Soot accumulation in the diesel engine particulate filter

If the indicator lights you may help the filter clear itself by driving in the

appropriate manner.

To do this, drive about 15 minutes in 4th or 5th gear (automatic gearbox: S

gear range) at a speed of 60 km/h, with the engine running at approximately

2000 rpm. In this way, the pollen build up in the filter is burned. When

cleaning is successful, the indicator turns off.

If the indicator is not deactivated, bring the vehicle to a specialised work-

shop to repair the fault.

WARNING

Always drive according to the road weather conditions, the terrain and traffic. Driving recommendations should never lead to illegal manoeuvres in surrounding traffic.

The diesel engine particulate filter may reach extremely high tempera- tures; it should not enter into contact with flammable materials under- neath the vehicle. Failure to comply could result in fire.

Anti-lock brake system

A warning lamp system

The warning lamp should

switched on. It goes out again

test sequence.

There is a fault in the ABS if:

The warning lamp doe

The warning lamp does n

The warning lamp lights u

The vehicle can still be brake

function will not function). Ple

soon as possible. For further

If a fault occurs in the ABS, th

Brake system fault

If the ABS warning lamp l

, this indicates not only a fa

in the brake system .

WARNING

Before opening the bonn page 213, Working in th

If the brake warning lam warning lamp , stop the v level in the reservoir pag dropped below the MIN m Obtain technical assistance

If the brake fluid level is been caused by a failure of t

Cockpit78

l system controls the tyre speed and

of each tyre.

wheel revolutions and with this information,

ing the ESP sensors. If the diameter of a wheel

icator lights . The wheel diameter changes

t.

ged.

because of a load.

under more pressure (for example, driving with

.

now chains.

tted.

n

Fig. 49 Centre console: tyre monitor system button

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 78 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the rear to break away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek technical assistance.

Washer fluid

This warning lamp lights up to indicate that the windscreen

washer level is too low.

This serves as a reminder to fill up the reservoir at the earliest opportunity

page 222.

The following message is shown on the instrument panel display*11): REFILL WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID.

Alternator

This warning lamp signals a fault in the alternator.

The warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on. It should go

out when the engine has started running.

If the warning lamp lights up while driving, the alternator is no longer

charging the battery. You should immediately drive to the nearest qualified

workshop.

You should avoid using electrical equipment that is not absolutely necessary

because this will drain the battery.

Tyre pressure*

The tyre pressure contro

the frequency spectrum

The tyre monitor 12) compares

the diameter of each wheel us

changes, the tyre monitor ind

when:

Tyre pressure is insufficien

The tyre structure is dama

The vehicle is unbalanced

The wheels of one axle are

a trailer or on extreme slopes)

The vehicle is fitted with s

The emergency wheel is fi

11) Depending on the version of the model.

WARNING (continued)

12) Depending on the model versio

Cockpit 79

Safety Fir Technical Data

s up when a bulb in the vehicle's exte-

.

p when a bulb in the vehicle's exterior lighting

defective.

s the following message13): LEFT FULL BEAM

rake

s up if the handbrake is applied, if the

o low or if there is a fault in the brake

up if

with the handbrake on, the following message

t panel display 14): HANDBRAKE ON. Also, an

oo low page 226.

s the following message14): STOP BRAKE FLUID

ake system.

s the following message14): BRAKE SYSTEM AL.

he model.

he model.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 79 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

The wheel on one axle is changed.

Tyre pressure adjustment

Following the modification to tyre pressure or after changing one or more

wheels, the button page 78, fig. 49 must be kept pressed while the igni-

tion is on until an acoustic signal is heard and the warning lamp goes out.

If the wheels are under excessive load (for example, driving with a trailer or

heavy load), the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended value

for a full load (see the sticker on the inside of the fuel flap). If the tyre monitor

system button is pressed down, the new tyre pressures are confirmed.

The tyre pressure monitor indicator lights up

If the tyre pressure of one or more wheels is much lower than the value set by

the driver, then the tyre control warning lamp lights up .

The tyre pressure monitor indicator flashes

If the tyre pressure indicator flashes, this indicates a fault. Go to the nearest

specialist workshop.

WARNING

When the tyre pressure indicator lights, reduce speed immediately and avoid any sudden manoeuvre or braking. Stop when possible, and check the tyre pressure and status.

The driver is responsible for correct tyre pressure. For this reason, tyre pressure must be regularly checked.

Under certain circumstances (for example, in a sports situation, in winter conditions or on a dirt track) the tyre monitor indicator may light or function incorrectly.

Note If the battery is disconnected, the yellow indicator lights up after turning

the ignition on. This should turn off after a brief journey.

Bulb defect

The warning lamp light

rior lighting is defective

The warning lamp lights u

(e.g. left-hand main beam) is

The instrument panel display

FAULTY.

Brake system* / handb

The warning lamp light

brake fluid level falls to

system.

This warning lamp lights

If the handbrake is on.

If you drive faster than 6 km/h

will appear on the instrumen

audible warning is given.

If the brake fluid level is t

The instrument panel display

INSTRUCTION MANUAL.

If there is a fault in the br

The instrument panel display

FAULT INSTRUCTIONS MANU

13) Depending on the version of t 14) Depending on the version of t

Cockpit80

s on when the cruise control system

when the cruise control system is switched on.

ntrol system page 179.

s or tailgate*

e of the doors or the tailgate is open.

o off when all the doors are closed correctly.

he ignition is switched off. It should go off

ehicle is locked.

g, the level of steering assistance depends on

e steering angle.

t up for a few seconds when the ignition is

once the engine is started.

the indicator remains lit, even with the engine

ly goes off after a distance of approx. 50 m.

echanical steering system if the lamp does not

ehicle is in motion. The indicator may appear

icate faults. If it lights yellow, this indicates a

k workshop assistance immediately, if no

riving. Stop the vehicle and seek technical

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 80 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

This warning lamp can light up together with the anti-lock brake system

warning lamp.

WARNING

Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings on page 213.

If the brake warning lamp does not go out, or if it lights up when driving, the brake fluid level page 226, Brake fluid in the reservoir is too low. Risk of accident. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. Obtain tech- nical assistance.

If the brake warning lamp lights up together with the ABS warning lamp , the control function of the ABS could be out of action. This could cause the rear wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the rear to break away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek technical assistance.

Engine oil pressure

This warning lamp indicates that the engine oil pressure is

too low.

If this warning symbol starts to flash, and is accompanied by three audible warnings, switch off the engine and check the oil level. If the oil level is too

low, add more engine oil page 216.

The instrument panel displays the following message15): STOP ENGINE OIL PRESSURE INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL.

If the symbol flashes although the oil level is correct, do not drive on. The

engine must not even run at idle speed. Obtain technical assistance.

Cruise control system*

The warning lamp come

is switched on.

The warning lamp lights up

Further notes on the cruise co

Indicator for open door

This indicator lights if on

The warning light should g

The system also works when t

approx. 15 seconds after the v

Power steering system*

For vehicles with power steerin

the vehicle's speed and on th

The warning lamp should ligh

switched on. It should go out

If the battery is disconnected,

running. The warning light on

There is a fault in the electrom

go out or lights up whilst the v

in two different colours to ind

minor fault. If it lights red, see

assistance is available stop d 15) Depending on the version of the model.

Cockpit 81

Safety Fir Technical Data

programme (ESP)*

itors the electronic stabilisation

ABS, EDL and TCS. This also includes the brake

tic cleaning of the brake discs and the trailer

following functions:

conds when the ignition is switched on while a

out.

activated when driving.

ly if there is a malfunction in the ESP.

ult should occur in the ABS because the ESP

the ABS.

hts up and stays on after the engine is started,

ol system has temporarily switched off the ESP.

activated by switching the ignition off and then

goes out, this means the system is fully func-

, the TCS function deactivates and the warning

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 81 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

assistance. The power steering does not work if the battery is flat or if the

engine is off (for example, for towing). You should take into account that you

will need considerably more power than normal to steer the vehicle if the

steering assistance is reduced or has failed completely.

For those vehicles fitted with ESP* the function Recommended steering

manoeuvre is included. See page 185.

Emission control system*

This warning lamp monitors the exhaust system.

Warning lamp flashes:

When there is misfiring that can damage the catalytic converter. Reduce

speed and drive carefully to the nearest qualified workshop to have the

engine checked.

The instrument panel displays the following message16): EXHAUST GAS SEE WORKSHOP

Warning lamp is lit:

If a fault has developed during driving which has reduced the quality of the

exhaust gas (e.g. lambda probe fault). Reduce speed and drive carefully to

the nearest qualified workshop to have the engine checked.

The following information text displayed in the instrument panel display :

EXHAUST GAS SEE WORKSHOP.

Electronic stabilisation

This warning lamp mon

programme.

This programme includes the

assist system (BAS), automa

stability programme (TSP).

The warning lamp has the

It will light for about 2 se

test of the function is carried

It flashes when the ESP is

It will light up continuous

It will also come on if a fa

operates in conjunction with

If the ESP warning lamp lig

this may mean that the contr

In this case the ESP can be re

on again. If the warning lamp

tional.

If the ESP button is activated

lamp flashes.

16) Depending on the version of the model.

Cockpit82

e

sed when this warning lamp lights up. This is

c gearbox* selector lever is moved out of the

Safe

es if an unauthorised key is used.

at deactivates the electronic immobiliser auto-

rted into the ignition. The immobiliser will be

as soon as you pull the key out of the ignition

the following message17): SAFE. The vehicle

page 166.

tarted if the appropriate coded SEAT genuine

icle is ensured if genuine SEAT keys are used.

e model.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 82 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Differential lock fault (EDL)*

EDL operates along with the ABS in vehicles equipped with an

Electronic Stabilisation Program (ESP)*

A malfunction in the EDL is indicated by the ABS warning lamp . Please

take the vehicle to a qualified workshop as soon as possible. For further infor-

mation on the EDL page 186, Electronic differential lock (EDL)*.

Traction control system (TCS)*

The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from

spinning when the vehicle is accelerating

The warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on and should turn

out after about 2 seconds.

When the TCS is operating while driving, the warning lamp flashes. If the

system is deactivated or if there is any fault in the same, the warning lamp will

remain lit.

It will also come on if a fault should occur in the ABS because the TCS oper-

ates in conjunction with the ABS. For further information, see page 183,

Brakes.

If the TCS button is activated, the TCS function deactivates and the warning

lamp remains lit.

By pressing again, TCS function is reactivated and the warning lamp switched

off.

Operating the foot brak

The footbrake must be depres

necessary when the automati

positions P or N.

Electronic immobiliser*

This warning lamp flash

Inside the key there is a chip th

matically when the key is inse

activated again automatically

lock.

The instrument panel displays

cannot be used in that case

The engine can, however, be s

key is used.

Note A perfect operation of the veh

17) Depending on the version of th

Steering wheel controls* 83

Safety Fir Technical Data

the available audio functions from the steering

n, to control the available audio functions and

e steering wheel.

control the Audio system (Radio, CD Audio, CD

dio / navigation System, in which case they also

.

rbox* page 173.

Fig. 51 Steering wheel controls (depending on version of model)

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 83 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Steering wheel controls*

General information

The steering wheel includes a multifunction module from where it is possible

to control the audio, telephone and radio navigation functions, and the auto-

matic gearbox*, without needing to distract the driver's attention.

There are two versions of the multifunction module:

Audio version, to control

wheel.

Audio + Telephone versio

the telephone system from th

Both versions may be used to

mp3, CD Changer) and the ra

control the Navigation system

Version for automatic gea

Audio system

Steering wheel audio version controls

Fig. 50 Controls on the steering wheel

Steering wheel controls*84

AUXa)

Volume up

Volume down

No specified function

No function specified

No function specified

Silence

Operates on Instrument panel display

No function specifieda)

Operates on Instrument panel display

No function specifieda)

No function specified

Change menu on instrument panel

No function specified

Change menu on instrument panel

Operates on instrument panel

Change source

Operates on instrument panel

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 84 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod*

a) Only if the panel is in Audio menu.

Volume up Volume up

Volume down Volume down

Search for next station Next track

Hold down: Fast forward

Search for last station Last track

Hold down:Rewind

No function specified No function specified

Silence Pause

b)

b) Depending on the model version

Operates on Instrument panel display Operates on Instrument panel display

Next preset a) Next track a)

b) Operates on Instrument panel display Operates on Instrument panel display

Previous preset a) Previous track a)

b) Next preset Change folder

Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel

b) Previous preset Change folder

Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel

Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel

b) Change source Change source

Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel

AA

AB

AC

AD

AE

AF

AG

AH

AI

AJ

AK

AL

Steering wheel controls* 85

Safety Fir Technical Data

Fig. 53 Steering wheel controls (depending on version of model)

TELEPHONE

up Volume up

down Volume down

specified No function specified

specified No function specified

ne menu on

t panel

Make call

Accept incoming call

End call

Hold down: reject incoming

call

ecognition Enable voice recognition

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 85 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Steering wheel Audio + Telephone version controls

Fig. 52 Controls on the steering wheel

Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AUX

Volume up Volume up Volume

Volume down Volume down Volume

Search for next station Next track

Hold down: Fast forward No function

Search for last station Last track

Hold down:Rewind No function

Access telephone menu on instrument

panel

Access telephone menu on instrument

panel

Access telepho

instrumen

Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition Enable voice r

AA

AB

AC

AD

AE

AF

Steering wheel controls*86

pecified

Movement on telephone menu

Address book / Last calls /

Calls received / Missed calls

pecified

Movement on telephone menu

Address book / Last calls /

Calls received / Missed calls

instrument

l

Change menu on instrument

panel

instrument

l

Change menu on instrument

panel

ument panel Confirm

ument panel Return to MULTIFUNCTION DIS-

PLAY menu

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 86 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Next preset a) Next track a) No function s

Previous preset a) Previous track a) No function s

Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on

pane

Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on

pane

Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instr

Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instr

a) Only if the instrument panel is in Audio menu.

AG

AH

AI

AJ

AK

AL

Steering wheel controls* 87

Safety Fir Technical Data

Fig. 55 Steering wheel controls (depending on version of model)

NAVIGATOR

up Volume up

down Volume down

specified No function specified

specified No function specified

ne menu on

t panel No function specified

ecognition Enable voice recognition

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 87 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Radio navigation system

Steering wheel audio version controls

Fig. 54 Controls on the steering wheel

Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AUX

Volume up Volume up Volume

Volume down Volume down Volume

Search for next station Next track

Hold down: Fast forward No function

Search for last station Last track

Hold down:Rewind No function

Access telephone menu on instrument

panel

Access telephone menu on instrument

panel

Access telepho

instrumen

Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition Enable voice r

AA

AB

AC

AD

AE

AF

Steering wheel controls*88

pecified Operates on instrument panel

pecified Operates on instrument panel

instrument

l No function specified

instrument

l No function specified

ument panel Operates on instrument panel

ument panel Operates on instrument panel

Fig. 57 Steering wheel controls (depending on version of model)

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 88 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Steering wheel Audio + Telephone controls

Next preset a) Next track a) No function s

Previous preset a) Previous track a) No function s

Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on

pane

Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on

pane

Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instr

Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instr

a) Only if the instrument panel is in Audio menu.

AG

AH

AI

AJ

AK

AL

Fig. 56 Controls on the steering wheel

Steering wheel controls* 89

Safety Fir Technical Data

AVIGATOR TELEPHONE

olume up Volume up

lume down Volume down

ction specified No function specified

ction specified No function specified

ction specified

Make call

Accept incoming call

End call

Hold down: reject incoming

call

voice recogni-

tion Enable voice recognition

ates on instru-

ent panel

Movement on telephone

menu

Address book / Last calls /

Calls received / Missed calls

ates on instru-

ent panel

Movement on telephone

menu

Address book / Last calls /

Calls received / Missed calls

ction specified Change menu on instrument

panel

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 89 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AUX N

Volume up Volume up Volume up V

Volume down Volume down Volume down Vo

Search for next station Next track

Hold down: Fast forward No function specified No fun

Search for last station Last track

Hold down:Rewind No function specified No fun

Access telephone menu on

instrument panel

Access telephone menu on

instrument panel

Access telephone menu

on instrument panel No fun

Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition Enable

Next preset a) Next track a) No function specified Oper

m

Previous preset a) Previous track a) No function specified Oper

m

Change menu on instrument

panel

Change menu on instrument

panel

Change menu on instru-

ment panel No fun

AA

AB

AC

AD

AE

AF

AG

AH

AI

Steering wheel controls*90

tion specified Change menu on instrument

panel

tes on instru-

ent panel Confirm

tes on instru-

ent panel

Return to MULTIFUNCTION

DISPLAY menu

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 90 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Change menu on instrument

panel

Change menu on instrument

panel

Change menu on instru-

ment panel No func

Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument

panel

Opera

m

Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument

panel

Opera

m

a) Only if the instrument panel is in Audio menu.

AJ

AK

AL

Unlocking and locking 91

Safety Fir Technical Data

98, fig. 63 on the remote control to lock all

turn the key in the door to lock all doors and the

isabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emer- to leave the vehicle and not manage on their

lay in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle ly high and low temperatures, depending on g serious injuries/illness. It could even have d lock both the tailgate and all the other doors

vehicle.

with you when you leave the vehicle. Misuse children, may result in serious damage and

entally be started and be out of control.

hed on, the electric equipment could be acti- for example, in the electric windows.

ed using the remote control key. This could t in an emergency situation.

ith you when you leave the vehicle.

m the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. The y engage, and you would not be able to steer

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 91 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Unlocking and locking

Central locking

Basic functions

The central locking system enables you to lock and unlock all

doors with just pushing on the keybutton.

Description

Central locking can be activated by using any of the following options:

the key, by inserting it into the driver's door cylinder and rotating it manu-

ally,

the central locking button in the passenger compartment as an electronic

control page 94,

the radio frequency remote control, using the buttons on the key

page 98.

Various functions are available to improve the vehicle safety:

Locking system Safe

Selective unlocking system*

Automatic speed-dependent locking and unlocking system*

Self-locking system to prevent involuntary unlocking

Emergency unlocking system

Unlocking the vehicle*

Press button page 98, fig. 63 on remote control to unlock all the

doors and tailgate.

Locking the vehicle*

Press button page

doors and the tailgate or

tailgate.

WARNING

Never leave children or d gency, they may not be able own.

Never allow children to p can be subjected to extreme the time of year, thus causin fatal consequences. Close an when you are not using the

Always take you car keys of the keys, for example, by accident.

The engine may accid

If the ignition is switc vated with risk of injury,

The doors can be lock make assistance difficul

Always take the key w

Never remove the key fro steering lock could suddenl the vehicle.

Unlocking and locking92

en the vehicle is locked

button on the remote control within

le is locked without activating the dead-

arning lamp flashes for approx. two

out. After approx. 30 seconds it starts

d opened from the inside if the "safe" deadlock

ill have to pull the door release lever once.

ff, the antitheft alarm* page 100 remains

nitoring system* and the anti-tow system are

vehicle if the anti-tow system deadlock mech- is not possible to open the doors from the ake it more difficult to assist vehicle occu- ent. People could become trapped inside in an

tem*

lock either just the driver's door or all

s the unlock button on the remote once. The

le is deactivated, only the driver's door is

and the light indicator are also turned off.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 92 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Note While the driver's door is open, the vehicle can not be locked with the

remote control. This avoids the user from forgetting his key inside the vehicle.

If the driver's door is unlocked with the key shaft, only the driver's door is

unlocked, the rest of the doors remain locked. When the ignition is switched

on, the door "safe" deadlock is deactivated (although the doors remain

locked) and the central locking button is activated. See page 100.

If the central locking or anti-theft alarm are faulty, the driver's door

warning lamp remains lit for approx. 30 seconds after locking the vehicle.

For anti-theft security, only the driver's door is fitted with a lock cylinder.

Safety system Safe*

The "safe" deadlock makes it more difficult to break into the

vehicle because the door release lever and the central locking

button are not active (depending upon country).

Activating deadlock

Press once the locking button on the remote control or

Turn the key once in the driver's door lock to lock. A warning lamp

in the driver door flashes to indicate the "safe" deadlock is

working. The warning lamp flashes for approx. two seconds at

short intervals and then more slowly.

Deactivating deadlock wh

Press twice the locking

two seconds. The vehic

lock. The driver's door w

seconds and then goes

flashing again.

The doors can be unlocked an

has not been activated. You w

When the "safe" deadlock is o

active. The vehicle interior mo

deactivated*.

WARNING

Nobody should remain in the anism has been activated. It inside. Locked doors could m pants in the event of an accid emergency.

Selective unlocking sys

This system allows to un

the vehicle.

Using the remote control, pres

Safe system for all the vehic

unlocked and both the alarm

Unlocking and locking 93

Safety Fir Technical Data

oluntary unlocking*

and prevents the unintentional

.

any of the doors (including the tailgate) are

gets re-locked automatically. This function

aining unlocked if the unlock button is pressed

ystem

uring an accident, the vehicle gets unlocked,

ible to lock the vehicle from inside with the

the ignition off and back on again.

rom the outside, see Emergency locking of the

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 93 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Unlocking all doors and the boot

The unlock button on the remote must be pressed twice so that all doors

and the boot can be opened.

Press twice within 2 seconds to deactivate the Safe system for all vehicle,

to unlock all doors and to use the boot. The indicator and the alarm (only vehi-

cles fitted with one) are turned off.

Automatic speed dependent locking and unlocking system*

This is a safety system which prevent the access to the vehicle

from the outside when it is running (for example, when

stopped at a traffic light).

Locking

The doors and the boot are automatically locked when vehicle speed exceeds

15 km/h.

If the vehicle is stopped and one of the doors is opened, when the vehicle

moves off again and exceeds a speed of 15 km/h, the unlocked door(s) will

be locked once more.

Unlocking

The driver's door automatically unlocks when the key is removed from the

ignition.

Each door can be unlocked and opened independently from the inside (for

example, when a passenger gets out of it). To do it, simply operate the lever

inside the door.

WARNING

The door handles must not be operated when the vehicle is running: the door would open.

Locking system for inv

It is an anti-theft system

unlocking of the vehicle

If the vehicle is unlocked and

opened within 30 seconds, it

prevents the vehicle from rem

by mistake.

Emergency unlocking s

If the airbags are triggered d

except for the boot. It is poss

central locking, after turning

If the doors must be locked f

doors.

Unlocking and locking94

er door cannot be locked if any of the vehicle

open. This avoids the user from forgetting his

central locking will deactivate the central

. Once this time has passed, the button may be

g the key inside the vehicle if the vehicle is

utton when the driver's door is closed and any

ing any of the rear doors, the vehicle locks and

parately from inside the car. Do this by pulling

ildren and disabled people may be trapped

n is not operative in the following cases:

d from the outside (by the remote or the key).

ctivated after unlocking the door lock cylinder

ton .

on .

Manual personalisation

rn the key to unlock for approx. 3 s.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 94 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Central locking button

The central locking button allows you to lock and unlock the

vehicle from the inside.

Locking the vehicle

Press the button .

Unlocking the doors

Press button .

The central locking button is still operative when the ignition is switched off.

Except when the "safe" security system is activated.

Please note the following if you lock your vehicle with the central locking

button:

Safety reasons make not be possible to open the doors or the tailgate

from the outside (for instance, when stopped at a traffic light).

The driver or front passeng

doors (except the tailgate) are

key inside the vehicle.

Repeated operation of the

locking button for 30 seconds

used once more.

There is a danger of leavin

locked by the central locking b

of the rear doors open. On clos

the keys remain inside it.

All doors can be locked se

the door release lever once.

WARNING

If the vehicle is locked, ch inside it.

The central locking butto

When the vehicle is locke

While the ignition is not a with the key.

Note Vehicle locked, amber but

Vehicle unlocked, red butt

Unlocking and locking -

Activating selective unlocking

With the driver's door open, tu

Fig. 58 Detail of the centre console: central locking system button

Unlocking and locking 95

Safety Fir Technical Data

nually

cylinder and rotate in a clockwise direction for

nti-clockwise for the right hand side door.

ed it can no longer be opened from the outside.

of the remaining doors

e cap fig. 59 printed with a lock image.

ment with a groove in the centre. Insert the key

element clockwise for the right hand side doors

hand side doors.

e door. Once the door has been closed it can no

utside.

rgency) locked driver's door

k cylinder and rotate anti-clockwise for the left

se for the right hand side doors.

the door may be opened using the exterior door

ually (emergency) locked doors

e unlocked to gain entry to the vehicle. Operate

he required door. If the child safety lock is acti-

n the interior door release lever is operated the

t open. The exterior door handle may now be

u wish to lock it manually (emergency locking),

ns.

AA

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 95 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Deactivating selective unlocking

With the driver's door open, turn the key to lock for approx. 3 s.

The indicator lamps flash to confirm activation or deactivation.

Activation of automatic locking

Press the lock button on the central locking button for 3 seconds.

Deactivation of automatic locking

Press the unlock button on the central locking button for 3 seconds.

The lock button lamp flashes to confirm activation or deactivation.

Emergency manual locking

This permits mechanical locking of the doors in case of

central locking system failure.

Locking the driver's door ma

Insert the key in the door lock

the left hand side door and a

Once the door has been clos

Manual (emergency) locking

Open the door and remove th

This will expose a circular ele

into the groove and rotate the

and anticlockwise for the left

Replace the cap and close th

longer be opened from the o

Unlocking the manually (eme

Insert the key in the door loc

hand side doors and clockwi

The door lock is released and

handle.

Unlocking the remaining man

First the driver's door must b

the internal door handle for t

vated on the rear doors, whe

door is unlocked but does no

used to open the door.

Note Once the vehicle is open, if yo

repeat the previous instructio

Fig. 59 Locking the doors manually

Unlocking and locking96

nt of the vehicle electronic opening and

fects rear doors. It can only be activated

, as described below:

ock

n the door in which you wish to activate

ate the groove in the door using the igni-

he left hand side doors, and anti-clock-

side doors fig. 60 fig. 61.

f lock

the door whose childproof lock you want

ate the groove in the door using the igni-

he right hand side doors, and anti-clock-

ide doors fig. 60 fig. 61.

tivated, the door can only be opened from the

n be activated and deactivated by inserting the

or is open, as described above.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 96 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Childproof lock

The childproof lock prevents the rear doors from being

opened from the inside. This system prevents minors from

opening a door accidentally while the vehicle is running.

This function is independe

locking systems. It only af

and deactivated manually

Activating the childproof l

Unlock the car and ope

the childproof lock.

With the door open, rot

tion key, clockwise for t

wise for the right hand

Deactivating the childproo

Unlock the car and open

to deactivate.

With the door open, rot

tion key, clockwise for t

wise for the left hand s

Once the childproof lock is ac

outside. The childproof lock ca

key in the groove when the do

Fig. 60 Child safety lock on the left hand side door

Fig. 61 Child safety lock on the right hand side door

Unlocking and locking 97

Safety Fir Technical Data

the vehicle.

give the plastic key tab to the new owner.

y, take your key tab to an Authorised Service

eys can cause serious injuries.

isabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emer- to leave the vehicle and not manage on their

e key could start the engine or activate any tric windows), causing risk of accident. The e remote control key. This could make the aid

uation.

ide the vehicle. An unauthorised use of your , damage or theft. Always take the key with you

m the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. ld suddenly block and it would be impossible

nts in the remote control key. Avoid wetting and

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 97 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Keys

Set of keys

The set of keys includes a remote control, a key without a

remote control and a plastic key tab with the number of the

key.

The set of keys belonging to your vehicle consists of the following items:

one remote control key fig. 62 with folding key bit,

a key without remote control ,

one plastic key tab with the key number.

Plastic key tab

Duplicate keys are only issued with the key number on the key tab fig. 62

. Therefore:

Always keep the key tab in a safe place.

Never leave the key tab in

If you sell the vehicle, please

Duplicate keys

If you need a replacement ke

Centre.

WARNING

An incorrect use of the k

Never leave children or d gency, they may not be able own.

An uncontrolled use of th electric equipment(e.g. elec doors can be locked using th difficult in an emergency sit

Never forget the keys ins vehicle could result in injury when you leave the vehicle.

Never remove the key fro Otherwise, the steering cou to steer the vehicle.

Caution There are electronic compone

hitting the keys

Fig. 62 Set of keys

AA

AB

AC

AB

Unlocking and locking98

row) on the control, the key shaft is released.

g. 63 .

63

he button fig. 63 until all indicators

hen the unlocking button is pressed,

e door. Once this time has passed, it will lock

the key fig. 63, will flash.

and the batteries are integrated in the key. The

The maximum scope of the remote control

s. This scope is reduced when the batteries

, is pressed once, the driver's door is

cked.

twice to unlock all doors.

Fig. 64 Range of the remote control:

A1

A2

A3

A3

A1

A1

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 98 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Radio frequency remote control

Locking and unlocking the vehicle

The remote control key is used to lock and unlock the vehicle

from a distance.

Using the button fig. 63 (ar

Unlocking the vehicle fi

Locking the vehicle fig.

Unlocking the tailgate. Press t

on the vehicle briefly flash. W

you have 2 minutes to open th

once more.

Also, the battery indicator on

The remote control transmitter

receiver is inside the vehicle.

depends on various condition

start to lose power.

Selective unlocking*

When the button fig. 63

unlocked, all others remain lo

Press the button fig. 63

Fig. 63 Assignment of buttons on the remote control key

Unlocking and locking 99

Safety Fir Technical Data

ot flash when the buttons are pushed, the

eries may damage the radio frequency remote

ys replace the dead battery with another of the

nvironment own away in accordance with regulations

he environment.

ote control key

lock or lock the door with the remote

-synchronised.

8, fig. 63 button on the remote control.

using the key bit within one minute.

could no longer be opened and closed with the

is repeatedly pressed outside the radio

ctive scope. The remote control key will have to

e available in your Authorised Service Centres,

to the locking system.

ys can be used.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 99 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

WARNING

An improper use of the key can cause serious injuries.

Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emer- gency, they may not be able to leave the vehicle and not manage on their own.

Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. Otherwise, this could result in serious injuries, accidents or even the theft of your vehicle. Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.

An uncontrolled use of the key could start the engine or activate any electric equipment(e.g. electric windows), causing risk of accident. The vehicle can be locked when using the remote control key. This could complicate the aid in cas of emergency.

Note The radio-frequency remote control can be programmed by means of

pressing the unlocking button once; as a result, only the driver door will

unlock. When the button is pressed once more, all doors and the tailgate will

be unlocked.

The remote control functions only when you are in range page 98,

fig. 64 (red area).

If the vehicle is unlocked using the button, it will lock again auto-

matically if any of the doors or the tailgate are not opened within 30 seconds

after unlocking it. This function prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked

if the unlock button is pressed by mistake.

If the vehicle cannot be opened and closed using the remote control, the

remote control key will have to be re-synchronised page 99.

Changing the battery

If the battery indicator does n

battery must be replaced.

Caution The use of inappropriate batt

control. For this reason, alwa

same size and power.

For the sake of the e The flat batteries must be thr

governing the protection of t

Synchronising the rem

If it is not possible to un

control, it should be re

Press the page 9

Then close the vehicle

It is possible that the vehicle

remote control if the button

frequency remote control effe

be resynchronised.

Spare remote control keys ar

where they must be matched

Up to eight remote control ke

A1

Unlocking and locking100

the button shown by the (arrow).

door to unlock the vehicle. The anti-theft alarm

alarm is not triggered immediately.

in 15 seconds. When the ignition is switched

recognises a valid vehicle key and deactivates

you do not switch on the ignition within 15

d.

via the unlocking button of the remote control

the ignition lock.

, access is gained to a second secured zone

er a door has been opened), the warning signal

s active even if the battery is disconnected or

ediately if one of the battery cables is discon-

is active.

nction incorporated in the anti-theft

authorized vehicle entry by means of

ensors, 2 emitters and a receptor.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 100 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Anti-theft alarm system*

Description of anti-theft alarm system*

The anti-theft alarm triggers if unauthorised movements are

detected around the vehicle.

The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to break into the vehicle or steal

it. Audible and visible alarms are triggered if the car is opened using the key,

or if unauthorised access to the vehicle is forced.

The anti-theft alarm system is automatically connected on locking the

vehicle. The system is then primed.

When does the system trigger an alarm?

The system triggers an alarm if the following unauthorised actions are carried

out when the car is locked:

Mechanical opening of the vehicle with the vehicle key

Opening a door

Opening the bonnet

Opening the tailgate

Switching on the ignition

Movements in the vehicle

Undue manipulation of the alarm

Battery handling

The acoustic signals sound and the indicators flash for approx. 30 seconds.

This may be repeated up to 10 times depending on the country.

Opening the doors mechanically (emergency opening)

If the remote control function fails, you will have to use the key to unlock the

car. This is done as follows:

Unfold the key by pressing

Use the lock on the driver

system remains active, but an

Switch on the ignition with

on, the electronic immobiliser

the anti-theft alarm system. If

seconds, the alarm is triggere

How to switch the alarm off

When the vehicle is unlocked

or when the key is inserted in

Note If, after the alarm goes off

(e.g. the tailgate is opened aft

is triggered again.

Vehicle monitoring remain

not working for any reason.

The alarm is triggered imm

nected while the alarm system

Volumetric sensor*

Monitoring or control fu

alarm* which detects un

ultrasound.

The system consists of 3 s

Unlocking and locking 101

Safety Fir Technical Data

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 101 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Activation

It is automatically turned on with the anti-theft alarm, when the

vehicle is locked mechanically with the key and when the button

on the remote control is used.

Deactivation

Press the button on the remote control twice. Only the volu-

metric sensor is deactivated. The alarm system remains acti-

vated.

WARNING

The safe security system remains deactivated if the volumetric sensor is deactivated.

For those vehicles in which a separate sunblind is fitted in the passenger compartment, the alarm will not function correctly due to inter- ference with the sensor.

Note If the alarm has been triggered by the volumetric sensor, this will be indi-

cated by a flashing of the indicator on the driver's door. This flashing will be

different to that for an activated alarm.

Unlocking and locking102

r and lift the tailgate fig. 65. The tail-

of the two handles on the interior lining

ht movement.

erate depending on the situation of the vehicle.

cannot be opened, however if it is unlocked

erative and the boot may be opened.

tus, press the button or the button on

ument panel if the tailgate is open or not prop-

ng is also given if the tailgate is open when the

h*.

Fig. 66 Detail of the inside of the tailgate: hand grip

A1

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 102 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Tailgate

Unlocking and locking

The operation of the tailgate opening system is electric. It is

activated by using the handle on the tailgate

Opening the tailgate

Pull on the release leve

gate will then open.

Closing the tailgate

Grip the tailgate by one

and close it, using a lig

The system may or may not op

If the tailgate is locked then it

then the opening system is op

To the locking / unlocking sta

the remote control key.

A warning appears in the instr

erly closed.* An audible warni

car is driven faster than 6 km/

Fig. 65 Tailgate: opening from the outside

Unlocking and locking 103

Safety Fir Technical Data

to be opened if the central locking

xample, if the battery is flat)

oot allowing access to the emergency

inside the luggage compartment

groove and unlock the locking system,

ght to left, as shown by the arrow

Fig. 67 Tailgate: emer- gency open

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 103 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

WARNING

Always close the tailgate properly. Risk of accident or injury.

The tailgate must not be opened when the reverse or rear fog lights are lit. This may damage the lighting units.

Do not close the tailgate by pushing it down with your hand on the rear window. The glass could smash. Risk of injury!

Ensure the tailgate is locked after closing it. If not, it may open unex- pectedly while driving.

If the tailgate is not fully closed, open it with the handle and close it again correctly. Do not try to close it by pressing on the surface of the tail- gate, as this may damage the surface.

Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle can be subjected to extremely high and low temperatures, depending on the time of year, thus causing serious injuries/illness. It could even have fatal consequences. Close and lock both the tailgate and all the other doors when you are not using the vehicle.

Closing the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury to you and to third parties. Make sure that no one is in the path of the tailgate.

Never drive with the tailgate open or half-closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!

If you only open the tailgate, do not leave the key inside. The vehicle will not be opened if the key is left inside.

Emergency opening

This allows the vehicle

does not operate (for e

There is a groove in the b

opening mechanism.

Opening the tailgate from

Insert the key bit in the

turning the key from ri

fig. 67.

Unlocking and locking104

t left door

t right door

ting the electric window buttons in the rear

left door

right door

's door can be used to disable the electric

ors.

ttons on rear doors are activated.

s on rear doors are deactivated.

ric windows can result in injury.

ithout observing and ensuring it is clear, to do s injury to you and third parties. Make sure window.

ey with you when you leave the vehicle.

sabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if An uncontrolled use of the key could start the ic equipment (e.g. electric windows), causing n be locked using the remote control key. This n an emergency situation.

work until the key has been removed from the doors has been opened.

ty switch to disable the rear electric windows. en disabled.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 104 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Windows

Opening or closing the windows electrically

The front and rear electric windows can be operated by using

the controls on the driver's door.

Opening and closing the windows

Press the button to open a window.

Pull button to close a window .

Always close the windows fully if you park the vehicle or leave it unattended

.

You can use the electric windows for approx. 10 minutes after switching off

the ignition if neither the driver door nor the front passenger door has been

opened and the key has not been removed from the ignition.

Buttons on the driver's door

Button for window in fron

Button for window in fron

Buttons for rear windows*

Safety switch for deactiva

doors

Button for window in rear

Button for window in rear

Safety switch *

Safety switch on the driver

window buttons in the rear do

Safety switch not pressed: bu

Safety switch pressed: button

WARNING

Incorrect use of the elect

Never close the tailgate w otherwise could cause seriou that no one is in the path of a

Always take the vehicle k

Never leave children or di they have access to the keys. engine or activate any electr risk of accident. The doors ca could make the aid difficult i

The electric windows will ignition and one of the front

If necessary, use the safe Make sure that they have be

Fig. 68 Detail of driver door: controls for the front and rear windows

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A3

Unlocking and locking 105

Safety Fir Technical Data

ork when the ignition has been switched off,

on.

e function will not work if the battery has been

if the battery is flat. The function then has to be

oll-back function will not work if there is a

ndows. Contact an Authorised Service Centre.

ll-back function. This reduces the risk

dows are closing.

when closing automatically, the window stops

ediately .

mediately (within 10 seconds) why the window

tempting to close it again. After 10 seconds the

sumes.

ructed, the window will stop at this point.

on why the window cannot be closed, try to

nds.

seconds, the window will open fully when you

ne-touch closing is reactivated.

oll-back function will not work if there is a

ndows. Contact an Authorised Service Centre.

tric windows can result in injury.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 105 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Note If the window is not able to close because it is stiff or because of an obstruc-

tion, the window will automatically open again page 105. If this happens,

check why the window could not be closed before attempting to close it

again.

One-touch opening and closing

One-touch opening and closing means you do not have to

hold down the button.

One-touch closing

Pull up the window button briefly up to the second position. The

window closes fully.

One-touch opening

Push down the window button briefly up to the second position.

The window opens fully.

Restoring one-touch opening and closing

Close all windows.

Use the key to lock the vehicle from outside and hold the key in

the lock position for at least one second. The one-touch function

is now ready for operation.

The buttons page 104, fig. 68 and have two levels for opening the

window and two for closing it. This makes it easier to open and close windows

to the desired position.

One-touch closing does not w

even if the key is in the igniti

The automatic open and clos

temporarily disconnected, or

reactivated.

The one-touch function and r

malfunction in the electric wi

Roll-back function

The windows have a ro

of injuries when the win

If a window is obstructed

at this point and lowers imm

If this happens, check im

could not be closed before at

normal automatic function re

If the window is still obst

If there is no obvious reas

close it again within five seco

If you wait longer than 5 - 10

operate one of the buttons. O

The one-touch function and r

malfunction in the electric wi

WARNING

Incorrect use of the elec

A1 A2

Unlocking and locking106

the remote control for about 3 seconds.

tion electrically will be either opened or

to interrupt the function.

ompletely closed, the indicators will

f*

e sliding/tilting roof

of is opened and closed using the

ignition is switched on.

Fig. 69 Roof lining description: rotary sun roof control / deflector

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 106 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only intend to be gone for a short time. Please ensure that children are never left alone inside the vehicle.

The electric windows will work until the key has been removed from the ignition and one of the front doors has been opened.

Never close the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and third parties. Make sure that no one is in the path of a window.

Never allow people to remain in the vehicle when you close the vehicle from the outside. The windows cannot be opened even in an emergency.

Note The roll-back function is deactivated if the windows are closed from the

outside of the vehicle using the ignition key for convenience closing

page 106.

Convenience opening and closing*

Using the door lock

Hold the key in the door lock of the driver door in either the

locking or the unlocking position until all windows are either

opened or closed.

Release the key to interrupt this function.

Using the remote control

Push the lock button on

All windows which func

closed.

Press the unlock button

Once the windows are c

flash.

Sliding/tilting roo

Opening and closing th

The sliding/tilting sunro

rotary button when the

WARNING (continued)

Unlocking and locking 107

Safety Fir Technical Data

isabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if s. Unsupervised use of a key could mean that electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric of accident! The doors can be locked using the ld make the aid difficult in an emergency situ-

of continues to function until one of the front removed from the ignition.

or lock of the driver's door in the locking

ng/tilting sunroof is closed.

rrupt this function.

n the remote control for about 3 seconds.

roof is closed.

tton to interrupt the function.

g sunroof has closed completely, the indi-

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 107 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Closing the sliding/tilting sunroof

Turn the rotary button to position fig. 69 .

Opening/tilting the sliding/tilting sunroof

Turn the rotary button to position . The sunroof opens to the

convenience position where wind noise is reduced.

To open the roof further, turn the switch to position and hold

the switch in this position until the roof opens to the desired

position.

Tilting the sliding/tilting sunroof

Turn the rotary button to position .

Always close the sliding/tilting roof fully if you park the vehicle or leave it

unattended .

The sliding/tilting sunroof can be operated for up to about ten minutes after

the ignition has been switched off, provided the driver door and the front

passenger door are not opened.

Sunroof blind

The sunroof blind is opened together with the sliding/tilting roof. If required,

it can be closed by hand when the sunroof is closed.

WARNING

Incorrect use of the sliding/tilting sunroof can result in injury.

Never close the sliding/tilting sunroof without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no one is in the path of the sliding/tilting sunroof.

Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.

Never leave children or d they have access to the key the engine is started or that sliding/tilting sunroof). Risk remote control key. This cou ation.

The sliding/tilting sunro doors is opened and the key

Convenience closing*

Using the door lock

Hold the key in the do

position until the slidi

Release the key to inte

Using the remote control

Push the lock button o

The sliding/tilting sun

Release the unlock bu

When the sliding/tiltin

cators flash once.

AA

AB

AC

AD

WARNING (continued)

Unlocking and locking108

oll-back function which prevents larger objects

is closed. The roll-back function does not

d against the roof opening. The sliding/tilting

n immediately if it is obstructed when closing.

een opened again by the roll-back function, it

g the rotary button at the front in position

ing roof has closed fully. Please note that the t the roll-back function.

eakdown

nroof can be closed manually.

y inserting a screwdriver in the rear section.

cover fastening, insert it in the opening as far

the spring) and close the sliding roof.

tion.

Fig. 71 Emergency closing handle

AA

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 108 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Note The sliding/tilting sunroof rotary button remains in the last position selected

if the roof is closed using convenience closing from outside the vehicle and

will have to be re-positioned the next time you drive.

Roll-back function of the sliding/tilting roof*

The sliding/tilting roof has a r

getting trapped when the roof

prevent fingers getting pinche

sunroof stops and opens agai

If the sliding/tilting roof has b

can be closed only by pressin

fig. 70 until the sliding/tilt

sunroof will now close withou

Operation in the event of a br

In case of a breakdown, the su

Remove the plastic cover b

Remove the lever from the

as possible (pushing against

Fit the lever back into posi

Fig. 70 Roof lining description: rotary sun roof control / deflector

Lights and visibility 109

Safety Fir Technical Data

ts*

osition or to the first stop. The

switch lights up.

lights (vehicles with front fog lights)

osition or to the second stop

lights up in the control panel.

lights (vehicles with no front fog lights)

m position to the last stop. A warning

nstrument panel.

e lights on. Risk of accident. The side lights are ate the road ahead and to ensure that other u. Always use your dipped headlights if it is

hts will only work with the ignition on. The side

when the ignition is turned off.

r the key has been taken out of the ignition lock,

driver door remains open. This is a reminder to

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 109 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Lights and visibility

Lights

Switching lights on and off

Switching on the side lights

Turn the light switch fig. 72 to position .

Switching on dipped headlights

Turn the light switch to position .

Switching off the lights

Turn the light switch to position 0.

Switching on the fog ligh

Pull the switch out of p

symbol in the light

Switching on the rear fog

Pull the switch out of p

. A warning lamp

Switching on the rear fog

Pull the light switch fro

lamp lights up in the i

WARNING

Never drive with just the sid not bright enough to illumin road users are able to see yo dark or if visibility is poor.

Note The dipped beam headlig

lights come on automatically

If the lights are left on afte

a buzzer will sound while the

switch the lights off.

Fig. 72 Detailed view of instrument panel: lights, fog light and rear fog light control

Lights and visibility110

0.

is switched on, dipped headlights are automat-

ensitive sensor if you drive into a tunnel, for

es on the dipped headlights when the vehicle

a few seconds and it switches the lights off

ess than 65 km/h for a few minutes.

e dipped headlights when the windscreen

ontinuously for a few seconds and it switches

uous or intermittent wipe is switched off for

ght control is connected but the dipped lights

lights up on the light control fig. 73. If the

the dipped lights, the instrument and control

trol is switched on, the headlights will not be ain. Therefore, the dipped beam must be

automatic headlight system, when the key is

acoustic signal will only sound if the light

r if the vehicle is not fitted with the coming

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 110 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

The rear fog light is so bright that it can dazzle drivers behind you. You

should use the rear fog light only when visibility is very poor.

If you are towing a trailer equipped with a rear fog light on a vehicle with

a factory-fitted towing bracket, the rear fog light on the car will automatically

be switched off.

The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory

requirements.

Depending on weather conditions (very cold or wet), the front and rear

lights and the indicators may be temporarily misted. This has no influence on

the life expectancy of the lighting system. The lights will soon demist when

they are switched on.

Automatic lighting*

Activation

Rotate the switch to the position Auto, this indication will light

up.

Deactivation

Turn the light switch to

Automatic lighting

If automatic headlight control

ically switched on by a light-s

example.

The motorway function switch

is driven at over 140 km/h for

when the vehicle is driven at l

The rain sensor switches on th

wipers have been operating c

the lights off when the contin

some minutes page 123.

When the automatic dipped li

are off, the warning lamp automatic control switches on

lighting is also switched on.

WARNING

If automatic headlight con switched on in fog or heavy r switched on manually.

Note For those vehicles with the

removed from the ignition, the

control is in the position o

home function.

Fig. 73 Automatic lighting

Lights and visibility 111

Safety Fir Technical Data

ps)

ad safety in vehicles fitted with bi-xenon lamps.

tely to the headlights and are switched on each

if the light setting is in position 0 or .

ed light in combination with the daytime s)

the daytime lighting are activated at the same

he instrument panel lighting will automatically

entering a tunnel) and the daytime lights will go

ed light control switches off the dipped lights

nel), the daytime lights come back on.

aytime lights*

ts* combined with bi-xenon headlamps, these

activated with the indicator and main beam

lights combined with halogen lamps, this func-

deactivated in a specialist workshop.

bi-xenon lamps)

f, move the indicator and main beam lever

tor and headlamp flash).

econds. The daytime lights are deactivated and

-xenon lamps)

f, move the indicator and main beam lever

tor and headlamp flash).

conds. The daytime lights are activated and can

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 111 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

If the daylight driving automatic light function is switched on, the fog

lights or rear fog light cannot be switched on in addition.

The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory

requirements.

Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front of the sensor. This may

cause disruptions or faults in the automatic lighting system.

To avoid damage to the tail lights, the lights mounted on the tailgate go

off when the tailgate is opened (according to country).

Daytime lights*

The daytime light reduces the risk of accidents by increasing

the visibility of the vehicle. The daytime running lights are

enabled automatically when the ignition is switched on. It is

automatically switched off when the side lights are turned on.

Daytime lights (halogen lamps)18)

The daytime lights increase road safety in vehicles fitted with halogen lamps.

These include the dipped, side and registration plate lights.

The daytime lights are switched on each time the ignition is turned on if the

light setting is in position 0 or . Depending upon the model, a control

lamp on the light control switch or the lighting up of the instrument panel

will indicate that the daytime lighting is on.

It is not possible for the driver to switch the daytime lights on or off. Please

contact a qualified workshop if you wish to deactivate the lights.

Daytime lights (bi-xenon lam

The daytime lights increase ro

The lights are built-in separa

time the ignition is turned on

Automatic control of the dipp lighting (bi-xenon headlamp

If the dipped light control and

time, the dipped lights and t

come on as required (e.g. on

off. When the automatic dipp

(e.g. on coming out of the tun

Activating/deactivating the d

In vehicles with daytime ligh

lights may be activated or de

lever. In vehicles with daytime

tion can only be activated or

Deactivating daytime lights (

With the ignition switched of

upwards and back (left indica

Switch on the ignition for 3 s

can not be switched on.

Activating daytime lights (bi

With the ignition switched of

upwards and back (left indica

Switch on the ignition for 3 se

be switched on.

18) It is only available in some countries or as an optional extra

Lights and visibility112

ion and

darkness.

itches off in the following cases:

elay in switching off the headlamps has ended

in.

to position .

on.

itching off the headlamps in the Coming Home

n be changed or the function can be connected

ights and visibility page 72.

ed while the lights are on, and the lights are

s door opened, no acoustic signal is heard, as

ion is on, the lights are automatically switched

pt when the light switch is in position or

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 112 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Note Please observe any relevant legal requirements which may apply in your

country.

Coming home / leaving home function*

The Coming Home function is controlled manually. The

Leaving Home function is controlled with a photo sensor.

If the Coming Home or Leaving Home function is connected, the front side

and dipped lights, the tail lights and the registration plate light will light up

to provide assistance.

Coming home function

The Coming Home function is activated by switching off the ignition and

briefly flashing the lights. When the driver's door is opened, the Coming

Home lighting comes on. If the driver's door is already open when the lights

are flashed briefly, the Coming Home lighting comes on immediately.

When the last door of the vehicle or the tailgate is closed, the Coming Home

function starts and the switching off the headlights is delayed.

The Coming Home lighting switches off in the following cases:

On completion of the time period established for the delay in switching off

the lights after all the vehicle doors and the tailgate have been closed.

If, 30 seconds after being connected, any doors or the tailgate remain

open.

If the light switch is turned to position .

If the ignition is switched on.

Leaving home function

The Leaving Home function is activated when the vehicle is unlocked if:

the light control is in posit

the photosensor detects

The Leaving Home lighting sw

If the time period for the d

If the vehicle is locked aga

If the light switch is turned

If the ignition is switched

Note The setting for the delay in sw

and Leaving Home function ca

or disconnected in the menu L

If the ignition key is remov

flashed briefly and the driver'

when the Coming Home funct

off after a period of time (exce

.

Lights and visibility 113

Safety Fir Technical Data

trol

amps (xenon lamps) are equipped with

trol. This means that the headlights will be

l of the vehicle and nodding movements when

tomatically compensated for.

amps do not have headlight range control.

hts*

ends, the headlights will light the

f the road.

y operate if the vehicle is travelling at more than

dlamps are on. When taking a bend, the road is

ional gas discharge lamps than with conven-

Fig. 75 Cornering lighting using self-direc- tional headlights

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 113 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Instrument and switch lighting / Headlight range control

Instrument and switch lighting

When the headlights are switched on, the brightness of the instruments and

switch lighting can be regulated to suit your requirements by turning the

thumb wheel fig. 74 .

Those vehicles fitted with xenon gas discharge headlights are fitted with an

automatic headlight range system.

Headlight range control

By using the electrical headlight range control, you can adjust the head-

light range to the load level that is being carried in the vehicle. This way, it is

possible to avoid dazzling oncoming traffic more than necessary. At the same

time, by using the correct headlight settings, the driver has the best possible

lighting for the road ahead.

The headlights can only be adjusted when the dipped beam is switched on.

To lower the beam, turn the thumb wheel down from the basic setting 0.

Dynamic headlight range con

Vehicles with gas discharge l dynamic headlight range con adjusted to suit the load leve

pulling off and braking are au

Vehicles with gas discharge l

Self directional headlig

When driving around b

most important areas o

Dynamic curve lights (AFS)

The dynamic curve lights onl

10 km/h and the dipped hea

illuminated better with direct

tional fixed headlamps.

Fig. 74 Instrument panel: regulation for instrument and switch illumination and headlight range control

A1

A1

A2

A2

A2

Lights and visibility114

t control is switched on, the dipped head- in fog. They should be switched on manually

river is personally responsible for the correct . Automatic headlight control is merely a Where necessary, switch on the lights manu-

ts are used to draw the attention of

r vehicle in emergencies.

n:

afe distance from moving traffic.

Fig. 76 Instrument panel: switch for hazard warning lights

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 114 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

A fault in the system is indicated via the flashing of the control lamp on the

instrument panel. At the same time, a text message with information or

instructions to perform necessary operations may appear on the instrument

panel display. Take the vehicle to a qualified workshop and have the fault

repaired.

If the control lamp lights up on the instrument panel but all the lamps are

operating correctly page 253, there may still be a fault in the dynamic

curve lighting system (AFS). Take the vehicle to a qualified workshop and

have the fault repaired.

WARNING

If the automatic dipped light control is switched on, the dipped head- lights will not be switched on in fog. They should be switched on manually using the light switch. The driver is personally responsible for the correct use of lights in all situations. Automatic headlight control is merely a system to support the driver. Where necessary, switch on the lights manu- ally using the light switch.

Turning light*

When the indicator is switched on to turn or on very tight bends, the right or

left fog lamp automatically comes on to function as a turning light. The

turning light only operates if the dipped lights are on.

WARNING

If the automatic dipped ligh lights will not be switched on using the light switch. The d use of lights in all situations system to support the driver. ally using the light switch.

Hazard warning lights

The hazard warning ligh

other road users to you

If your vehicle breaks dow

1. Park your vehicle at a s

Lights and visibility 115

Safety Fir Technical Data

creases if your vehicle breaks down. Always ts and a warning triangle to draw the attention tationary vehicle.

talytic converter could come into contact with r the vehicle, for example dry grass or spilt !

if the hazard warning lights are left on for a long

witched off.

ning lights described here is subject to the rele-

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 115 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

2. Press the button to switch on the hazard warning lights .

3. Switch the engine off.

4. Apply the handbrake.

5. On a manual gearbox engage 1st gear, and for an automatic

move the selector lever to P.

6. Use the warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users

to your vehicle.

7. Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.

You should switch on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users, for

instance when:

reaching the tail end of a traffic jam,

there is an emergency

your vehicle breaks down due to a technical fault,

you are towing another vehicle or your vehicle is being towed.

All turn signals flash simultaneously when the hazard warning lights are

switched on. That is that the two turn signal indicator lamps and the

indicator lamp in the switch will flash at the same time. The hazard

warning lights also work when the ignition is switched off.

Emergency braking function

When the vehicle detects sudden braking, the hazard warning lights auto-

matically come on to warn vehicles behind. The hazard warning lights go off

when the vehicle accelerates or the hazard warning light switch is pressed.

WARNING

The risk of an accident in use the hazard warning ligh of other road users to your s

Never park where the ca inflammable materials unde petrol. This could start a fire

Note The battery will run down

time, even if the ignition is s

The use of the hazard war

vant statutory requirements.

Lights and visibility116

nd off

position .

page 116, fig. 77 to switch on the

rds you to switch the main beam head-

he steering wheel to operate the

ts

nd remove the key from the lock.

wn to turn the right or left-hand parking

her drivers. Risk of accident! Never use the headlight flasher if they could dazzle other

when the ignition is switched on. The corre-

flashes in the instrument panel. The warning

n signals are operated, provided a trailer is

ted to the vehicle. If a turn signal bulb is defec-

at double speed. If the trailer turn signal bulbs

does not light up. Change the bulb.

A3

A4

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 116 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Indicator and main beam headlight lever

The turn signal and main beam lever also operates the

parking lights and the headlight flasher.

The turn signal and main beam headlight lever has the following

functions:

Switching on the turn signals

Move the lever all the way up page 116, fig. 77 to indicate

right, and all the way down to indicate left.

Signalling a lane change

Push the lever up or down to the point where you incur

resistance and then release it. The turn signal will flash several

times. The corresponding warning lamp will also flash.

Switching main beam on a

Turn the light switch to

Press the lever forward

main beams.

Pull the lever back towa

lights off again.

Headlight flashers

Pull the lever towards t

flasher.

Switching on parking ligh

Switch the ignition off a

Move the lever up or do

lights on, respectively.

WARNING

The main beam can dazzle ot main beam headlights or the drivers.

Note The turn signals only work

sponding warning lamp or lamp flashes when the tur

correctly attached and connec

tive, the warning lamp flashes

are damaged, warning lamp

Fig. 77 Indicator and main beam headlight lever

A1

A2

A1 A2

Lights and visibility 117

Safety Fir Technical Data

1

ed to select the following positions:

(not activated). The interior lights are automat-

ehicle is unlocked or the key removed from the

rox. 20 seconds after closing the doors. The inte-

en the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is

n .

fig. 78.

Fig. 78 Interior roof trim: front interior lights

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 117 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

The main beam headlights can only be switched on if the dipped beam

headlights are already on. The warning lamp then comes on in the combi-

instrument.

The headlight flasher comes on for as long as you pull the lever even if

no other lights are switched on. The warning lamp then comes on in the

combi-instrument.

When the parking lights are switched on, the headlight and the rear light

on the corresponding side of the vehicle light up. The parking lights will only

work if the key is removed from the ignition. If the lights are switched on, a

buzzer gives an audible warning while the driver door is open.

If the turn signal lever is left on after the key has been taken out of the

ignition lock, an acoustic signal sounds when the driver door is opened. This

is a reminder to switch off the turn signal, unless of course you wish to leave

the parking light on.

Interior lights

Front interior light type

The switch fig. 78 is us

Courtesy light position

Rocker switch in flat position

ically switched on when the v

ignition lock And turn off app

rior lights are switched off wh

switched on.

Interior light switched on

Push the switch to the positio

Interior light switched off O

Push the switch to position O

AA

Lights and visibility118

n .

page 118, fig. 79.

closed, the interior lights will be switched off

iding the key has been removed and the cour-

his prevents the battery from discharging.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 118 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Note If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched off

after approx. 10 minutes, providing the key has been removed and the cour-

tesy light position selected. This prevents the battery from discharging.

Front interior light type 2

The switch fig. 79 is used to select the following positions:

Courtesy light position

Rocker switch in flat position (not activated). The interior lights are automat-

ically switched on when the vehicle is unlocked or the key removed from the

ignition lock And turn off approx. 20 seconds after closing the doors. The inte-

rior lights are switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is

switched on.

Interior light switched on

Push the switch to the positio

Interior light switched off O

Push the switch to position O

Note If not all the vehicle doors are

after approx. 10 minutes, prov

tesy light position selected. T

Fig. 79 Interior roof trim: front interior lights

AA

Lights and visibility 119

Safety Fir Technical Data

off

on to switch the reading light off.

ng lights*

ed to select the following positions:

, the interior and reading lights are switched

t

(left reading light) or to position (right

. The interior lights are automatically switched

ed or the key removed from the ignition lock The

Fig. 82 Interior roof trim: rear interior lights and reading lights.

1

A4

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 119 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Front reading lights

Switching on the reading light

Press the corresponding button fig. 80 and fig. 81 to switch on

the reading light.

Switching the reading lights

Press the corresponding butt

Rear interior and readi

The switch fig. 82 is us

Interior light switched off 0

In switch position fig. 82

off.

Switching on the reading ligh

Turn the switch to position

reading light).

Courtesy light position

Turn the control to position

on when the vehicle is unlock

Fig. 80 Interior roof trim: front reading lights, type 1

Fig. 81 Interior roof trim: front reading lights, type 2

AB AB

AC

A

A2

A3

Lights and visibility120

d the front passenger can be pulled out of their

vehicle and turned towards the doors fig. 83

n visors have covers. When you open the cover

p.

ll go out when the vanity mirror cover is pushed

d back up.

ut 10 minutes following the removal of the igni-

ttery from discharging.

r doors are fitted with a sun visor

Fig. 84 Rear door sun visor

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 120 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

light turns off about 20 seconds after closing the doors. The interior lights are

switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is switched on.

Interior lights or both reading lights switched on

Turn the control to position .

Note If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched off

after approx. 10 minutes, providing the key has been removed and the cour-

tesy light position selected. This prevents the battery from discharging.

Visibility

Sun visors

The sun visors for the driver an

mountings in the centre of the

The make-up mirrors in the su

, a lamp in the roof lights u

The lamp* in the roof lining wi

back or the sun visor is pushe

Note The roof lamp will turn off abo

tion key. This prevents the ba

Sun visor*

The windows on the rea

A5

Fig. 83 Sun visor on the driver side

A1

A2

Lights and visibility 121

Safety Fir Technical Data

osition .

the left or right to set the length of the

e left: long intervals; control to the right:

per interval stages can be set using switch

osition .

osition .

position to give the windscreen a brief

art to move faster if you keep the lever

er than 2 seconds.

system

he steering wheel - Position . The wash

ediately and the wipers will start with a

and wiper systems will function at the

f over 120 km/h.

ipers will keep running for approximately

in the wiper blade* area

ome versions, there is the possibility of heating

the windscreen wiper blades in order to aid de-

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 121 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Sun visors on the rear side windows*

Pull out the visor and hook it onto the hooks at the top of the door

frame fig. 84.

Windscreen wipers

Front windscreen wipers

The windscreen wiper lever controls the windscreen wipers

and the automatic wash and wipe.

The windscreen wiper lever fig. 85 has the following positions:

Switching off the wipers

Move the lever to position .

Intermittent wipe

Move the lever up to p

Move the control to

intervals. Control to th

short intervals. Four wi

.

Slow wipe

Move the lever up to p

Continuous wipe

Move the lever up to p

Brief wipe

Move the lever down to

wipe. The wiper will st

pressed down for long

Wash and wipe automatic

Pull the lever towards t

function will start imm

slight delay. The wash

same time at speeds o

Release the lever. The w

four seconds.

Optional heated windscreen

In some countries and with s

the windscreen in the area of

Fig. 85 Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever

A0

AA

AA

Lights and visibility122

again, you have to turn the ignition off and

pe function is on, the intervals are directly

s way, the higher the vehicle speed the shorter

way any obstacles that are on the windscreen.

he obstacle blocks its path. Remove the

back on again.

ts that may be trapped in the side areas of the

wiper arms to the service position (horizontal).

ted jets is controlled automatically when the

ding upon the outside temperature.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 122 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

icing in the zone. The function is switched on by pressing the rear heating

window key .

WARNING

Worn and dirty wiper blades obstruct visibility and reduce safety levels.

In cold conditions, you should not use the wash / wipe system unless you have warmed the windscreen with the heating and ventilation system. The washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the windscreen and obscure your view of the road.

Always note the corresponding warnings on page 223, Changing windscreen wiper blades.

Caution In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blades are not frozen to the

glass before using the wipers for the first time. If you switch on the wipers

when the wiper blades are frozen to the windscreen, you could damage both

the wiper blades and the wiper motor.

Note The windscreen wipers will only work when the ignition is switched on.

In certain versions of vehicles with alarms, the windscreen wiper will only

work when the ignition is on and the bonnet closed.

When in use, the wipers do not go as far as the rest position. When the

lever is moved to position 0, they are totally hidden.

The next speed down will automatically be selected if speed page 121,

fig. 85 or is selected when the vehicle stops. The set speed will be

resumed when the vehicle starts again

The windscreen will be wiped again after approximately five seconds once

the automatic wipe/wash system has been operated, provided the vehicle

is in transit (drip function). If you activate the wipers less than three secionds

after the drip function, a new wash sequence will begin without the last wipe.

For the drip function to work

then on again.

When the intermittent wi

proportional to the speed. Thi

the intervals.

The wiper will try to wipe a

The wiper will stop moving if t

obstacle and switch the wiper

Before removing any objec

windscreen, always move the

The heat output of the hea

ignition is switched on, depen

A2 A3

Lights and visibility 123

Safety Fir Technical Data

sor

iper lever into position fig. 87.

the left or right to set the sensitivity of the

the right: highly sensitive. Control to the

interval wipe function. You will have to switch

switch off the ignition. This is done by switching

n off and back on.

windscreen in front of the sensor. This may

ults.

A1

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 123 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Rain sensor*

The rain sensor controls the frequency of the windscreen

wiper intervals, depending on the amount of rain.

Switching on the rain sen

Move the windscreen w

Move the control to

rain sensor. Control to

left: less sensitive.

The rain sensor is part of the

the rain sensor back on if you

the wiper intermittent functio

Note Do not put stickers on the

cause sensor disruption or fa

Fig. 86 Rain sensor*

Fig. 87 Windscreen wiper lever

AA

Lights and visibility124

en wiper and washer system

ards to position fig. 88. The wash

diately and the wiper will start with a

reen wash system will function as long as

is position.

iper then wipes for approximately 4

tervals again.

asher system stops and the wipers func-

e will obstruct visibility and reduce safety.

nding warnings on page 223, Changing

k that the wiper blade is not frozen to the glass

first time. If you switch on the wiper when the

ass, this could damage both the wiper blade

only function when the ignition is switched on

indscreen wipers switched on, the rear wind-

pe.

A7

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 124 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Rear window wiper

The windscreen wiper lever operates the windscreen wiper

and the wash and wipe system for the rear window.

Switching on the interval wipe

Press the lever forwards to position fig. 88. The wiper will

wipe the window approximately every 6 seconds.

Switching off the interval wipe function

Pull the lever back from position towards the steering wheel.

The wiper will continue to function for a short period if you switch

off whilst the wipers are in motion.

Switching on the windscre

Press the lever fully forw

function will start imme

slight delay. The windsc

you hold the lever in th

Release the lever. The w

seconds, and then in in

Release the lever. The w

tion.

WARNING

A worn or dirty wiper blad

Always note the correspo windscreen wiper blades.

Caution In icy conditions, always chec

before using the wiper for the

wiper blade is frozen to the gl

and the wiper motor.

Note The windscreen wiper will

and the tailgate is closed.

In reverse gear, with the w

screen wiper will make one wi

Fig. 88 Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever: rear window wiper

A6

A6

Lights and visibility 125

Safety Fir Technical Data

interior mirror*

zle function can be switched on and off

function

. 89. Warning lamp goes out:

function

. 89. Warning lamp is lit.

tivated every time the ignition is switched on.

ts up in the mirror housing.

is activated the interior mirror will darken auto- ount of light it receives (for example from the

d). The anti-dazzle function is cancelled if

Fig. 89 Automatic anti- dazzle interior mirror.

AB

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 125 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Headlight washer system

The headlight washers clean the headlight lenses.

The headlight washers are activated automatically when the windscreen

washer is used and the windscreen wiper lever is pulled towards the steering

wheel for at least 1.5 seconds provided the dipped headlights or main

beams are switched on. Clean off stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) from the head-

lights at regular intervals, for instance when filling the fuel tank.

Note

To ensure that the headlight washers work properly in winter, keep the

nozzle holders in the bumper free of snow and remove any ice with a de-icer

spray.

To remove water, the windscreen wipers will be activated from time to

time, the headlight wipers will be activated every three cycles.

Mirrors

Interior mirror

It is dangerous to drive if you cannot see clearly through the

rear window.

Manual anti-dazzle function for interior mirror

In the basic mirror position, the lever at the bottom edge of the mirror should

be at the front. Pull the lever to the back to select the anti-dazzle function.

Automatic anti-dazzle

The automatic anti-daz

as desired.

Switching off anti-dazzle

Press button fig

Switching on anti-dazzle

Press button fig

Anti-dazzle function

The anti-dazzle function is ac

The green indicator lamp ligh

When the anti-dazzle function

matically according to the am

headlights of a vehicle behin

reverse gear is engaged.

AA

AA

Lights and visibility126

position the mirror so that you have a

f the vehicle.

(right exterior mirror).

to position the mirror so that you have a

f the car .

rs*

to the central position fig. 90 so

w mirrors warm up and the heated wind-

de rest area is activated page 121.

is not activated in temperatures above

*

90 to position to fold in the exterior

ays fold in the exterior mirrors if you are

matic car wash. This will help prevent

ith convenience control*

ror will fold back automatically with

ith the remote or the key)

the door and use the contact.

ck out to the extended position*

r position to fold the exterior mirrors back

A1

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 126 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Note The automatic anti-dazzle function will only work properly if the sun

blind* for the rear window is retracted and there are no other objects

preventing light from reaching the interior mirror.

If you have to stick any type of sticker on the windscreen, do not do so in

front of the sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-dazzle function from

working well or even from working at all.

Exterior mirrors

The exterior mirrors can be adjusted using the rotary knob in

the centre console.

Basic setting of exterior mirrors

1. Turn knob fig. 90 to position L (left exterior mirror).

2. Turn the rotary knob to

good view to the rear o

3. Turn knob to position R

4. Swivel the rotary knob

good view to the rear o

Heating the exterior mirro

Turn the knob forwards

that the heated rear vie

screen* in the wiper bla

The wing mirror heating

approximately 20C.

Folding in exterior mirrors

Turn the control fig.

mirrors. You should alw

driving through an auto

damage.

Folding rear view mirrors w

The outer rear view mir

convenience closing (w

To unfold it again, open

Folding exterior mirrors ba

Turn the knob to anothe

out .

Fig. 90 Controls of exte- rior mirrors

Lights and visibility 127

Safety Fir Technical Data

be adjusted separately or simultaneously, as

unction does not activate with speeds higher

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 127 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Synchronised mirror adjustment

1. Turn the control to the position L (left exterior mirror).

2. Turn the rotary knob to position the mirror so that you have a

good view to the rear of the vehicle. The right exterior mirror will

be adjusted at the same time (synchronised).

WARNING

The rear view convex or aspheric mirror increase the field of vision however the objects appear smaller and further away in the mirrors. If you use these mirrors to estimate the distance to vehicles behind you when changing lane, you could make a mistake. Risk of accident.

If possible, use the interior mirror to estimate distances to vehicles behind you.

Make sure that you do not get your finger trapped between the mirror and the mirror base when folding back the mirrors. Risk of injury!

For the sake of the environment The exterior mirror heating should be switched off when it is no longer

needed. Otherwise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste.

Note If the electrical adjustment ever fails to operate, the mirrors can be

adjusted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass.

In vehicles with electric wing mirrors, the following points should be

observed: if, due to an external force (e.g. a knock while manoeuvring), the

adjustment of the mirror housing is altered, the mirror will have to be

completely folded electrically. Do not readjust the mirror housing by hand, as

this will interfere with the mirror adjuster function.

The rear view mirrors can

described before.

The wing mirrors folding f

than 40km/h.

Seats and stowage128

the foot well when the vehicle is moving; panel, out of the window or on the seat. This . An incorrect sitting position exposes you to

case of a sudden braking or an accident. If the sustain severe injuries due to an incorrect

er and front passenger to keep a distance of ing wheel or instrument panel. Failure to e means that the airbag will not protect you. ce between the driver and the steering wheel er and the dash panel should always be as

passenger seat only when the vehicle is to the forwards/backwards adjustment of the at could move unexpectedly while the vehicle

e the risk of an accident and therefore, injury. our seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting

nts.

to installing a child seat on the front ling a child seat, observe the warning note in .

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 128 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Seats and stowage

The importance of correct seat adjustment

Proper seat adjustment optimises the level of protection

offered by seat belts and airbags.

Your vehicle has five passenger places, two individual front seats and three

places on the rear seat. Each seat is equipped with a three-point seat belt.

The driver seat and the front passenger seat can be adjusted in many ways to

suit the physical requirements of the vehicle occupants. The correct seat

position is very important for:

a fast and easy operation of all controls on the instrument panel,

a relaxed posture which does not cause drowsiness,

safe driving page 7,

and to ensure that the seat belts and airbag system provide maximum

protection page 19.

WARNING

If the driver and passengers assume improper sitting positions, they may sustain critical injuries.

More people than available seats must never be transported in your vehicle.

Every passenger in the vehicle must properly fasten and wear the seat belt belonging to his or her seat. Children must be protected with an appro- priate child restraint system page 45, Child safety.

The front seats and all head restraints must always be adjusted to body size and the seat belt must always be properly adjusted to provide you and your passengers with optimum protection.

Always keep your feet on never rest them on the dash is also applied to passengers an increased risk of injury in airbag is triggered, you could sitting position.

It is important for the driv at least 25 cm from the steer respect the minimum distanc Risk of fatal injury. The distan or between the front passeng great as possible.

Adjust the driver or front stationary. This also applies rear seats. Otherwise, your se is moving. This could increas In addition, while adjusting y position. Risk of fatal accide

Special guidelines apply passenger seat. When instal the page 45, Child safety

WARNING (continued)

Seats and stowage 129

Safety Fir Technical Data

int so that its upper edge is at the same

head, or as close as possible to the same

r head and, at minimum, at eye level

2.

page 130

restraints removed or improperly adjusted injuries.

d restraints could lead to death in the event of

d restraints also increase the risk of injury d driving or braking manoeuvres.

t always be adjusted according to the

Fig. 92 Side view: head restraints and seat belts correctly adjusted

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 129 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Head restraints

Correct adjustment of head restraints

Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of

passengers protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in

most accident situations.

Adjust the head restra

level as the top of your

level as the top of you

fig. 91 and fig. 9

Adjusting the head restraints

WARNING

Travelling with the head increases the risk of severe

Improperly adjusted hea a collision or accident.

Incorrectly adjusted hea during sudden or unexpecte

The head restraints mus passenger's height.

Fig. 91 Front view: head restraints and seat belts correctly adjusted

Seats and stowage130

aint, press the button and push head

d restraint engages securely in one of its

ats)

t forward or back to the required position.

int

up as far as it will go.

93 (arrow).

of fitting without releasing the button.

t into the guides on the rear backrest.

wn.

nt to suit body size page 14 and

straints have been removed. Risk of injury.

straints are in an unsuitable position, there is

straint, you must always adjust it properly for tection.

warnings page 129, Correct adjustment

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 130 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Removing or adjusting head restraints

The head restraints can be adjusted by moving them up and

down.

Adjusting height (front seats)

Press the button on the side and pull upwards to the desired

position.

To lower the head restraint, press the button and push head

restraint downwards.

Make sure that it engages securely into position.

Adjusting height (rear seats)

Press the button on the side and pull upwards to the desired

position.

To lower the head restr

restraint downwards.

Make sure that the hea

positions page 14.

Angle adjustment (front se

Press the head restrain

Removing the head restra

Push the head restraint

Press the button fig.

Pull head restraint out

Fitting the head restraint

Insert the head restrain

Push head restraint do

Adjust the head restrai

page 13.

WARNING

Never drive if the head re

Never drive if the head re a risk of serious injury.

After refitting the head re height to achieve optimal pro

Please observe the safety of head restraints.

Fig. 93 Adjusting and removing the head restraints

Seats and stowage 131

Safety Fir Technical Data

t angle

e backrest and turn the hand wheel.

support*

e backrest and turn the hand wheel to

port.

cushioned area is determined by the settings

his supports the natural curvature of the spine

r front passenger seat while the vehicle is in r seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting nts. Adjust the driver or front passenger seat tionary.

ry to the driver and front passenger in case of dent, never drive with the backrest tilted um protection of the seat belt can be achieved in an upright position and the driver and front justed their seat belts. The further the back- he greater the risk of injury due to improper

ecuring the seat height into forwards/back- be caused if the backrest is tilted without due

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 131 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Front seats

Adjustment of the front seats

The control elements in fig. 94 are mirrored for the front right-

hand seat.

Adjusting the seat forwards and backwards

Pull up the grip and move the seat forwards or backwards.

Then release the grip and move the seat further until the

catch engages.

Adjusting the seat height*

Pull the lever up or push down (several times if necessary) from

its home position. This adjusts the seat height in stages.

Adjusting the backres

Take your weight off th

Adjusting the lumbar

Take your weight off th

adjust the lumbar sup

The backrest curvature of the

made in the lumbar region. T

very effectively.

WARNING

Never adjust the driver o motion. While adjusting you position. Risk of fatal accide only when the vehicle is sta

To reduce the risk of inju a sudden braking or an acci towards the rear. The maxim only when the backrests are passenger have properly ad rests are tilted to the rear, t positioning of the belt web!

Exercise caution when s wards position. Injuries can care and attention.

Fig. 94 Front left seat controls

A1

A1

A2

A3

A4

Seats and stowage132

icles without Climatronic

mb wheel fig. 95 to switch on the seat

ng is switched off in the 0 position.

icles with Climatronic

ch on the seat heating.

eating at maximum level (level 3).

heating at medium level (level 2).

t seat heating at minimum level (level 1).

ssed four times, the heating goes off and

0).

hen the ignition is switched on. The left thumb

d the right thumb wheel the right seat.

g elements, please do not kneel on the seat or

le point to the seat cushion and backrest.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 132 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Heated seats*

The front seat cushions and backrests can be heated electri-

cally.

Front seat heating for veh

Turn the appropriate thu

heating. The seat heati

Front seat heating for veh

Press button to swit

Press once to set seat h

Press twice to set seat

Press three times to se

When the button is pre

the LED goes out (level

The seat heating only works w

wheel controls the left seat an

Caution To avoid damaging the heatin

apply sharp pressure at a sing

Fig. 95 Thumb wheel for the front seat heating

Fig. 96 Front seat heating with Climatronic

AA

Seats and stowage 133

Safety Fir Technical Data

orwards or backwards independently. The

/3 of the seat. There are various possible

unlock the lever in the direction of the

forwards or backwards to the desired

t

e top. Pull the loop on the side of the seat

rection of the arrow and hold the loop in

backrest to the required position and

n the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, your ly while the vehicle is moving. This could

ent and therefore, injury.

s down until the seat is moved, this is to avoid le.

ce moved, is fixed in position.

aximum luggage compartment space, put the

, without moving.

aximum space without putting the seatbacks

d to the desired position.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 133 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Rear seat bench

Seat adjustment

The seats may be moved f

movement can be 1/3 or 2

positions.

Adjusting reach

In the seated position,

arrow fig. 97.

Move the seat cushion

position.

Backrest angle adjustmen

Hold the backrest at th

fig. 98 in the di

this position. Push the

release the loop.

WARNING

Adjust the seat only whe seat could move unexpected increase the risk of an accid

Do not push the seatback damage to the centre conso

Ensure that the seat, on

Note In order to maintain the m

seatbacks in position normal

In order to maintain the m

down, move the seats forwar

Fig. 97 For unlocking the rear seat

Fig. 98 Rear seat back- rest angle adjustment

A1

Seats and stowage134

ckrests down

e of the seat fig. 100 in the direc-

t the seat backrest into position.

backrest has engaged properly in position

on the seats may not, for reasons of safety, be

krest into position ensure that the seat belts

Fig. 100 Folding or opening the front seat backrests

A1

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 134 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Folding the seat backrests down

Pull the loop on the side of the seat fig. 99

In this position the back rest is locked. This is the reason why the loop located

on the side of the seat must be pulled in the direction of the arrow to open the

backrest.

WARNING

You should check that the backrest has engaged properly in position after the loop is released.

The locking system loops on the seats may not, for reasons of safety, be used to secure any items.

Folding the rear seat ba

Pull the loop on the sid

tion of the arrow and lif

WARNING

You should check that the after the loop is released.

The locking system loops used to secure any items.

After locking the seat bac protrude from the seat.

Fig. 99 Folding or opening the rear seat backrests

A1

Seats and stowage 135

Safety Fir Technical Data

t with stowage area

in the armrest.

rea, lift the armrest up in the direction of

nd then lift the cover.

r* or the lower stowage area, pull on the

pressing on the button.

rea, push the armrest down.

ea closed while the vehicle is in motion to the armrest during a sudden braking

f an accident.

Fig. 102 Front armrest with stowage area

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 135 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Stowage compartments

Stowage compartment on the front passenger side

The compartment can be opened by pulling the lever fig. 101.

WARNING

Always keep the stowage compartment cover closed while the vehicle is in motion in order to reduce the risk of injury caused by a sudden braking or by an accident.

Centre arm rest at fron

There is a stowage area

To open the stowage a

the arrow fig. 102 a

To access the CD loade

armrest cover without

To close the stowage a

WARNING

Always keep the stowage ar reduce the risk of injury from manoeuvre or in the event o

Fig. 101 Passenger side: stowage compartment

Seats and stowage136

aximum weight of 1.5 kg.

er cover open. There is an injury risk for eased in case of sudden braking or an

to the rear of the front seat backrests.

it up in the direction of the arrow

Fig. 104 Folding table of front left seat

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 136 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Note The CD changer is located in this compartment.

Stowage areas under the front seats*

There is a stowage locker with a cover under each front seat.

The drawer* fig. 103 is opened by pushing the button and putting the

cover back.

There are two open positions of 15 and 60 degrees depending on the pres-

sure applied to the cover. In the 60 degree position, the cover will collapse if

too much pressure is applied.

To close the drawer, press the cover until it locks into position.

WARNING

The drawers will hold a m

Do not drive with the draw passengers if the cargo is rel accident.

Folding table*

Folding tables are fitted

To open the table, open

fig. 104.

Fig. 103 Stowage area under the front seats

AA

Seats and stowage 137

Safety Fir Technical Data

e cover to open these compartments

will then open.

ss it up until it engages.

ea cover closed while the vehicle is in motion uring a sudden braking manoeuvre or in the

prevent any items from being thrown through

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 137 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

WARNING

The folding tables may not be folded down whilst the vehicle is in motion and anyone is seated on the second row of seats. There is a risk on injury during a sudden braking manoeuvre! The table must therefore be closed and properly secured whilst the vehicle is in motion.

Never place hot drinks in the drink holders. During normal or sudden driving manoeuvres, sudden braking or an accident, the hot drink could be spilled. Danger of scalding.

Caution When driving, do not leave open cans in the cup holders. The drink might be

spilt on braking, for example, and could damage the vehicle.

Roof stowage compartment*

There are four stowage compartments in the roof

Press the button on th

fig. 105. The cover

To close the cover, pre

WARNING

Always keep the stowage ar to reduce the risk of injury d event of an accident and to the vehicle interior.

Fig. 105 Roof stowage compartments

Seats and stowage138

rtment floor and fold it back all the way

fig. 107, into the side grooves depending

ts to be transported. The onboard tool kit

e located underneath the luggage

ggage compartment with suitable straps

ed for a maximum load of 50 kg. For heavier

move.

m authorised weight for the vehicle

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 138 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Stowage in the luggage compartment*

There is a variable stowage area* in the luggage compart-

ment floor.

Lift the luggage compa

fig. 106.

Fit the separator on the size of the objec

and the spare wheel ar

compartment.

Secure luggage in the lu

on the fastening rings.

Note The folding table is design

loads fold up the table and re

Do not exceed the maximu

page 273. Fig. 106 Variable floor boot stowage compart- ment

Fig. 107 Variable floor boot stowage compart- ment

AA

Seats and stowage 139

Safety Fir Technical Data

ound:

d rear),

ggage compartment,

in the luggage compartment (only on vehicles

e kit*.

d on the rear roof handles.

ts on the dashboard. These objects could be compartment when the vehicle is moving (e.g. or cornering) and distract the driver. Risk of

n fall from the centre console or other stowage ll while the vehicle is moving. In the event of a you will not be able to use the brake, clutch or .

at hooks must not restrict the driver's view. ooks are intended only for use with light arti- e any hard, sharp or heavy objects in hanging udden braking manoeuvres or accidents, espe- deployment, these objects could injure the

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 139 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Luggage compartment retaining net

There is a retaining net in the luggage compartment for

securing objects.

Use the fastening rings located on the side of the luggage

compartment to attach the retaining net fig. 108.

Note The folding table is designed for a maximum load of 50 kg. For heavier

loads fold up the table and remove.

Do not exceed the maximum authorised weight for the vehicle

page 273.

Other stowage areas

Other stowage areas can be f

in the centre console,

in the door trims (front an

in the side trims of the lu

in the spare wheel recess

with an optional anti-punctur

The clothes hooks are locate

WARNING

Do not store loose objec flung through the passenger while accelerating, braking accident.

Ensure that no objects ca areas into the driver foot we sudden braking manoeuvre, accelerator. Risk of accident

Clothing hung on the co Risk of accident. The coat h cles of clothing. Do not leav articles of clothing. During s cially those involving airbag vehicle occupants.

Fig. 108 Retaining net

Seats and stowage140

rest*

Fig. 110 Opening the rear drink holders

Fig. 111 Rear armrest/drink holder

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 140 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Drinks holders at the front

In the centre console, in front of the gear lever, there are two drink holders

fig. 109.

WARNING

Never place hot drinks in the drink holders. During normal or sudden driving manoeuvres, sudden braking or an accident, the hot drink could be spilled. Danger of scalding.

Never use rigid materials (for example, glass or ceramic), these could cause injury in the case of an accident.

Rear drink holder* / Arm

Fig. 109 Front drink holder

Seats and stowage 141

Safety Fir Technical Data

mpartment

ction of the rear seat back rest, in order to

n of the back rest.

compartment mounting plate

side of the vehicle, through the rear

hould be fitted between the back rest and

seat area.

clips the cushion frame. The rings of the

rtment mounting plate appear at the front

the plate clip, tilt the rear back rest of the

slightly and then lean the back rest back-

ng of the mobile stowage compartment

te easier.

Fig. 113 Mobile stowage compartment mounting plate

AH

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 141 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Opening and closing the armrest* / drink holder*

To open, pull the loop in the direction of the arrow page 140,

fig. 110 .

To close, lift the Drink holder* / armrest* in the direction of the

arrow page 140, fig. 111 .

WARNING

Ensure that the load in the luggage compartment is correctly secured with the retainer net when travelling with the armrest down page 139.

Multi-purpose* mobile stowage compartment - Fitting and removal

This stowage compartment may only be placed in the central

area of the rear seat

Fitting mobile stowage co

Fold down the small se

access the large sectio

Fit the mobile stowage

fig. 113 from the in

section of the seat. It s

the seat, in the central

Push the plate until it

mobile stowage compa

of the seat.

If it is difficult to make

large section forwards

wards to make the fitti

onto the mounting pla

A1

A2

Fig. 112 Mobile stowage compartment Installation

Seats and stowage142

stowage compartment - General

ent may only be placed in the central

Fig. 114 Mobile stowage compartment Opening

Fig. 115 Mobile stowage compartment Duties

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 142 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Place the mobile stowage compartment onto the foam of the

central seat.

Set both mounting pieces together page 141, fig. 112,

with both mounting rings page 141, fig. 113 and press

hard until both the clips completely connect with the rings.

Removing mobile stowage compartment

Pull each of the buttons page 141, fig. 112 on the clips

(red buttons) forwards, until they snap out of place.

Fold the larger seat down and remove the mobile stowage

compartment mounting plate.

Multi-purpose* mobile information

This stowage compartm

area of the rear seat

AE

AG

AF

Seats and stowage 143

Safety Fir Technical Data

ing, keep the tables stored inside the mobile the cover closed, and likewise when they are

the drink holders. The drink may spill and le is moving.

drinkholder when the vehicle is in motion, n may be flung around the vehicle and cause

ting plate is correctly clipped onto the cushion

use, store inside the stowage compartment.

e compartment is not in use, it should always net in the luggage compartment.

wage compartment is correctly fitted, pulling it

ox and checking that both safety clips are

gs.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 143 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Opening

Lift the cover , in area page 142, fig. 114.

Closing

Push the cover down, until it clips into place.

Uses of the mobile stowage compartment

The front open glove box may be used to store small objects that will not

damage passengers in the event that the objects are flung around the interior

of the vehicle.

The drink holders are used for holding drink cans or cups.

The elastic belt on the side may be used for keeping papers and maga-

zines.

The tables may be used as a support for writing.

To use the table page 142, fig. 115, it must be removed from its

compartment on the side of the mobile stowage compartment and fitted into

compartment page 142, fig. 115 on the front section of the mobile

stowage compartment.

The table in the right-hand compartment is fitted in the left-hand compart-

ment of the front of the mobile stowage compartment and the table in the left-

hand compartment is fitted in the right-hand compartment.

The tables have two positions for use and cannot be interchanged.

WARNING

The mobile stowage compartment supports a maximum load of 5 kg. Do not overload.

Do not drive when the cover of the mobile stowage compartment is open.

Do not drive when the tables are set up for use.

When the vehicle is mov stowage compartment with not in use

Never place hot drinks in cause burns when the vehic

Do not leave cans in the there is a danger that the ca injury.

Make sure that the moun frame.

When the plate is not in

When the mobile stowag be fastened by the retaining

Note Check that the mobile sto

forwards by the front glove b

correctly clipped onto the rin

AB AA

AC

AD

WARNING (continued)

Seats and stowage144

ighter fig. 117 to activate it .

op out slightly.

hter and light the cigarette on the

tte lighter can lead to serious injuries or start

y. Carelessness or negligence when using the urns, risk of injury.

en the ignition is turned on or the engine is fire, never leave children alone inside the

Fig. 117 The cigarette lighter is located in the electric socket on the front of the centre console

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 144 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Ashtrays*, cigarette lighter* and electrical sockets*

Ashtray*

Opening and closing the ashtray

To open the ashtray, lift the cover fig. 116.

To close, push the cover down.

Emptying the ashtray

Extract the ashtray and empty it.

WARNING

Never put paper in the ashtray. Hot ash could ignite the paper in the ashtray and cause a fire.

Cigarette lighter*

Press on the cigarette l

Wait for the lighter to p

Pull out the cigarette lig

glowing coil.

WARNING

Improper use of the cigare a fire.

Using the lighter carefull cigarette lighter can cause b

The lighter only works wh running. To avoid the risk of vehicle.

Fig. 116 Ashtray located in the front drink holder

Seats and stowage 145

Safety Fir Technical Data

connected to the 12 volt socket in the front

the passenger compartment and that of the

nces connected to each power point must not

Watt.

d the connected accessories will only operate hen the engine is running. Improper use of the ries can lead to serious injuries or cause a fire. ever leave children alone inside the vehicle.

iances with the engine switched off will cause a

l accessories, see the instructions on

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 145 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Electrical sockets*

Electrical equipment can be connected to any of the 12 volt

sockets.

Electrical accessories may be

centre console fig. 118 of

boot* fig. 119. The applia

exceed a power rating of 120

WARNING

The current power points an when the ignition is on or w sockets or electrical accesso To avoid the risk of injury, n

Note The use of electrical appl

battery discharge.

Before using any electrica

page 208. Fig. 118 Socket, centre console, front

Fig. 119 Socket, luggage compartment

Seats and stowage146

s an audio input (red and white connectors) or

d, white and yellow connectors). For more

udio and video source, see the RSE manual.

Fig. 121 AUX RSE connection

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 146 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Auxiliary audio connection (AUX-IN)*

Lift the AUX. cover fig. 120.

Insert the pin as far as possible (see Radio manual).

AUX RSE connection*

This connector may be used a

audio and video connector (re

details about the use of this a

Fig. 120 Auxiliary audio connection

Seats and stowage 147

Safety Fir Technical Data

the first aid box do not belong to the standard

ply with legal requirements.

f the contents of the first aid kit. You should

soon as possible after the shelf-life date of the

ries and emergency equipment see the instruc-

hed to the luggage compartment carpet by

not belong to the standard vehicle equipment.

t comply with legal requirements.

uisher is fully functional. The fire extinguisher

d regularly. The sticker on the fire extinguisher

te for checking.

ries and emergency equipment see the instruc-

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 147 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

MEDIA-IN* connector

For information concerning the use of this equipment, please see the Radio

handbook.

First-aid kit, warning triangle, fire extinguisher

Warning triangle and first-aid kit*

The warning triangle and the first aid kit may be located in the stowage

compartment on the floor of the boot, under the carpet.

The first aid kit may be located in the stowage compartment drawer on the

boot floor under the carpet or in the stowage compartment in the boot side

lining, depending on the version.

Note The warning triangle and

vehicle equipment.

The first aid kit must com

Observe the expiry date o

purchase a new first-aid kit as

first-aid kit has expired.

Before acquiring accesso

tions on page 208.

Fire extinguisher

The fire extinguisher* is attac

velcro.

Note The fire extinguisher does

The fire extinguisher mus

Ensure that the fire exting

should, therefore, be checke

will inform you of the next da

Before acquiring accesso

tions on page 208.

Fig. 122 Connection in central armrest compart- ment

Seats and stowage148

ld chafe against the wires of the heating

d cause damage.

f the rear side windows must not be covered as

ing extracted from the vehicle.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 148 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Luggage compartment

Stowing luggage

All luggage must be securely stowed.

Please observe the following points to ensure the vehicle handles

well at all times:

Distribute the load as evenly as possible.

Place heavy objects as far forward in the luggage compartment

as possible.

Secure luggage in the luggage compartment with suitable straps

on the fastening rings*.

WARNING

Loose luggage and other loose items in the vehicle can cause serious injuries.

Loose objects in the luggage compartment can suddenly move and change the way the vehicle handles.

During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, loose objects in the passenger compartment can be flung forward, injuring vehicle occupants.

Always store objects in the luggage compartment and secure with suit- able straps. This is especially important for heavy objects.

When you transport heavy objects, always take in account that a change in the centre of gravity can also cause changes in vehicle handling.

Please observe information on safe driving page 7, Safe driving.

Caution Hard objects on the shelf cou

element in the rear window an

Note The ventilation slots in front o

this would prevent stale air be

Seats and stowage 149

Safety Fir Technical Data

rtment cover

ull the cover back until you hear a click

PRESS, and the cover is retrieved auto-

mpartment cover

e direction of the arrow, lift the cover and

in reverse to fit it.

bjects on the open stowage compartment, the vehicle occupants in case of sudden

e, ensure that the stowage compartment tray is

mean that the rear stowage tray is not correctly

damaged.

remove the tray.

items of clothing on the luggage compartment

uced.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 149 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Luggage compartment cover Using the luggage compa

Use the handle to p

fig. 123.

Press the area marked

matically.

To remove the luggage co

Press the side pin in th

remove it fig. 124.

Follow the instructions

WARNING

Do not place heavy or hard o because they will endanger braking.

Caution Before closing the tailgat

correctly fitted.

An overloaded boot could

seated and it may be bent or

If the boot is overloaded,

Note Ensure that, when placing

cover, rear visibility is not red

Fig. 123 Using the luggage compartment cover

Fig. 124 Removing the luggage compartment cover

AA

Seats and stowage150

neath between the seatback and the

the allotments on the roof, first to the

fig. 125.

front anchor rings to tense the net

oints if you intend to carry loads on the roof:

gage racks and accessories approved by SEAT

w the assembly instructions included with the

careful to position front and rear luggage

e special housings on the longitudinal bars.

sition according to the direction of travel indi-

l. Not following these instructions may lead to

s.

A maximum load of 40 kg only is permitted for

ort bar, the load must be distributed evenly

ver, the maximum load permitted for the entire

tem) of 75 kg must not be exceeded nor should

be exceeded. See the chapter on Technical

r large objects on the roof, any change in the

to a change in the centre of gravity or an

st be taken into account. For this reason, a suit-

ust be used.

ith a sunroof*, ensure that it does not interfere

er system when opened.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 150 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Partition net*

The partition grille prevents loose objects in the luggage

compartment from being thrown forward into the passenger

compartment (e.g. under sudden braking).

Pull the net from under

folding tray and fit it to

right then to the left

Hook the belts into the

fig. 126.

Roof carrier*

Please observe the following p

For safety reasons, only lug

should be used.

It is essential that you follo

bars exactly, being especially

compartment cover bars on th

You must also respect their po

cated in the assembly manua

marks on the longitudinal bar

Distribute the load evenly.

each roof carrier system supp

along the entire length. Howe

roof (including the support sys

the total weight of the vehicle

Data.

When transporting heavy o

normal vehicle behaviour due

increased wind resistance mu

able speed and driving style m

For those vehicles fitted w

with the load on the roof carri

Fig. 125 Separation net

Fig. 126 Anchor rings for the separation net

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 151

Safety Fir Technical Data

is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is

ne has reached its operating temperature.

hed off automatically approximately 20 minutes

n also be switched off beforehand by pushing

vents strong odours in the outside air from

or example when passing through a tunnel or in

g. 127 On the dash panel there are the heating ntrols

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 151 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning

Heating

Controls and equipment

Using the controls fig. 127 and and the control you

can set the temperature, air distribution and the fan speed.

To switch a function on or off, press the appropriate button or

. When the function is activated, the display window in the

lower left of the button is lit.

Temperature

With the regulator the heating level is determined. The required tempera-

ture inside the vehicle cannot be lower than the ambient temperature.

Maximum heat output, which

only available when the engi

Rear window heater

This function will be switc

after being switched on. It ca

the button

Air recirculation mode

Air recirculation mode pre

entering the vehicle interior, f

queuing traffic .

Fi co

A1 A4 A5

A2

A3

A1

A2

A3

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning152

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 152 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

With low temperatures outside, the air recirculation increases the effective-

ness of the heating system by heating the air inside the passenger compart-

ment rather than the air from outside.

Air distribution

Control for setting the flow of air in the required direction.

Air distribution towards the windscreen. If the windscreen air output is

on and the air recirculation mode is pressed, this remains active. When the

recirculation mode is on, if the air distribution towards the windscreen mode

is selected, the recirculation mode is deactivated. For safety reasons, the air

recirculation mode should not be connected.

Air distribution to the upper body.

Air distribution to footwell

Air distribution to the windscreen and the foot well.

Blower

The air flow can be set at four speeds with the control . The air flow should

always be set at the lowest speed when driving slowly.

WARNING

For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensa- tion. This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including the anti-fog/defrost functions for the windscreens.

In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the outside enters the vehicle interior. The windows can quickly fog over if the heating is switched off. Therefore, never leave the air recirculation mode switched on for a long time (risk of accident).

Note Please observe the general notes page 161.

A4

A5

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 153

Safety Fir Technical Data

w heating. The heating will be switched off auto-

20 minutes after switching on. It can also be

by pushing the button.

tion mode page 155

page 154

four speed settings for the air flow. The air flow

the lowest speed when driving slowly.

must be clear of ice, snow, and condensation. ood visibility. Please familiarise yourself with heating and ventilation system, including the r the windscreens.

g. 128 On the dash panel: Climatic controls

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 153 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Climatic*

Control switches

The climatic or semi-automatic air conditioning system only works

when the engine is running and the turbine is switched on.

Using the controls fig. 128 and and the control you

can set the temperature, air distribution and the turbine speed.

To switch a function on or off, press the appropriate button ,

or . When the function is activated, the display window in

the lower corner of the button is lit.

Temperature selector page 154

Button Heating, ventilation and air-conditioning system on/off

page 154

Button Rear windo

matically approximately

switched off beforehand

Button Air recircula

Air distribution control Blower switch. There are

should always be set at

WARNING

For road safety all windows This is essential to ensure g the correct operation of the anti-fog/defrost functions fo

Fi

A1 A5 A6

A2

A3 A4

A1

A2 AC

A3

A4

A5

A6

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning154

tioning using the button page 153,

lector anti-clockwise until the desired

ed.

to one of the settings 1-4.

. 129 On the dash panel: Climatic controls

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 154 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Note Please observe the general notes page 161.

Heating and cooling the interior

Interior heating

Turn the temperature selector fig. 129 clockwise to select

the required temperature.

Turn the blower switch to one of the settings 1-4.

Set the air distribution control to the air flow configuration

desired: (towards the windscreen), (towards the chest),

(towards the footwell) and (towards the windscreen and

footwell areas).

Interior cooling

Switch on the air condi

fig. 128 .

Turn the temperature se

cooling output is reach

Turn the blower switch

Fig

A1

AC

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 155

Safety Fir Technical Data

ants and prevents misting of the windows when

igh.

cannot be switched on this may be caused by

nning.

f.

is below +3C.

m compressor has been temporarily switched

nt temperature is too high.

is faulty.

le. Have the air conditioning checked by a qual-

e.

g. 130 On the dash panel: Climatic controls

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 155 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Use the air distribution control to guide the flow of air in the

required direction: (to the windscreen), (to the upper

body), (to the foot well) and (to the windscreen and to the

foot well).

Heating

Maximum heat output, which is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is

only available when the engine has reached its operating temperature.

Air conditioner

When the air conditioning system is switched on, not only the temperature,

but also the air humidity in the vehicle interior is reduced. This improves

comfort for the vehicle occup

the ambient air humidity is h

If the air conditioning system

the following reasons:

The engine may not be ru

The blower is switched of

The outside temperature

The air conditioning syste

off because the engine coola

The air conditioning fuse

Another fault in the vehic

ified workshop.

Air recirculation mode

Air recirculation mode prevents fumes or unpleasant smells from coming from the outsid

Fi

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning156

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 156 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Air recirculation mode page 155, fig. 130 prevents strong odours in

the outside air from entering the vehicle interior, for example when passing

through a tunnel or in queuing traffic.

With low temperatures outside, the air recirculation increases the effective-

ness of the heating system by warming the air inside the passenger compart-

ment rather than the cold air from outside.

With high ambient temperatures, the air recirculation increases the effective-

ness of the air conditioning system by cooling the air inside the passenger

compartment rather than the ambient air.

If the windscreen air output is on and the air recirculation mode is pressed,

this remains active. When the recirculation mode is on, if the air distribution

towards the windscreen mode is selected, the recirculation mode is deacti-

vated. For safety reasons, the air recirculation mode should not be

connected.

WARNING

In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the outside enters the vehicle interior. If the air conditioning system is switched off, the windows can quickly mist over. Therefore, never leave the air recirculation mode switched on for a long time (risk of accident).

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 157

Safety Fir Technical Data

ted separately for the left and right sides of the

ction for the windscreen. The air drawn in from

ected at the windscreen. The air recirculation

l be switched off as soon as the defrost function

ratures over 3C, the air conditioning system will

ically and the blower speed will be increased by

he air. The button is lit in yellow and the symbol

avigator display.

distribution

istribution

air distribution

g. 131 On the dash panel: 2C Climatronic controls

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 157 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

2C-Climatronic*

Control switches

The controls allow separate adjustment of air conditioning settings for the left and right.

The air conditioning system controls the temperature when the

engine is running and the blower is switched on.

Turn the temperature control knobs fig. 131 or in order

to adjust the temperature on the left hand side or the right hand

side respectively.

The functions will be switched on when its buttons are pressed.

When these functions are activated, they are indicated on the

radio display. In addition, all these functions are lit with LEDs.

Press the button again to switch off the function.

The temperature can be adjus

vehicle interior.

Button defrost fun

outside the vehicle is dir

mode, if switched on, wil

is switched on. At tempe

be switched on automat

one level in order to dry t

appears on the radio or n

Button Upward air

Button Central air d

Button Downward

Fi

A9 A14 A1

A2

A3

A4

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning158

ormation

limatronic system can be displayed

d navigation screen mounted at

Fig. 132 Navigation display with information about the Climatronic

Fig. 133 Radio display with information about Climatronic

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 158 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Button Manual air recirculation mode.

Button Rear window heating. The heating will be switched off auto-

matically approximately 20 minutes after switching on. However, it may

be turned off by pushing the button. The button lights up yellow and the

symbol appears in the display.

Button Automatic temperature, ventilation and air distribution

control page 159

button - Dual zone synchroniser

Button Switches the 2C-Climatronic on and off page 160

Blower control page 160

button Switches heating, ventilation and air-conditioning system

on

WARNING

For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensation. This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including the anti-fog/defrost functions for the windscreens.

Note Please observe the general notes page 161.

Viewing Climatronic inf

Information about the C

on the radio or radio an

factory.

A5

A6

A7 AUTO

A8 DUAL

A9 OFF

A10

A11 AC

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 159

Safety Fir Technical Data

ightly higher or lower depending on the ambient

tant temperature. The temperature of the air

lower speed and the air distribution are regu-

em also considers the sunlight radiation, so

adjustment. Therefore, automatic mode almost

fort for the vehicle occupants throughout the

off whenever an adjustment is made using the

n, air flow or or the air recirculation button

tinue to be regulated within the parameters

r.

es:

calculates the air flow for two people.

calculates the air flow for more than two

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 159 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

The LEDs on the Climatronic controls indicate that the selected function has

been activated.

In addition, the radio or radio and navigation displays mounted at factory

briefly display the current settings of the Climatronic if any are modified.

The symbols used on the radio or radio and navigation displays are the same

as the symbols used for the Climatronic controls.

Automatic mode

In automatic mode air temperature, air flow and distribution

are automatically regulated so that a specified temperature is

attained as quickly as possible and then maintained.

The temperature can be adjusted separately for the left and right

sides of the vehicle interior.

Switching on automatic mode

Press the page 157, fig. 131 button. AUTO High is

shown on the radio display (high fan speed).

Press the button again page 157, fig. 131. AUTO Low

is shown on the radio display (low fan speed).

Depending upon the version and finish, the vehicle may include:

When a temperature of 22C (72F) is set in automatic mode a comfortable

interior climate is quickly reached. Therefore, we recommend you not to

change this adjustment, except as necessary to suit individual preferences or

particular circumstances. The compartment temperature can be set between

+18C (64F) and +26C (80F). These are approximate temperatures and the

actual temperature may be sl

conditions.

Climatronic maintains a cons

supplied to the interior, the b

lated automatically. The syst

there is no need for manual re

always provides the best com

year.

Automatic mode is switched

buttons for the air distributio

. The temperature will con

manually selected by the use

Note There are two automatic mod

Automatic mode LO: This

Automatic mode HI: This

people.

AUTO

AUTO

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning160

80F) is selected, the display switches to HI In

maximum heating output and the temperature

reely using the control . Always have the

g to ensure a constant flow of fresh air into the

to the minimum -1, turns the Climatronic off.

using the buttons , and . It is also

me of the air vents separately.

system on and off

D lit), the heating, ventilation and air condi-

. 134 On the instrument panel: 2C Climatronic trols.

A10

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 160 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Manual mode

In manual mode you can adjust the air temperature, air flow and distribution as required.

Switching on manual mode

To enter manual mode, press one of the buttons fig. 134 to

or press the air flow control . The selected function is

shown on the radio or navigator display.

Temperature

There are separate temperature selectors for the left and right sides of the

vehicle interior. The selected temperature is displayed above the selector.

The compartment temperature can be set between +18C (64F) and +26C

(80F). These are approximate temperatures and the actual temperature may

be slightly higher or lower depending on the ambient conditions.

If a temperature below 18C (64F) is selected, the display switches to LO In

this setting the system runs at maximum cooling output and the temperature

is not regulated.

If a temperature above 26C (

this setting the system runs at

is not regulated.

Blower

The air flow may be adjusted f

blower running at a low settin

vehicle. Pushing the button

Air distribution

The air distribution is adjusted

possible to open and close so

Switching the air conditioning

When the button is on (LE

tioning system is on.

Fig con

A1

A5 A10

AC

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 161

Safety Fir Technical Data

e, the air recirculation increases the effective-

y heating the air inside the passenger compart-

outside.

res, the air recirculation increases the effective-

ystem by cooling the air inside the passenger

ambient air.

s on and the air recirculation mode is pressed,

recirculation mode is on, if the air distribution

e is selected, the recirculation mode is deacti-

air recirculation mode should not be

cold air from the outside enters the vehicle ng system is switched off, the windows can , never leave the air recirculation mode (risk of accident).

d particle filter and active carbon filter) serves

s in the ambient air, including dust and pollen.

m to work with maximum efficiency, the pollen

intervals specified in the Service Schedule.

maturely due to use in areas reaching very high

lter must be changed more frequently than

le.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 161 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

When the button is off (LED off), the heating, ventilation and air condi-

tioning system is off.

When the button is off, the heating, ventilation and air conditioning

system is switched off to save fuel. The temperature continues to self-regu-

late. The set temperature can then only be reached if it is higher than the

ambient temperature.

Driver and passenger temperature control

The button controls the synchronisation of the 2 Climatronic climate

zones.

When the button is on (LED lit), the climate zone of the Climatronic is

personalised, for example: Driver side temperature 22C and passenger side

temperature 23C.

When the button is off (LED off), the climate zone of the Climatronic is

synchronised, for example: Driver side temperature 22C and passenger side

temperature 22C.

If the button is off and the passenger side temperature is changed, the

function is automatically activated.

Air recirculation mode

Air recirculation mode prevents fumes or unpleasant smells

from coming from the outside.

Press the button page 160, fig. 134 to switch air recir-

culation mode on or off. It is switched on if the following symbol

appears in the display .

Air recirculation mode prevents strong odours in the ambient air from

entering the vehicle interior, for example when passing through a tunnel or in

a traffic jam.

With low temperatures outsid

ness of the heating system b

ment rather than the air from

With high ambient temperatu

ness of the air conditioning s

compartment rather than the

If the windscreen air output i

this remains active. When the

towards the windscreen mod

vated. For safety reasons, the

connected.

WARNING

In air recirculation mode, no interior. If the air conditioni quickly mist over. Therefore switched on for a long time

General notes

The impurity filter

The impurity filter (a combine

as a barrier against impuritie

For the air conditioning syste

filter must be replaced at the

If the filter loses efficiency pre

pollution levels, the pollen fi

stated in the Service Schedu

AC

AC

DUAL

DUAL

DUAL

DUAL

A2

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning162

front of the windscreen free of snow, ice and

cooling are not impaired, and to prevent the

s through the passenger compartment and is

r this purpose. Therefore, do not cover these

other objects.

m operates most effectively with the windows

osed. However, if the vehicle has been over-

an be cooled quicklier by opening the windows

irculation mode is on, as smoke drawn into the

s a residue on the evaporator, producing a

he air conditioning at least once a month, to

nd prevent leaks. If a decrease in the cooling

rised Service Centre should be consulted to

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 162 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Air conditioner

When the air conditioning system is switched on, not only the temperature,

but also the air humidity in the vehicle interior is reduced. This improves

comfort for the vehicle occupants and prevents misting of the windows when

the ambient air humidity is high.

If the air conditioning system cannot be switched on this may be caused by

the following reasons:

The engine is not running.

The button is disconnected.

The outside temperature is below +3C.

The air conditioning system compressor has been temporarily switched

off because the engine coolant temperature is too high.

The air conditioning fuse is faulty.

Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air conditioning checked by a qual-

ified workshop.

Caution If you suspect that the air conditioning is damaged, switch it off with the

button to prevent further damage and have it checked by a qualified

workshop.

Repairs to the air conditioning system require specialist knowledge and

special tools. Therefore, we recommend you to take the vehicle to a qualified

workshop.

Note If the humidity and temperature outside the vehicle are high, condensa- tion can drip off the evaporator in the cooling system and so forming a puddle

underneath the vehicle. This is completely normal and there is no need to

suspect a leak.

Keep the air intake slots in

leaves to ensure heating and

windows from misting over.

The air from the vents flow

extracted by slots designed fo

slots with items of clothing or

The air conditioning syste

and the sliding/tilting roof* cl

heated by sun, the air inside c

for a short time.

Do not smoke while air rec

air conditioning system leave

permanent unpleasant odour.

It is advisable to connect t

lubricate the system gaskets a

capacity is detected, an Autho

check the system.

AC

AC

Driving 163

Safety Fir Technical Data

to the correct position.

e steering column fig. 135 down

eel in this way until the correct position is

again firmly .

ring column adjustment function and an incor- ult in serious injury.

teering column should be adjusted only when

Fig. 136 Proper sitting position for driver

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 163 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Driving

Address

Adjusting the steering wheel position

The height and reach of the steering wheel can be freely

adjusted to suit the driver.

Adjust the driver seat

Push the lever under th

.

Adjust the steering wh

set fig. 136.

Then push the lever up

WARNING

Incorrect use of the stee rect seating position can res

To avoid accidents, the s the vehicle is stationary.

Fig. 135 Adjusting the steering wheel position

Driving164

programme (ESP)*

safer in certain situations.

ogram (ESP) contains the electronic differential

trol system (TCS). The ESP function works

arning lamps will light up if the ESP or ABS

lly when the engine is started.

annot be switched off. With the ESP switch it is

f.

hen in cases where wheel sliding is desirable.

ains,

Fig. 137 Detail of the centre console: ESP button

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 164 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Adjust the driver seat or steering wheel so that there is a distance of at least 25 cm between the steering wheel and your chest page 163, fig. 136. If you fail to observe the minimum distance, the airbag will not protect you. Risk of fatal injury.

If your physical constitution does not allow you to mantain the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact an Authorised Service Centre. The Authorised Service Centre will help you to decide if special specific modifi- cations are necessary.

If you adjust the steering wheel so that it points towards your face, the driver airbag will not protect you properly in the event of an accident. Make sure that the steering wheel points towards your chest.

When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel, or on the inside of the rim). In such cases, you could receive severe injuries to the arms, hands and head.

Safety

Electronic stabilisation

ESP helps make driving

The Electronic Stabilisation Pr

lock (EDL) and the traction con

together with the ABS. Both w

systems are faulty.

The ESP is started automatica

The ESP is always active, and c

only possible to switch TCS of

The TCS can be deactivated w

For example:

When driving with snow ch

WARNING (continued)

Driving 165

Safety Fir Technical Data

key

g lock

e ignition and the engine are OFF and the

te without the ignition key, turn the steering

dible sound. You should always lock the

ve your vehicle. This will help prevent vehicle

glow plug system on

sition and release it. If the key cannot be turned

osition to position , move the steering

loosens up.

Fig. 138 Ignition key positions

A0

A1

A0 A12

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 165 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

when driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces,

when rocking the vehicle backwards and forwards to free it from mud, for

example.

Next, the button should be pressed to reactivate the TCS.

When does the warning light switch on or flash?

On switching the ignition on, it lights up for about two seconds to carry

out a function control.

The warning lamp will start flashing when the vehicle is moving if the ESP

or the TCS is activated. The warning lamp will light up slowly if the TCS is

switched off.

It will light up continuously if there is a malfunction in the ESP.

WARNING

The electronic stabilisation programme (ESP) cannot defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.

Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.

Please refer to the corresponding warning notes on ESP in page 183, Intelligent technology.

Ignition lock

Position of the ignition

Ignition switched off, steerin

In this position fig. 138 th

steering may be locked.

For the Steering lock to opera

wheel until it locks with an au

steering wheel when you lea

theft .

Switching the ignition or the

Turn the ignition key to this po

or it is difficult to turn from p

wheel back and forth until it

Driving166

ted again automatically as soon as you pull the

using a genuine SEAT key with its correct code.

icle is ensured if genuine SEAT keys are used.

ping the engine

tarted using a genuine SEAT key with

the neutral position and depress the

and hold it in this position for the starter

the starting page 165 position.

y as soon as the engine starts; the starter

with the engine.

e, you may need to slightly press down the

ine, it may be a little noisy for the first few

built up in the hydraulic valve compensators.

ause for concern.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 166 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Starting

The engine is started when the key is in this position. Electrical components

with a high power consumption are switched off temporarily.

Every time the vehicle is started again, the ignition key must be turned to

position . The repetitive start prevention lock of the ignition prevents

possible damage to the starter motor if the engine is already running.

WARNING

The ignition key must NOT be removed from the lock until the vehicle comes to a standstill. Otherwise, the steering could be immediately blocked- Risk of accident!

Always remove the key from the ignition lock when leaving the vehicle, even for a short period. This is especially important if children or disabled people are left alone in the vehicle. They could accidentally start the engine or work electrical equipment such as the electric windows, conse- quently resulting in an accident.

Unsupervised use of the keys could start the engine or any electrical system, such as the electric window. This could result in serious injury.

Caution The starter motor will only work when the engine is stopped (ignition key

position ).

Electronic immobiliser

The immobiliser prevents unauthorised persons from driving

the vehicle.

Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates the electronic immobiliser auto-

matically when the key is inserted into the ignition.

The immobiliser will be activa

key out of the ignition lock.

The engine can only be started

Note A perfect operation of the veh

Starting and stop

Starting petrol engines

The engine can only be s

its correct code.

Move the gear lever to

clutch pedal thoroughly

to turn the engine on.

Turn the ignition key to

Let go of the ignition ke

motor must not run on

After starting a very hot engin

accelerator.

When starting a very cold eng

seconds until oil pressure has

This is quite normal, and no c

A2

A0

A2

Driving 167

Safety Fir Technical Data

started using a genuine SEAT key with

the neutral position and depress the

ly and hold it in this position for the starter

the starting position.

position page 165, fig. 138 . The

ll light for engine pre-heating.

p turns off, turn the key to position to

t press the accelerator.

ey as soon as the engine starts, the starter

wed to run on with the engine.

ine, it may be a little noisy for the first few

s built up in the hydraulic valve compensators.

cause for concern.

the engine, see page 262.

sel engine

rging of the battery, do not use any other major

e glow plugs are pre-heating.

e glow plug warning lamp page 76 goes out.

fuel tank has been completely run dry

pletely run dry, it may take longer than normal

e engine after refuelling with diesel fuel. This is

minate air first.

A1

A2

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 167 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

If the engine does not start immediately, switch the starter off after

10 seconds and try again after half a minute. If the engine still does not start,

the fuel pump fuse should be checked page 249, Fuses.

WARNING

Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of consciousness. It can also cause death.

Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.

Never use cold start sprays, they could explode or cause the engine to run at high revs. Risk of injury.

Caution When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at

full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.

The vehicle should not be pushed or towed more than 50 metres to start

the engine. Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.

Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle in order to start it, you

should first try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Note and follow

the instructions page 262, Jump-starting.

For the sake of the environment Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary.

You should drive off as soon as you start the engine. This helps the engine

reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions.

Starting diesel engines

The engine can only be

its correct code.

Move the gear lever to

clutch pedal thorough

to turn the engine on.

Turn the ignition key to

Turn the ignition key to

indication lamp wi

When the warning lam

start the engine. Do no

Let go of the ignition k

motor must not be allo

When starting a very cold eng

seconds until oil pressure ha

This is quite normal, and no

If there are problems starting

Glow plug system for the die

To avoid unnecessary discha

electrical equipment while th

Start the engine as soon as th

Starting the engine after the

If the fuel tank has been com

(up to one minute) to start th

because the system must eli

Driving168

, the radiator fan may run on for up to 10

t the fan turns itself on once more if the coolant

the heat accumulated in the engine compart-

xposure to solar radiation.

ff until the vehicle is completely stationary.

ly when the engine is running. With the rength is needed to brake. As normal brake ed, risk of accidents and serious injury may

mmediately blocked once the key is removed hicle cannot be steered. Risk of accident.

hard for a long period, the engine could over-

isk of engine damage. For this reason, you

rox. 2 minutes before you switch it off.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 168 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

WARNING

Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of consciousness. It can also cause death.

Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.

Never use cold start sprays, they could explode or cause the engine to run at high revs. Risk of injury.

Caution When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at

full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.

The vehicle should not be pushed or towed more than 50 metres to start

the engine. Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.

Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle in order to start it, you

should first try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Note and follow

the instructions page 262, Jump-starting.

For the sake of the environment Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary.

You should drive off as soon as you start the engine. This helps the engine

reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions.

Switching the engine off

Stop the engine.

Turn the ignition key to position page 165, fig. 138 .

After switching the engine off

minutes. It is also possible tha

temperature increases due to

ment or due to its prolonged e

WARNING

Never switch the engine o

The brake servo works on engine switched off, more st operation cannot be perform exist.

The steering lock can be i from the ignition lock. The ve

Caution If the engine has been driven

heat when it is switched off. R

should idle the engine for app

A0

Driving 169

Safety Fir Technical Data

r

tationary with the engine idling. Press the

ly.

to neutral and push the lever downwards.

the left, and then into the reverse position

k.

engaged when the vehicle is stationary. When

fore engaging this gear, wait about 6 seconds

thoroughly in order to protect the gearbox.

en the reverse gear is selected and the ignition

ing, the vehicle will start to move as soon as a tch released.

gear when the vehicle is in motion. Risk of acci-

the gear rest when driving. The pressure of your

wear on the selector forks in the gearbox.

should always depress the clutch down fully to

damage.

e clutch uphills. This causes premature wear

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 169 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Manual gearbox

Driving a car with a manual gearbox

Engaging the reverse gea

The vehicle should be s

clutch down thorough

Place the gear lever in

Slide the gear lever to

shown on the gear stic

The reverse gear can only be

the engine is running and be

with the clutch pressed down

The reverse lights light up wh

is on.

WARNING

When the engine is runn gear is engaged and the clu

Never select the reverse dent.

Note Do not rest your hand on

hand could cause premature

When changing gear, you

avoid unnecessary wear and

Do not hold the car on th

and damage to the clutch.

Fig. 139 Detail of the centre console: gear shift pattern of a 5-speed manual gearbox

Fig. 140 Detail of the centre console: gear shift pattern of a 6-speed manual gearbox

Driving170

/ direct shift gearbox has three

gramme

s a higher gear earlier rather than remain

to position D to drive forwards

to position R to reverse. This position is

es for reversing.

mme

ion S.

me, S, the program is designed for a sports

ich changes up at higher engine speeds to use

Fig. 142 Program selec- tion

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 170 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Automatic gearbox* / DSG automatic gearbox*

Selector lever positions

Selector lever positions indicated on the cover

P Parking position (lever locked).

R Reverse position.

N Neutral position (lever locked). This position is similar to the neutral

position for manual gearboxes).

D Drive position (economic driving programme).

S Sports driving position.

+/- Tiptronic driving position (this programme is similar to the operation of

a manual gearbox).

Driving programmes

The automatic gearbox

programmes.

Selecting the economy pro

This programme select

in a lower gear.

Put the selector lever in

Put the selector lever in

shared by all programm

Selecting the sport progra

Move the lever to posit

If you select the sport program

mode, that is, a programme wh

Fig. 141 Centre console: selector lever for auto- matic gearbox / direct shift gearbox DSG

Driving 171

Safety Fir Technical Data

brake pedal, at the same time press the

lever.

en the vehicle is stopped or at a speed of less

s, the lock is automatically released in position

(e.g. from R to D) the lever will not lock. If the

N more than one second then it is locked. With

is prevented passing from P and N to any other

e brake pedal.

t in the position P in order to remove the key.

tic gearbox* / DSG automatic

ears are automatically engaged.

Fig. 144 Driving

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 171 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

the full power of the engine. This programme is not recommended for use on

the motorway or in the city.

Selecting the manual programme (tiptronic)

This programme allows driving similar to a manual gearbox.

This programme may be accessed using the selector lever or from the

steering wheel controls when this option is fitted page 173.

Selector lever locking

The selector lever lock prevents gears from being engaged

inadvertently, which would cause the vehicle to move.

Releasing the selector lever lock

Start the vehicle.

Press and release the

button on the selector

The lock is only activated wh

than 5 km/h. At higher speed

N.

For rapid changes of position

lever remains in the position

the automatic lock, the lever

gear without first pressing th

The selector lever must be pu

Driving with an automa gearbox*

The drive and reverse g

Fig. 143 Deactivating the lock

Driving172

cases, using the foot brake to prevent

hicle using another forward gear (engine

, release the brake and accelerate.

ower the gear must be for effective engine

ar is used on a very steep gradient, the engine

icle accelerates. So that the engine speed does

rbox changes to the next highest gear. Depress

selector lever to the Tiptronic gate to return to

ave the vehicle while the engine is running or ny reason you must leave the vehicle with the ndbrake and move the selector lever to posi-

ng and the positions D, S or R are selected, it le with the foot brake because the vehicle will

anging the position of the selector lever (risk

ever be moved into the positions R or P while

gradient, reduce speed and use the Tiptronic gear.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 172 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Driving

Press and hold the foot brake.

Press the button on the selector lever knob (on the left)

page 171, fig. 144.

Select a gear for driving (R, D or S).

Release the button and wait a few seconds for the gear to

engage, a light jerk will be felt.

Release the brake and accelerate.

Short stop

Hold the vehicle stationary with the brake pressed down (for

example at traffic lights). The selector lever does not need to be

put into the positions P or N for this.

Do not press the accelerator.

Parking the vehicle

Press the foot brake and hold to bring the vehicle to a stop.

Apply the handbrake firmly.

Press in the button on the selector lever knob, move the lever to

the position P and release the button.

Driving slowly

Move the selector lever to the position D and press to the right to

put the lever into Tiptronic mode.

Press the gear lever towards (-) to select a lower gear.

Hill stop

Hold the vehicle, in all

rolling back.

Do not try to slow the ve

braking).

Descending gradients

With the gear engaged

The steeper the gradient the l

braking. For example, if 3rd ge

braking is insufficient and veh

not become excessive, the gea

the brake pedal and move the

3rd gear.

WARNING

The driver should never le with any gear selected. If for a engine running, apply the ha tion P.

When the engine is runni is necessary to hold the vehic creep at a low speed.

Never accelerate while ch of an accident).

The selector lever must n moving (risk of an accident).

Before descending a steep programme to select a lower

Driving 173

Safety Fir Technical Data

r system

lows the driver to manually select

Fig. 145 Changing gear with Tiptronic

Fig. 146 Steering wheel with levers for automatic gearbox

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 173 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

If you must stop on a hill, always hold the vehicle using the footbrake to avoid rolling back.

The footbrake must not be held for a long period of time, not even lightly; continuous braking will cause overheating of the brakes and a reduction or even a loss of braking power and a significant increase in braking distances.

Never allow the vehicle to coast down a gradient with the selector lever in positions N or D, even when the engine is not running. For descents, the use of the Tiptronic programme is recommended to keep the speed reduced.

Caution Never use the automatic gearbox to hold the vehicle stationary on a hill,

even for short periods, as this may overheat the gearbox and cause damage.

Apply the handbrake or depress the foot brake to hold the vehicle in position.

If the vehicle is allowed to roll with the engine stopped but the selector in

position N then the gearbox may be damaged because it will not be

lubricated.

Using the Tiptronic gea

The Tiptronic system al

gears

WARNING (continued)

Driving174

e steering wheel can operate with the gear stick

ehicle in motion.

e applied firmly to prevent the

y rolling away.

e when you leave your vehicle and when

Fig. 147 Handbrake between the front seats

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 174 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

General information about driving in Tiptronic mode

Changing gear with the gear stick

Put the lever in position D and press towards the right to enter

the Tiptronic gate page 173, fig. 145.

Press the gear lever forwards (+) to select a higher gear.

Press the gear lever back (-) to select a lower gear.

Changing gear with the steering wheel levers

Press the right paddle towards the steering wheel to change

up page 173, fig. 146.

Press the left paddle towards the steering wheel to change

down page 173, fig. 146.

Using the levers on the steering wheel, you can access manual driving mode

regardless of the driving mode pre-selected.

General information about driving in Tiptronic mode

When accelerating, the automatic gearbox / direct shift gearbox goes into a

higher gear a little before it reaches the maximum permitted revolutions.

If a lower gear is selected, the automatic gearbox / direct shift gearbox does

not change down until the point is reached where the engine could no longer

overrev.

If the Tiptronic is selected whilst the vehicle is in motion and the automatic

gearbox / direct shift gearbox is in 3rd gear in selector lever position D, the

Tiptronic will then also be in 3rd gear.

Note The gearbox controls on th

in any position and with the v

Handbrake

Using the handbrake

The handbrake should b

vehicle from accidentall

Always apply the handbrak

you park.

A+

A

Driving 175

Safety Fir Technical Data

always be firmly applied when the

points when parking the vehicle:

top the vehicle.

lso be selected.

nd remove the key from the ignition lock.

l slightly to engage the steering lock.

ys with you when you leave the vehicle

the vehicle on gradients:

at the vehicle rolls against the kerb if it started

ing downhill, turn the front wheels so that they

cing uphill, turn the front wheels so that they

mal by applying the handbrake firmly and

the risk of injury when you leave your vehicle

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 175 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Applying the handbrake

Pull the handbrake lever up firmly page 174, fig. 147.

Releasing the handbrake

Pull the lever up slightly and press the release knob in the direc-

tion of the arrow page 174, fig. 147 and guide the handbrake

lever down fully .

Always apply the handbrake firmly. This prevents you driving with the hand-

brake applied .

The handbrake warning lamp lights up when the handbrake is applied

and the ignition switched on. The warning turns off when the handbrake is

released.

If you drive faster than 6 km/h with the handbrake on, the following

message* will appear on the instrument panel display: HANDBRAKE ON. Also,

an audible warning is given.

WARNING

Never use the handbrake to stop the vehicle when it is in motion. The braking distance is considerably longer, because braking is only applied to the rear wheels. Risk of accident!

If it is only partially released, this will cause rear brakes overheating, which can impair the function of the brake system and could lead to an acci- dent. This also causes premature wear on the rear brake pads.

Caution Always apply the handbrake before you leave the vehicle. The first gear

should also be selected.

Parking

The handbrake should

vehicle is parked.

Always note the following

Use the foot brake to s

Apply the handbrake.

The first gear should a

Switch the engine off a

Turn the steering whee

Always take you car ke

.

Additional notes on parking

Turn the steering wheel so th

to roll.

If the vehicle is parked fac

point towards the kerb.

If the vehicle is parked fa

point away from the kerb.

Secure the vehicle as nor

engaging first gear.

WARNING

Take measures to reduce unattended.

Driving176

ss the brake pedal or use the hand brake

raffic uphill, if you want to prevent the vehicle when starting off, hold the brake pedal down ting off.

alist workshop can tell you if your vehicle is

id system*

to help you when parking or manoeuvring in

e equipment fitted on your vehicle.

es an acoustic warning if there are any obsta-

T parking system* plus warns you acoustically

les in front of and behind the vehicle.

aid works properly, the sensors must be kept

.

em.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 176 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Never park where the hot exhaust system could ignite inflammable materials, such as dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc.

Never allow vehicle occupants to remain in the vehicle when it is locked. They would be unable to open the vehicle from the inside, and could become trapped in the vehicle in an emergency. In the event of an emergency, locked doors will delay assistance to occupants.

Never leave children alone in the vehicle. They could set the vehicle in motion, for example, by releasing the handbrake or the gear lever / selector lever.

Depending on weather conditions, it may become extremely hot or cold inside the vehicle. This can be fatal.

Starting on an uphill*

This function is only included in vehicles fitted with ESP.

This device helps when starting uphill.

These are the basic operation conditions: doors closed, brake pedal pressed

down and vehicle in neutral. The system gets activated on engaging gear.

After removing your foot from the brake pedal, the braking force is maintained

for a few seconds to prevent the vehicle from moving backward when putting

into gear. This short space of time is enough to start the vehicle with ease.

This system also works when reversing uphill.

WARNING

If you do not start the vehicle immediately after taking your foot off the brake pedal, the vehicle may start to roll back under certain conditions. Depress the brake pedal or use the hand brake immediately.

If the engine stalls, depre immediately.

When following a line of t from rolling back accidentally for a few seconds before star

Note The Official Service or a speci

equipped with this system.

Acoustic parking a

General notes

Various systems are available

tight spaces, depending on th

The SEAT parking system* giv

cles behind your car.

When you are parking, the SEA

and optically19) about obstac

Note To ensure the acoustic parking

clean and free of snow and ice

WARNING (continued)

19) Vehicles with a navigation syst

WARNING (continued)

Driving 177

Safety Fir Technical Data

s detected by the system may no longer be

he car moves closer, so the system will not give

inds of obstacles (such as wire fences, chains,

raw bars, etc) may not always be detected by the

amage the vehicle in such cases.

owing page 179.

lus*: Description

s is an acoustic and optical parking

nt and rear bumpers. When the sensors detect

y acoustic and optical signals. The measuring

t about:

ith increasing frequency as you approach the

less than approx. 0.30 m away from the

ill sound continuously. Stop moving immedi-

e 0,90

ntre 1,20

e 0,60

ntre 1,60

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 177 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Seat Parking System: Description

The parking system is an acoustic parking aid.

Sensors are located in the rear bumper. When the sensors detect an obstacle,

you are alerted by acoustic signals (beeps). The measuring range of the

sensors starts at about:

The acoustic signals sound with increasing frequency as you approach the

obstacle. When the vehicle is less than approx. 0.30 m away from the

obstacle, the warning tone will sound continuously. Do not drive on!

The volume of the warning beeps will be gradually reduced after about 4

seconds if the vehicle remains at a constant distance from a detected

obstacle (it does not affect the permanent acoustic signal).

The parking aid is switched on automatically when reverse gear is engaged.

You will hear a brief acknowledgement tone.

WARNING

The parking aid is not a replacement for driver awareness. The driver is personally responsible for safe parking and other manoeuvres.

The sensors have blind spots in which obstacles are not registered. Always look out for small children and animals because the system will not always detect them. Always pay attention when reversing to avoid acci- dents.

Always keep a close eye on the area around the vehicle and make full use of the rear-view mirrors.

Caution Please note that low obstacle

registered by the sensors as t

any further warning. Certain k

thin painted posts or trailer d

system, so take care not to d

Note Please refer to the notes on t

Seat Parking system p

The parking system plu

aid.

Sensors are located in the fro

an obstacle, you are alerted b

range of the sensors starts a

The acoustic signals sound w

obstacle. When the vehicle is

obstacle, the warning tone w

ately!

Rear Side 0,60

Centre 1,60

Front Sid

Ce

Rear Sid

Ce

Driving178

ay

t and behind and an acoustic signal enable the

ith respect to an obstacle. The ambar colour

scontinuous beep indicate the presence of an

loser to the obstacle, the colour of the segment

tic signal beeps continuously. When the penul-

this means that the vehicle has reached the

mediately!

placement for driver awareness. The driver is fe parking and other manoeuvres.

pots in which obstacles are not registered. dren and animals because the system will not pay attention when reversing to avoid acci-

n the area around the vehicle and make full

s detected by the system may no longer be

e car moves closer, so the system will not give

inds of obstacles (such as wire fences, chains,

w bars, etc) may not always be detected by the

mage the vehicle in such cases.

n towing page 179.

e picture display.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 178 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

The volume of the warning beeps will be gradually reduced after about 4

seconds if the vehicle remains at a constant distance from a detected

obstacle (it does not affect the permanent acoustic signal).

Enabling/Disabling

Enabling

Connects the radionavigator.

Press the switch on the central console fig. 148 or on the

gear selector gate. You will hear a brief acknowledgement tone

and the LED on the switch will light up.

Disabling

Drive forwards faster than 10 km/h or

Press the switch or

Switch the ignition off.

Segments in the optical displ

Some colour segments in fron

driver to assess the distance w

segments combined with a di

obstacle. As the vehicle gets c

changes to red and the acous

timate segment is displayed,

collision zone. Stop moving im

WARNING

The parking aid is not a re personally responsible for sa

The sensors have blind s Always look out for small chil always detect them. Always dents.

Always keep a close eye o use of the rear-view mirrors.

Caution Please note that low obstacle

registered by the sensors as th

any further warning. Certain k

thin painted posts or trailer dra

system, so take care not to da

Note Please refer to the notes o

There is a slight delay in th

Fig. 148 Centre console: Switch for parking aid

Driving 179

Safety Fir Technical Data

tem (CCS)*

m is able to maintain the set speed in

30 km/h to 180 km/h.

een saved, you may take your foot off the accel-

the cruise control system if it is not possible

uise control system should not be used in th bends or where roads are in bad conditions ippings, slippery surfaces, snow). Risk of acci-

ff when finish to use it in order to avoid an

et speed which is too high for the current road, . Risk of accident.

ntain a constant speed when descending down-

te due to its own weight. Use the foot brake to

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 179 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Towing bracket

In towing mode, the rear parking sensors are not enabled when you select

reverse gear or press the switch . This function may not be guaranteed on

towing brackets that are not factory fitted. This results in the following restric-

tions:

SEAT parking system*

No warning is given.

SEAT parking system plus*

There is no rear distance warning. The system will still give a warning when

obstacles are detected while driving forwards. The optical display changes to

towing mode.

Fault messages

If you hear a long beep for a few seconds and the LED on the switch * starts

flashing when you switch on the parking aid, a system fault has occurred.

Please refer the problem to an Authorised SEAT dealer or specialised work-

shop.

Note If the fault is not corrected before you switch off the ignition, it will only be

indicated by the flashing LED on the switch the next time you switch on

the parking aid.

Cruise control sys

Description

The cruise control syste

the range from approx.

Once the speed setting has b

erator.

WARNING

It could be dangerous to use to drive at constant speed.

For safety reasons the cr dense traffic, in sections wi (e.g. aquaplanning, loose ch dent.

Always switch the CCS o involuntary use.

It is dangerous to use a s traffic or weather conditions

Note The cruise control cannot mai

hills. The vehicle will accelera

slow the vehicle.

Driving180

T/- of the rocker switch fig. 150

ave reached the speed you wish to set.

witch, the current speed is set and held

Fig. 150 Indicator and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control

AA

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 180 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Switching the cruise control system on and off

Switching on the system

Push the switch fig. 149 to the left to ON.

Switching off system

Either push the switch to the right to OFF or turn the ignition

off when the vehicle is stationary.

When the cruise control is on and a speed is programmed, the indicator on

the instrument panel is lit.20)

If the cruise control system is switched off, the symbol is switched off. The

system will also be fully switched off when the 1st gear is selected.*

Setting speed*

Press the lower part SE once briefly when you h

When you release the rocker s

constant.

20) Depending on the model version

Fig. 149 Indicator and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control

AB

AB

Driving 181

Safety Fir Technical Data

h the accelerator and then release the pedal, the

tore the set speed. This will not be the case,

is more than 10 km/h higher than the stored

tes. The speed will have to be stored again.

itched off if you reduce speed by depressing the

te the control by pressing once on the upper part

fig. 151 .

speed which is too high for the current road, . Risk of accident.

mporarily*

l be switched off in the following situations:

essed,

AA

Fig. 152 Indicator and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 181 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Adjusting set speed*

The speed can be altered without touching the accelerator or

the brake.

Setting a higher speed

Press the upper part RES/+ of the rocker switch fig. 151 to

increase the speed. The vehicle will continue to accelerate as

long as you keep the rocker switch pressed. When you release

the switch, the new speed is stored.

Setting a lower speed

Press the lower part SET/ of the rocker switch to reduce the

speed. The vehicle will automatically reduce its speed for as long

as you keep the switch pressed. When you release the switch, the

new speed is stored.

When you increase speed wit

system will automatically res

however, if the vehicle speed

speed for longer than 5 minu

Control of the set speed is sw

brake pedal. You can reactiva

of the rocker switch RES/+

WARNING

It is dangerous to use a set traffic or weather conditions

Switching off system te

The cruise control system wil

if the brake pedal is depr

Fig. 151 Indicator and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control

AA

AA

Driving182

ox

ed off by moving the control all the way to

ed), or when the vehicle is stationary, ignition

ox / DSG* automatic gearbox

ystem, the selector lever must be placed in one

, R or 1 or with the vehicle stopped and the

AB

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 182 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

if the clutch pedal is depressed,

if the vehicle is accelerated to over 180 km/h,

when the lever is moved to the position CANCEL without reaching

the OFF position. Once the CANCEL operation is completed, the lever is

released and returns to its initial position.

To resume the cruise control, release the brake or clutch pedal or reduce the

vehicle speed to less than 180 km/h and press once on the upper part of the

rocker switch RES/+ page 181, fig. 152 .

WARNING

It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the current road, traffic or weather conditions. Risk of accident.

Turning off the cruise control system*

Vehicles with a manual gearb

The system is completely turn the right hand side (OFF engag

off.

Vehicles with automatic gearb

To completely disengage the s

of the following positions: P, N ignition turned off.

AB

AA

Fig. 153 Indicator and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control

Intelligent technology 183

Safety Fir Technical Data

AS)*

(BAS) function is only included in

s brake in time, but not with maximum force.

long braking distances.

venes when you press the brake pedal very

sist system registers an emergency situation. It

e full brake pressure so that the ABS can be acti-

ently, thus reducing the braking distance.

n the brake pedal. The brake assist system

soon as you release the brake.

den braking, the hazard warning lights auto-

hicles behind. The hazard warning lights go off

or the hazard warning light switch is pressed.

gher if you drive too fast, if you do not keep in front, and when the road surface is slippery nt risk cannot be reduced by the brake assist

cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery and n with the brake assist system! Therefore, it is

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 183 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Practical tips

Intelligent technology

Brakes

Brake servo

The brake servo amplifies the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. It works

only when the engine is running.

If the brake servo is not functioning due to a malfunction, or if the vehicle has

to be towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder to

make up for the lack of servo assistance.

WARNING

The braking distance can also be affected by external factors.

Never let the vehicle coast with the engine switched off. Failure to do so could result in an accident. The braking distance is increased considerably as the brake servo does not function.

If the brake servo is not working, for example when the vehicle is being towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder than normal.

Brake assist system (B

The Brake Assist System

vehicles with ESP.

In an emergency, most driver

This results in unnecessarily

The brake assist system inter

quickly because the brake as

then very quickly builds up th

vated more quickly and effici

Do not reduce the pressure o

switches off automatically as

Emergency braking function

When the vehicle detects sud

matically come on to warn ve

when the vehicle accelerates

WARNING

The risk of accident is hi your distance to the vehicle or wet. The increased accide system.

The brake assist system wet roads are dangerous eve

Intelligent technology184

m cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery even with ABS! If you notice that the ABS is

d wheels under braking), you should reduce e road and traffic conditions. Do not let the ou into taking any risks when driving.

is also determined by the tyres fitted

es are modified, the effectiveness of the ABS

(TCS)*

em prevents the drive wheels from

s accelerating.

he traction control system during acceleration

help prevent the drive wheels of front-wheel

during acceleration. The system works in the

tion with ABS. If a malfunction should occur in

ut of action.

oving, accelerate and climb a gradient in slip-

y otherwise be difficult or even impossible.

tically when the engine is started. If necessary,

hing the button on the centre console.

ng lamp is lit. The TCS should normally be left

in exceptional circumstances, when slipping of

it be disconnected for example

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 184 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

essential that you adjust your speed to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when driving.

Anti-lock brake system and traction control M-ABS (ABS and TCS)

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

The anti-lock brake system prevents the wheels locking

during braking.

The anti-lock brake system (ABS) is an important part of the vehicle's active

safety system.

How the ABS works

If one of the wheels is turns too slowly in relation to the road speed, and is

close to locking, the system will reduce the braking pressure for this wheel.

The driver is made aware of this control process by a pulsating of the brake pedal and audible noise. This is a deliberate warning to the driver that one or

more of the wheels is tending to lock and the ABS control function has inter-

vened. In this situation it is important to keep the brake pedal fully depressed

so the ABS can regulate the brake application. Do not pump.

If you brake hard on a slippery road surface, the best possible control is

retained as the wheels do not lock.

However, ABS will not necessarily guarantee shorter braking distances in all

conditions. The braking distance could even be longer if you brake on gravel

or on fresh snow covering a slippery surface.

WARNING

The anti-lock brake syste and wet roads are dangerous working (to counteract locke speed immediately to suit th extra safety features tempt y

The effectiveness of ABS page 230.

If the running gear or brak could be severely limited.

Traction control system

The traction control syst

spinning when the car i

Description and operation of t (TCS)

TCS reduces engine power to

drive vehicles losing traction

entire speed range in conjunc

the ABS, the TCS will also be o

TCS helps the vehicle to start m

pery conditions where this ma

The TCS is switched on automa

it may be turned on or off pus

When the TCS is off, the warni

switched on at all times. Only

the wheels is required, should

WARNING (continued)

Intelligent technology 185

Safety Fir Technical Data

ing the wheels to spin. On the other hand, the

drive torque than it could transmit. This causes

on the front shaft, resulting in understeering or

g the ESP sensors and signals, to detect and

the inner wheel thus counteracting the excess

is means that the path requested by the driver

ombination with the ESP and is always active,

ol, TCS, is disconnected.

ation programme (ESP)*

tion programme increases the

e road.

rogramme helps to reduce the danger of skid-

rogramme (ESP) consists of ABS, EDL, TCS and endations.

m (ESP)*

idding by braking the wheels individually.

wheel angle and road speed to calculate the

by the driver, and constantly compares them

the vehicle. If the desired course is not being

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 185 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

With compact temporary spare wheel.

When using the snow chains.

When driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces

When the vehicle is bogged-down, to free it by rocking.

The TCS should be switched on again afterwards as soon as possible.

WARNING

It must be remembered that TCS cannot defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.

Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by TCS tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.

Caution In order to ensure that TCS function correctly, all four wheels must be

fitted with the same tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can

cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.

Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running

gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-

ciency of the ABS and TCS.

XDS*

Driveshaft differential

When taking a bend, the driveshaft differential mechanism allows the outer

wheel to turn at a higher speed than the inner wheel. In this way, the wheel

which is turning faster (outer wheel) receives less drive torque than the inner

wheel. This may mean that in certain situations the torque provided to the

inner wheel is too high, caus

outer wheel receives a lower

an overall loss of lateral grip

lengthening of the path.

The XDS system is able, usin

correct this effect.

The XDS, via the ESP, brakes

drive torque in this wheel. Th

is more precise,

The XDS system operates in c

even when the traction contr

Electronic stabilis

General notes

The electronic stabilisa

vehicle's stability on th

The electronic stabilisation p

ding.

The electronic stabilisation p

Steering manoeuvre recomm

Electronic Stabilising Progra

ESP reduces the danger of sk

The system uses the steering

changes of direction desired

with the actual behaviour of

Intelligent technology186

e (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running

ting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-

d TCS.

(ABS)

vents the wheels locking during braking

ck (EDL)*

al lock helps prevent the loss of trac-

driven wheels starts spinning.

oving, accelerate and climb a gradient in slip-

y otherwise be difficult or even impossible.

olutions of the drive wheels using the ABS

lt the warning lamp for ABS lights up)

tely 80 km/h, it is able to balance out differ-

n wheels of approximately 100 rpm caused by

side of the vehicle. It does this by braking the

and distributing more driving force to the other

al.

e braking wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts

to excessive loads. The vehicle will continue to

. For this reason, the driver is not informed that

f.

utomatically when the brake has cooled down.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 186 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

maintained (for instance, if the car is starting to skid), then the ESP compen-

sates automatically by braking the appropriate wheel.

The forces acting on the braked wheel bring the vehicle back to a stable

condition. If the vehicle tends to oversteer, the system will act on the front

wheel on the outside of the turn.

Steering manoeuvre recommendations

This is a complementary safety function included in the ESP This function aids

the driver to better stabilize the vehicle in a critical situation. For example, in

case of sudden braking surface with varied adherence, the vehicle will tend

to destabilize its trajectory to the right to or to the left. In this case the ESP

recognizes the situation and helps the driver with a counter steering

manoeuvre from the power steering.

This function simply provides the driver with a recommended manoeuvre in

critical situations.

The vehicle does not steer itself with this function, the driver has full control

of the vehicle at all times.

WARNING

It must be remembered that ESP cannot defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.

Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.

Caution In order to ensure that ESP functions correctly, all four wheels must be

fitted with the same tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can

cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.

Modifications to the vehicl

gear or any components affec

ciency of the ABS, EDL, ESP an

Anti-lock brake system

The anti-lock brake system pre

page 184.

Electronic differential lo

The electronic differenti

tion caused if one of the

EDL helps the vehicle to start m

pery conditions where this ma

The system will control the rev

sensors (in case of an EDL fau

page 77.

At speeds of up to approxima

ences in the speed of the drive

a slippery road surface on one

wheel which has lost traction

driven wheel via the differenti

To prevent the disc brake of th

out automatically if subjected

function normally without EDL

the EDL has been switched of

The EDL will switch on again a

Intelligent technology 187

Safety Fir Technical Data

lly designed to complement the superior engine

s the car exceptional handling and performance

l roads and in more difficult conditions, such as

, your car will have plenty of traction in winter

ndard tyres. Nevertheless, we still recommend

tyres should be fitted on all four wheels when

pected, mainly because this will give a better

are mandatory, this also applies to cars with

rive, all four tyres must have the same rolling

e, you should always adjust your speed to suit e extra safety features tempt you into taking re to do so could result in an accident.

f your vehicle is limited by the tyres' grip. rent from a vehicle without four-wheel drive. e too fast on icy or slippery roads just because ration in these conditions. Failure to do so

d that the front wheels may start to aqua- the road if the car is driven too fast. If this

e no sudden increase in engine speed when rn the driver, as with a front-wheel drive car.

mentioned above, always choose a driving

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 187 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

WARNING

When accelerating on a slippery surface, for example on ice and snow, press the accelerator carefully. Despite EDL, the driven wheels may start to spin. This could impair the vehicle's stability.

Always adapt your driving style to suit road conditions and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by EDL tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.

Caution Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running

gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-

ciency of the EDL page 208.

The traction control system (TCS)

The traction control system prevents the drive wheels from spinning when the

car is accelerating page 184.

Four-wheel drive*

On four-wheel drive models, the engine power is distributed

to all four wheels

General notes

The four-wheel-drive system operates completely automatically. The propul-

sion force is distributed among the four wheels and adapted to the driving

style and the road conditions.

The four-wheel drive is specia

power. This combination give

capabilities both on norma

snow and ice.

Winter tyres

Thanks to its four-wheel drive

conditions, even with the sta

that winter tyres or all-season

winter road conditions are ex

braking response.

Snow chains

On roads where snow chains

four-wheel drive.

Changing tyres

On vehicles with four-wheel d

circumference page 235.

WARNING

Even with four-wheel driv the conditions. Do not let th any risks when driving. Failu

The braking capability o Vehicle behaviour is no diffe So do not be tempted to driv the car still has good accele could result in an accident.

On wet roads bear in min plane and lose contact with should happen, there will b aquaplaning begins to wa For this reason and for that

Intelligent technology188

se, the layer of salt on the brake discs and pads

.

irt to build up on the brake pads and corrosion

is used infrequently, or if you only drive low

akes very much.

uently, or if rust has formed on the disks, it is

and disks by braking firmly a few times from a

.

d ever increase suddenly, this may mean that

as failed. Drive immediately to the nearest qual-

ault rectified. On the way to the dealer, be

e on the brake pedal, and allow for longer stop-

brake system if the brake fluid level is too low.

red electronically.

pressure you apply to the brake pedal. The

the engine is running.

s to clean off deposits on the pads and discs, re not to inconvenience or endanger other

ot move while in neutral, when the motor is ld result in an accident.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 188 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

speed suitable for the road conditions. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

Brakes

What factors can have a negative effect on the brakes?

New brake pads

New brake pads do not provide optimal performance during the first 400 km

they must be run in. However, the reduced braking capacity may be

compensated by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder. Avoid over-

loading the brakes during run-in.

Wear

The rate of wear on the brake pads depends a great deal on how you drive and

the conditions in which the vehicle is operated. Negative factors are, for

instance, city traffic, frequent short trips or hard driving with abrupt starts

and stops.

Wet roads; road salt

When the velocity is over 80 km/h windscreen wipers are on, the brake

system moves the pads towards the brake discs for a few seconds. This

occurs - without warning to the driver - at regular intervals and requires a

more rapid response from the brakes when driving on wet roads.

In certain conditions, such as in heavy rain, or after washing the car or driving

through water, the full braking effect can be delayed by moisture (or in winter

by ice) on the discs and brake pads. The brakes should be dried by pressing

the pedal to restore full braking effect.

The effectiveness of the brakes can also be temporarily reduced if the car is

driven for some distance without using the brakes when there is a lot of salt

on the road in winter. In this ca

has to wear off before braking

Corrosion

There may be a tendency for d

to form on the discs if the car

mileages without using the br

If the brakes are not used freq

advisable to clean off the pads

moderately high speed

Faults in the brake system

If the brake pedal travel shoul

one of the two brake circuits h

ified workshop and have the f

prepared to use more pressur

ping distances.

Low brake fluid level

Malfunctions can occur in the

The brake fluid level is monito

Brake servo

The brake servo amplifies the

brake servo works only when

WARNING

When applying the brake select a clear, dry road. Be su road users. Risk of accident.

Ensure the vehicle does n stopped. Failure to do so cou

WARNING (continued)

Intelligent technology 189

Safety Fir Technical Data

will be required than usual. The fault should be

shop as soon as possible.

work if the engine is off. In this case the steering

rning limit when the car is stationary, this will

e power steering system. Turning the steering

d on the system, which causes noise. It will also

e engine.

do not turn the steering wheel to its limit for

rwise, there is a risk of damaging the power

uld fail at any time or the engine is switched off

ed), the car can still be steered. However, more

the steering wheel.

malfunctioning, please take the car to a quali-

ssible.

es a special hydraulic fluid. The container is

rtment (front left). The correct fluid level in the

power steering to function properly. The

d at the Inspection Service.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 189 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Caution Never let the brakes drag by leaving your foot on the pedal when you do

not really intend to brake. This overheats the brakes, resulting in longer stop-

ping distances and greater wear.

Before driving down a long, steep gradient, it is advisable to reduce speed

and change to a lower gear (or move the selector lever to a lower gear position

if your car has automatic transmission). This makes use of engine braking

and prolongs the service life of the brakes. If you still have to use the brakes,

it is better to brake firmly at intervals than to apply the brakes continuously.

Note If the brake servo is not functioning due to a malfunction, or if the vehicle

has to be towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder

to make up for the lack of servo assistance.

If you wish to equip the car with accessories such as a front spoiler or

wheel covers, it is important that the flow of air to the front wheels is not

obstructed, otherwise the brakes can overheat.

Power steering (servotronic*)

The power steering assists the driver when turning the

steering wheel (with the engine running).

The power steering assists the driver by reducing the force needed to turn the

steering wheel. In cars equipped with servotronic* power steering the degree

of power assistance is regulated electronically according to road speed.

The power steering will keep on working even if the servotronic* device fails.

The degree of power assistance will, however, no longer adapt to different

speeds. If the electronic regulating system is not working properly, this is

most noticeable when turning the steering wheel at low speeds (for instance

when parking) more effort

corrected by a qualified work

The power steering does not

wheel is very hard to turn.

If the steering is held at its tu

place an excessive load on th

wheel to its limit places a loa

reduce the idling speed of th

Caution When the engine is running,

more than 15 seconds. Othe

steering.

Note If the power steering sho

(for instance when being tow

effort will be required to turn

If the system is leaking or

fied workshop as soon as po

The power steering requir

located in the engine compa

reservoir is important for the

hydraulic fluid level is checke

Driving and the environment190

ing distance

raking distance are influenced by

oad conditions.

pends directly on the brake pad wear. The rate

ends to a great extent on the conditions under

and the way the vehicle is driven. If you often

rt distances or have a sporty driving style, we

thickness of your brake pads checked by an

re frequently than recommended in the Service

r example, after crossing water areas, in heavy

the car, the effect of the brakes is lessened as

n frozen (in winter): The brakes should be

to restore full braking effect.

d faults in the brake system increase the risk

run in and do not have the correct friction ever, the reduced braking capacity may be the brake pedal a little harder. This also s are fitted.

, or if you are driving on roads which have g power may set in later than normal.

s are excessively used, they will overheat. teep stopes, it is advisable to reduce speed r gear (or move the selector lever to a lower

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 190 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Driving and the environment

Running-in

Running in a new engine

The engine needs to be run-in over the first 1,500 km.

Up to 1,000 kilometres

Do not drive faster than two thirds of top speed.

Do not accelerate hard.

Avoid high engine revolutions.

Do not tow a trailer.

From 1000 to 1500 km

Speeds can be gradually increased to the maximum road speed

or maximum permissible engine speed (rpm).

During its first few hours of running, the internal friction in the engine is

greater than later on, when all the moving parts have bedded in.

For the sake of the environment If the engine is run in gently, its life will be increased and its oil consumption,

reduced.

Braking effect and brak

The braking effect and b

driving situations and r

The efficiency of the brakes de

of wear of the brake pads dep

which the vehicle is operated

drive in town traffic, drive sho

recommend that you have the

Authorised Service Centre mo

Schedule.

If you drive with wet brakes, fo

rainfall or even after washing

the brake discs are wet or eve

dried by pressing the pedal

WARNING

Longer braking distances an of accidents.

New brake pads must be during the first 400 km. How compensated by pressing on applies when new brake pad

If brakes are wet or frozen been gritted with salt, brakin

On steep stopes, if brake Before driving down a long s and change down into a lowe

Driving and the environment 191

Safety Fir Technical Data

to start it, use jump leads if necessary

n running or loss of power when the vehicle is

diately and have the vehicle inspected at the

In general, the exhaust warning lamp will light

symptoms occur page 73. If this happens,

haust system and escape into the environment.

so be damaged by overheating.

hes very high temperatures! Fire hazard!

talytic converter could come into contact with terials under the vehicle.

underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the verter or the heat shields on the exhaust ld catch fire when the vehicle is being driven.

because the irregularity of the fuel supply may

allows unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust

verheating and damage the catalytic converter.

nvironment rol system is working perfectly, there may be a

aust under some conditions. This depends on

el used. Quite often the problem can be solved

rand.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 191 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

gear if your vehicle has automatic transmission). This makes use of engine braking and relieves the brakes.

Never let the brakes rub by applying light pressure. Continuous braking will cause the brakes to overheat and the braking distance will increase. Apply and then release the brakes alternately.

Never let the vehicle run with the engine switched off. The braking distance is increased considerably as the brake servo does not function.

Very heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid is left in the system for too long. This impairs the braking effect.

Non-standard or damaged front spoilers could restrict the airflow to the brakes and cause them to overheat. Observe the relevant instructions before purchasing accessories page 208, Technical modifications.

If a brake circuit fails, the braking distance will be increased consider- ably. Contact a qualified workshop immediately and avoid unnecessary journeys.

Exhaust gasses purification system

Catalytic converter*

To conserve the useful life of the catalytic converter

Always use unleaded petrol.

Do not let the fuel get too low in the tank.

For engine oil changes, do not top the reservoir up page 218,

Topping up engine oil .

Never tow the vehicle

page 262.

If you notice misfiring, uneve

moving, reduce speed imme

nearest qualified workshop.

up when any of the described

unburnt fuel can enter the ex

The catalytic converter can al

WARNING

The catalytic converter reac

Never park where the ca dry grass or inflammable ma

Do not apply additional exhaust pipes, catalytic con system. These materials cou

Caution Never fully drain the fuel tank

cause ignition problems. This

system, which could cause o

For the sake of the e Even when the emission cont

smell of sulphur from the exh

the sulphur content of the fu

by changing to another fuel b

WARNING (continued)

Driving and the environment192

0-15%. Next, we provide you with some tips in

ation and, at the same time, save money.

ances

accelerating. When you anticipate the situa-

ten and, thus, accelerate less. If it is possible,

engaged, for example, if you see a red light

erves brakes and tyres from wear; the emis-

re reduced to zero (disconnection out of

rgy

l is to change up quickly through the gears.

m in the lower gears uses an unnecessary

first to second gear as quickly as possible. We

ssible, you change to a higher gear upon

e in moderation and avoid the kick-down

the top speed permitted by the vehicle. Fuel

ns and noise levels all increase very rapidly at

erate speeds will help to save fuel.

he engine when waiting in a traffic jam, at level

ith a long red phase. The fuel saved after only

n the amount of fuel needed to restart the

ime to warm up when it is running at idling

ollutant emissions are also especially high

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 192 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Diesel engine particulate filter*

The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates soot produced

by burning diesel.

The diesel engine dust filter eliminates most of the soot from the exhaust gas

system. Under normal driving conditions, the filter cleans itself. If the driving

conditions do not allow the filter to clean itself (for example, multiple short

trips) the filter will be obstructed by dust and pollen and the indicator for

the diesel engine particulate filter indicator will light. See under Warning

Lights.

WARNING

The diesel engine particulate filter may reach extremely high tempera- tures; it should not enter into contact with flammable materials under- neath the vehicle. Failure to comply could result in fire.

Caution The vehicle is not designed for refuelling with mixtures of FAME fuel

(biodiesel) over 7% in accordance with DIN 51628. The diesel particle filter is

damaged when this mixture percentage is exceeded.

Economical and ecological driving

Economical and environmental driving

Fuel consumption, environmental pollution and wear to the engine, brakes

and tyres depends in large part on your driving style. By adopting an econom-

ical driving style and anticipating the traffic situation ahead, you can easily

reduce fuel consumption by 1

order to help reduce contamin

Driving ahead of the circumst

A vehicle uses most fuel when

tion, you have to brake less of

let the vehicle roll with a gear ahead. The braking effect pres

sions and fuel consumption a

inertia).

Change gear early to save ene

An effective way of saving fue

Running the engine at high rp

amount of fuel.

Manual gearbox: Change from

recommend that, whenever po

reaching 2,000 rpm.

Automatic gearbox: Accelerat

position.

Avoid driving at high speed

We advise you not to drive at

consumption, exhaust emissio

higher speeds. Driving at mod

Avoid idling

It is worthwhile switching off t

crossings or at traffic lights w

30 - 40 seconds is greater tha

engine.

The engine takes a very long t

speed. Mechanical wear and p

Driving and the environment 193

Safety Fir Technical Data

xtra wind resistance caused by the roof carrier

nator, which produces electricity. With the need

on is also increased. Because of this, always

when you do not need them. Examples of equip-

ity are: the fan at high speeds, the rear window

ness

top priority in the design, choice of materials

eat.

ical recycling

signed for ease of dismantling

acilitate dismantling

rade materials

ers are labelled in accordance with ISO 1043,

can be recycled

rouped together for easy recycling

n manufacture

olatile components

conditioning

aterials laws: cadmium, asbestos, lead,

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 193 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

during this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best to drive off immediately

after starting the engine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.

Periodic maintenance

Periodic maintenance work guarantees that, before beginning a journey, you

will not waste fuel. A well-serviced engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel efficiency as well as maximum reliability and an enhanced resale value.

A badly serviced engine can consume up to 10% more fuel than necessary.

Avoid short journeys

To reduce the consumption and emission of polluting gases, the engine and

the exhaust filtration systems should reach the optimum service tempera- ture.

With the engine cold, fuel consumption is proportionally higher. The engine

does not warm up and fuel consumption does not regularise until having

driven some four kilometres. This is the reason why we recommend avoiding

short trips wherever possible.

Maintain the correct tyre pressures

Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at an adequate pressure saves fuel. If the

tyre pressures are just 1 bar too low, this can put the fuel consumption up by

as much as 5%. Due to the greater rolling resistance, under-inflation also

increases tyre wear and impairs handling.

The tyre pressures should always be checked when the tyres are cold.

Do not use winter tyres all through the year: they will increase fuel consump-

tion by up to 10%.

Avoid unnecessary weight

Every kilo of extra weight will put up the fuel consumption, so it is worth

checking the luggage compartment occasionally to make sure that no unnec-

essary loads are being transported.

A roof carrier is often left in place for the sake of convenience, even when it is

no longer needed. At a speed of 100-120 km/h your car will use about 12%

more fuel as a result of the e

even when it is empty.

Save electrical energy

The engine activates the alter

for electricity, fuel consumpti

turn off electrical equipment

ment that use a lot of electric

heating or the seat heaters*.

Environmental friendli

Environmental protection is a

and production of your new S

Design measures for econom

Joints and connections de

Modular construction to f

Increased use of single-g

Plastic parts and elastom

ISO 11469 and ISO 1629

Choice of materials

Nearly all materials used

Similar types of plastics g

Recycled materials used i

Reduction of the plastic v

CFC-free refrigerant in air

Compliance with prohibited m mercury, chrome VI.

Driving and the environment194

dlights

d drive vehicle in a left-hand drive country, or

ped beam headlights will dazzle oncoming

apply stickers to certain parts of the headlight

available in your Authorised Service Centre.

headlights, the rotation system must previ-

this, please go to a specialist workshop.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 194 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Manufacturing methods

Use of recycled material for manufacturing plastic parts

Solvent-free cavity sealing

Solvent-free wax for protecting the vehicles in transit

Solvent-free adhesives

No CFCs used in production

Surplus materials used extensively for energy conversion and building

materials

Overall water consumption reduced

Heat recovery systems

Water-soluble paint

Driving abroad

Observations

To drive abroad, the following must be taken into consideration:

For vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter ensure that unleaded petrol is

available for the journey. See the chapter Refuelling. Automobile organisa-

tions will have information about service station networks selling unleaded

fuel.

In some countries it is possible that a vehicle model is sold under condi-

tions where some spare parts are not available or that the Authorised Service

Centres may only carry out limited repairs.

SEAT importers and distributors will gladly provide information about the

technical preparation of your vehicle and also about necessary maintenance

and repair possibilities.

Adhesive strips for hea

If you have to drive a right-han

vice versa, the asymmetric dip

traffic.

To prevent dazzling, you must

lenses. Further information is

In vehicles with self-directing

ously be disconnected. To do

Trailer towing 195

Safety Fir Technical Data

s and draw bar weights that are given on the

ket are for certification purposes only. The

ic model, which may be lower than these figures

ven in the registration documents Section

so that heavy objects are as near to the axle as

trailer must be secured to prevent them

um permissible pressure shown on the sticker

flap. Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in

anufacturer's recommendations.

nough of the road behind the trailer with the

t the case, you should have additional mirrors

hould be mounted on hinged extension

o give sufficient vision to the rear.

trailer. This could result in fatal accidents.

ditional demands on the vehicle. We recom-

ween the normal inspection intervals if the

towing a trailer.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 195 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Trailer towing

Instructions to follow

Your vehicle may be used to tow a trailer when fitted with the correct equip-

ment.

If the car is supplied with a factory-fitted towing bracket it will already have

the necessary technical modifications and meet the statutory requirements

for towing a trailer. For the after-market fitting of a trailer towing bracket see

page 197.

Connectors

Your vehicle is fitted with a 12-pin connector for the electrical connection

between the trailer and the vehicle.

If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need to use an adapter cable. This is

available in any SEAT dealer.

Trailer weight / draw bar loading

Never exceed the authorised towing limit. If you do not load the trailer up to

the maximum permitted trailer weight, you can then climb correspondingly

steeper slopes.

The maximum trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to

1,000 m above sea level. With increasing altitude the engine power and

therefore the vehicle's climbing ability are impaired because of the reduced

air density. The maximum trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly. The

weight of the vehicle and trailer combination must be reduced by 10% for

every further 1,000 m (or part thereof). The gross combination weight is the

actual weight of the laden vehicle plus the actual weight of the laden trailer.

When possible, operate the trailer with the maximum permitted draw bar weight on the ball joint of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the specified

limit.

The figures for trailer weight data plate of the towing brac

correct figures for your specif

for the towing bracket, are gi

Technical data.

Distributing the load

Distribute loads in the trailer

possible. Loads carried in the

moving.

Tyre pressure

Set tyre pressure to the maxim

on the inside of the fuel tank

accordance with the trailer m

Exterior mirrors

Check whether you can see e

standard mirrors. If this is no

fitted. Both exterior mirrors s

brackets. Adjust the mirrors t

WARNING

Never transport people in a

Note Towing a trailer places ad

mend additional services bet

vehicle is used frequently for

Trailer towing196

trailer is reduced with increasing speed. For

to drive at the maximum permissible speed in

r or wind conditions. This applies especially

ed immediately if the trailer shows the slightest

top the snaking by increasing speed.

the trailer has an overrun brake, apply the

, firmly. This will prevent the jerking that can be

cking. Select a low gear in due course before

This enables you to use the engine braking to

during prolonged ascents, driving in a low gear

s monitor the temperature indicator for the

am*

ier to stabilise the trailer in case it skids or

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 196 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Find out whether special regulations apply to towing a trailer in your

country.

Ball coupling of towing bracket*

Depending on the model version, the spherical head on the trailer hook may

be stored in the tool box.

The ball coupling is provided with instructions on fitting and removing the

ball coupling of the towing bracket.

WARNING

The towing bracket ball coupling must be stored securely in the luggage compartment to prevent them being flung through the vehicle and causing injury.

Note By law, the ball coupling must be removed if a trailer is not being towed

and it obscures the number plate.

Driving tips

Driving with a trailer always requires extra care.

Weight distribution

The weight distribution of a loaded trailer with an unladen vehicle is very

unfavourable. However, if this cannot be avoided, drive extra slowly to allow

for the unbalanced weight distribution.

Speed

The stability of the vehicle and

this reason, it is advisable not

an unfavourable road, weathe

when driving downhill.

You should always reduce spe

sign of snaking. Never try to s

Always brake in due course. If

brakes gently at first and then

caused by the trailer wheels lo

going down a steep downhill.

slow down the vehicle.

Reheating

At very high temperatures and

and high engine speed, alway

coolant page 53.

Electronic Stabilisation Progr

The ESP* system makes it eas

swings.

Trailer towing 197

Safety Fir Technical Data

Fig. 154 Attachment points for towing bracket

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 197 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Fitting a towing bracket*

It is possible to fit a towing bracket to the rear of the vehicle.

Trailer towing198

correctly installed, there is serious danger of

se observe the instructions provided by the racket.

correctly installed, this could cause damage to

.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 198 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the vehicle is purchased, this must be

completed according to the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer.

The attachment points for the towing bracket are on the lower part of the

vehicle.

The distance between the centre of the ball coupling and the ground should

never be lower than the indicated value, even with a fully loaded vehicle and

including the maximum resting weight.

Elevation values for securing the towing bracket:

65 mm (minimum)

350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle)

344 mm

531 mm

1,044 mm

1,040 mm

Fitting a towing bracket

Driving with a trailer involves an extra effort for the vehicle. Therefore,

before fitting a towing bracket, please contact an Authorised Service Centre

to check whether your cooling system needs modification.

Submit to the legal requirements in your country (e.g. the fitting of a sepa-

rate warning lamp).

Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rear bumper, must be removed and

reinstalled. The towing bracket securing bolts must be tightened using a

torque wrench, and an electrical socket must be connected to the vehicle's

electrical system. The above-mentioned require specialized knowledge and

tools.

Figures in the illustration show the elevation value and the attachment

points which must be considered if you are retrofitting a towing bracket.

WARNING

Towing brackets should be fitted by specialists.

If the towing bracket is in accident.

For your own safety, plea manufacturer of the towing b

Caution If the electrical socket is in

the vehicle's electrical system

AA

AB

AC

AD

AE

AF

AG

WARNING (continued)

Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 199

Safety Fir Technical Data

ain products may produce noxious vapours; ventilated areas.

e, engine oil, nail varnish remover or other ic and highly flammable. Risk of fire and explo-

icle, or carrying out any maintenance, switch andbrake firmly and remove the key from the

, mud or dust if the surface of the vehicle is dry.

e for cleaning purposes. This could damage the

your vehicle. Soak dirt, mud or dust with plenty

nvironment ts for your vehicle maintenance, select the ones

environment.

re products should not be disposed of with ordi-

rve the disposal information on the package.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 199 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Cleaning and caring for your vehicle

General notes

Regular washing and care help maintain the value of your

vehicle.

Your vehicle maintenance

Regular care and washing help to maintain the value of the vehicle. This may

also be one of the requirements for acknowledging warranty claims in the

event of bodywork corrosion or paint defects.

The best way to protect the car against environmental contaminants is to

wash and wax it frequently. The longer substances such as insects remains,

bird droppings, resinous tree sap, road dirt, industrial deposits, tar, soot or

road salt and other aggressive materials remain on the vehicle, the more

damage they do to the paintwork. High temperatures (for instance in strong

sunlight) further intensify the corrosive effect.

After winter, a period when salt is put on the roads, it is important to have the

underside of the vehicle washed thoroughly.

Products for vehicle maintenance

Car care products are available in your Authorised Service Centre. Keep the

product instructions until you have used them up.

WARNING

Car care products can be toxic. For this, they must always be kept closed in their original container. Keep them out of the reach of children. Failure to comply could result in poisoning.

Always read and observe the instructions and warnings on the package before using car care products. Improper use could damage your health or

your vehicle. The use of cert they should be used in well

Never use fuel, turpentin volatile fluids. These are tox sion.

Before washing your veh the engine off, apply your h ignition.

Caution Never attempt to remove dirt

Never use a dry cloth or spong

paintwork or the windows of

of water.

For the sake of the e When purchasing produc

which are not harmful to the

The leftovers of the car ca

nary household waste. Obse

WARNING (continued)

Cleaning and caring for your vehicle200

plenty of water and rinse it off.

top to bottom with a soft sponge, a glove

ht pressure.

ve often with clean water.

ould only be used for very stubborn dirt.

anels etc. until last with a different

ughly with water.

gently with a chamois leather.

ld, dry the rubber seals and its surfaces

eezing. Apply silicone spray to the rubber

avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry

effect and braking distancethe brakes by

nition switched off.

rms from cuts on sharp metal edges when inside of the wheel housings etc. Risk of

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 200 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Vehicle exterior maintenance

Automatic car wash tunnel

The car can normally be washed without problem in an auto-

matic car wash.

The vehicle paintwork is so durable that the car can normally be washed

without problems in an automatic car washing tunnel. However, the paint-

work wear depends to a large extent, on the kind of the car washing tunnel,

the brushes used, its water filtering and the type of cleaning and preservative

products.

Before going through a car wash, be sure to take the usual precautions such

as closing the windows and sunroof. There is nothing to note apart from that.

If the vehicle has special accessories such as spoilers or a roof carrier or two-

way radio aerial, etc., it is advisable to consult the car washing tunnel oper-

ator.

After washing, the brakes could hesitate to respond as the brake discs and

pads could be wet, or even frozen in winter. Dry the brakes by braking

several times.

WARNING

Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of acci- dent.

Caution If an automatic car wash tunnel is used, before entering the tunnel, put the

aerial down parallel to the roof and do not tighten to avoid damage.

Washing by hand

Vehicle washing

First soften the dirt with

Clean your vehicle from

or a brush. Use very lig

Rinse the sponge or glo

Special car shampoo sh

Clean the wheels, sill p

sponge or glove.

Rinse the vehicle thoro

Dry your vehicle surface

When temperature is co to prevent them from fr

seals.

After washing

Directly after washing,

page 190, Braking

braking several times.

WARNING

Wash your car with the ig

Protect your hands and a cleaning the underbody, the injury.

Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 201

Safety Fir Technical Data

distance for soft materials and painted

sure cleaner to remove ice or snow from

d jet nozzles (rotating jets) .

avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry

s by braking several times.

concentrated jet (rotating nozzle). Even at d short cleaning times, visible and invisible es. This may cause an accident.

e brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of

an 60C. This could damage the vehicle.

ehicle, keep a sufficient distance from sensitive

es, plastic, soundproofing material, etc. This is

ainted as the paintwork. The closer the nozzle is

e wear on the material.

nce requirements

s the paintwork.

r car if water does not form small drops and run

lean.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 201 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of accident.

Caution Never remove dirt, mud or dust if the vehicle surface is dry. Never use a

dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. This could scratch the paintwork

or glass on your vehicle.

Washing the vehicle in low temperatures: when washing the vehicle with

a hose, do not direct water into the lock cylinders or the gaps around the

doors, tailgate, or sunroof. Risk of freezing.

For the sake of the environment To protect environment, the car should be washed only in specially provided

wash bays. This prevents toxic, oil-laden waste water entering the sewerage

system. In some districts, washing vehicles outside wash bays is prohibited.

Note Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.

Washing the car with a high pressure cleaner

Be particularly careful when using a high pressure cleaner!

Always observe the instructions for the high-pressure cleaner,

particularly those concerning the pressure and the spraying distance.

Increase the spraying

bumpers.

Do not use a high pres

windows page 202.

Never use concentrate

Directly after washing,

page 190 the brake

WARNING

Never wash tyres with a large spraying distances an damage can occur to the tyr

Water, ice and salt on th accident.

Caution Do not use water hotter th

To avoid damage to the v

materials such as flexible hos

also important for bumpers p

to the surface, the greater th

Vehicle paint maintena

Regular waxing protect

You need to apply wax to you

off the paintwork when it is c

WARNING (continued)

Cleaning and caring for your vehicle202

c parts.

n plastic parts, clean them with approved

nd care products.

ner directly over the air vents of the vehicle may

e liquid is accidentally spilled.

ontain solvents will damage the material.

exterior mirrors

ith commercially available, alcohol based

clean chamois leather or a lint-free cloth.

ove snow from the windows and mirrors.

eather to dry the windows. The chamois

ces are not suitable to clean windows because

sits which could smear the windows.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 202 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

A good quality hard wax product is available from your Authorised Service

Centre.

Regular wax applications help to protect the paintwork from environmental

contaminants page 199. It is also effective in protecting against minor

scratches.

Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the car washing tunnel, it is advis-

able to protect the paint with a hard wax coating at least twice a year.

Polishing the paintwork

Polishing brings back gloss to the paintwork.

Polishing is only necessary if the paint has lost its shine, and the gloss cannot

be brought back by applying wax. Polishing products can be purchased in

your Authorised Service Centre.

The car must be waxed after polishing if the polish used does not contain wax

compounds to seal the paint page 201, Vehicle paint maintenance

requirements.

Caution To prevent damage to the paintwork:

Do not use polishes and hard wax on painted parts with a matte finish or

on plastic parts.

Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or dusty environment.

Caring for plastic parts

Solvents damage plasti

If normal washing fails to clea

solvent-free plastic cleaning a

Caution The use of liquid air freshe

damage the plastic parts if th

Cleaning products which c

Cleaning windows and

Cleaning windows

Moisten the windows w

glass cleaner.

Dry the windows with a

Removing snow

Use a small brush to rem

Removing ice

Use a de-icer spray.

Use a clean cloth or chamois l

leathers used on painted surfa

they are soiled with wax depo

Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 203

Safety Fir Technical Data

nce

looked after, they will not freeze so

ove dust and dirt from the rubber seals.

product to the rubber seals.

ows, bonnet and rear lid will remain pliable and

with a suitable care product (for example sili-

lso prevent premature ageing and leaks. The

f rubber seals are well looked after, they will not

can freeze up in winter.

ou should only use spray with lubricating and

th a damp cloth.

ith a soft, dry cloth.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 203 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

If possible, use a de-icing spray to remove ice. If you use an ice scraper, push

it in one direction only without swinging it.

Use window cleaner or a silicone remover to clean rubber, oil, grease and sili-

cone deposits off.

Wax deposits can be removed with a special cleaner available in your Author-

ised Service Centre. Wax deposits on the windscreen could cause the wiper

blades to judder. If a window cleanser, specifically for removing wax, is added

to the windscreen washer fluid prevents wiper blades from juddering. Wax

deposits are not removed.

Caution Never use warm or hot water to remove snow and ice from windows and

mirrors. This could cause the glass to crack!

The heating element for the rear window is located on the inner side of the

window. To prevent damage, do not put stickers on the heating elements

inside the window.

Cleaning windscreen wiper blades

Clean wiper blades are essential to provide clear vision.

1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the windscreen

wiper blades.

2. Use window cleanser to clean the windscreen wiper blades. Use

a sponge or a cloth to remove stubborn stains.

Rubber seals maintena

If rubber seals are well

quickly.

1. Use a soft cloth to rem

2. Apply a specialist care

The strips on the doors, wind

last longer if they are treated

cone spray).

Caring for rubber seals will a

doors will be easier to open. I

freeze so quickly in winter.

Door lock cylinders

The door lock cylinders

To de-ice the lock cylinders y

anti-corrosive properties.

Cleaning chrome parts

1. Clean chrome parts wi

2. Polish chrome parts w

Cleaning and caring for your vehicle204

s

st from alloy wheels.

ent to clean the wheel rims.

ound to the wheels.

ttention to preserve their appearance. If road

ten removed, the aluminium finish will be

ent for alloy wheel rims.

ents should not be used. If the protective

tone impact, the damaged area should be

ylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances ible and invisible damage can occur to the

ident.

brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of ing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry and braking distancethe brakes by braking

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 204 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

If this does not provide satisfying results, use a specialist chrome cleaning product. Chrome cleaning products will remove stains and coatings from the

surface.

Caution To prevent scratching chrome surfaces:

Never use an abrasive care product on chrome.

Do not clean or polish chrome parts in a sandy or dusty environment.

Steel wheel rims

Clean steel wheel rims regularly using a separate sponge.

Use an industrial cleanser to remove brake dust. Any damage to the paint on

steel wheel rims should be repaired before starting to rust.

WARNING

Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances and short cleaning times, visible and invisible damage can occur to the tyres. This may cause an accident.

Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of accident. Directly after washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry page 190, Braking effect and braking distancethe brakes by braking several times.

Cleaning alloy wheel rim

Every two weeks

Wash salt and brake du

Use an acid free deterg

Every three months

Apply a hard wax comp

Alloy wheels require regular a

salt and brake dust are not of

impaired.

Always use an acid-free deterg

Car polish or other abrasive ag

coating is damaged, e.g. by s

repaired immediately.

WARNING

Never wash tyres with a c and short cleaning times, vis tyres. This may cause an acc

Water, ice and salt on the accident. Directly after wash page 190, Braking effect several times.

Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 205

Safety Fir Technical Data

is usually removed if the engine compartment

ing solutions, or if you have the engine cleaned.

k, ensure that all surfaces, seams, joints and

mpartment are given anti-corrosion treatment.

ine compartment, always observe the safety

et, switch the engine off, apply the parking ove the key from the ignition.

before you clean the engine compartment.

underbody, wheel arches without protecting ay cut yourself on sharp-edged metal parts. lt in injury.

the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk shing, avoid sudden and sharp braking.

fan. It is temperature-controlled and could en the key is removed from the ignition!

nvironment could be removed when the engine is washed.

leaned in an oil separator. For this reason,

rried out only by a qualified workshop or a petrol

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 205 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Underbody sealant

The vehicle underbody is coated to protect it from chemical

and mechanical damage.

The protective coating can be damaged when driving. We recommend you to

ckeck the protective coating under the body and on the running gear, and

reinstated if necessary, before and after the winter season.

We recommend you to go to your Authorised Service Centre to carry out repair

work and additional anti-corrosion work.

WARNING

Do not apply underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic converter or the heat shields on the exhaust system. The heat of the exhaust system or the engine could cause them to ignite! Fire hazard.

Cleaning the engine compartment

Take special care when cleaning the engine compartment.

Anti-corrosion treatment

The engine compartment and the surface of the power unit are given anti-

corrosion treatment at the factory.

Good corrosion protection is particularly important in winter when the car is

frequently driven on salted roads. To prevent the salt corroding the vehicle,

the entire engine compartment should be thoroughly cleaned before and

after winter.

Your Authorised Service Centre has got the necessary equipment to provide

the correct cleaning and preserving products. For this reason, we recommend

having this work performed by them.

The anti-corrosion protection

is cleaned with grease remov

On commissioning theis wor

components in the engine co

WARNING

When working in the eng warnings page 213.

Before opening the bonn brake firmly and always rem

Allow the engine to cool

Do not clean the vehicle your hands and arms. You m Failure to comply could resu

Moisture, ice and salt on of accident. Directly after wa

Never touch the radiator start automatically, even wh

For the sake of the e Fuel, grease and oil deposits

The polluted water must be c

engine washing should be ca

station.

Cleaning and caring for your vehicle206

bric trim cleaning

m on the doors, headlining etc. can be cleaned

r or with dry foam and a soft brush.

climate controls

ate controls, use a soft damp cloth. For more

olution may be used.

ollen cloth with water and wipe over the

be removed using a mild soap solution

ablespoons diluted in one litre of water)

k through the leather or soak into the

ft, dry cloth.

reated twice a year with a special leather-

in your Authorised Service Centre.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 206 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Vehicle interior maintenance

Plastic parts and dash panel cleaning

Use a clean, damp cloth to clean plastic parts and the dash

panel.

If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a special

solvent-free plastic cleaning product.

WARNING

Never clean the dash panel and the airbag module surface with cleansers containing solvents. Solvents cause the surface to become porous. If the airbag triggered, disintegrating plastic parts could cause substantial inju- ries.

Caution Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.

Wooden trim cleaning*

Clean the wooden trim with a water-moistened clean cloth.

If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a gentle soap

solution.

Caution Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.

Cloth seat covers and fa

Cloth seat covers and fabric tri

with a special interior cleanse

Cleaning the radio and

To clean the radio and/or clim

resistant dirt, a neutral soap s

Leather cleaning*

Normal cleaning

Moisten a cotton or wo

leather surfaces.

Cleaning stubborn stains

More stubborn dirt can

(pure liquid soap; two t

and a cloth.

Do not let the water soa

seams.

Then wipe off with a so

Leather maintenance

The leather should be t

care product, available

Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 207

Safety Fir Technical Data

lt up until it is dry.

ts, it will not retract correctly into the automatic

ning agents on the seat belts, as this can ebbing. Ensure that belts do not come into .

ition at regular intervals. If you notice that the ctor mechanism or buckle of any of the belts is replaced by a specialist workshop.

a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts ified in any way.

ts to dry completely before rolling them up.

could become damaged.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 207 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Apply these products very sparingly.

Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth.

SEAT does everything possible to preserve the genuine qualities of this

natural product. Due to the natural properties of the specially selected hides

employed, the finished leather has a certain sensitivity to grease and dirt, etc.

so a degree of care is required in everyday use and when looking after the

leather.

Dust and grit in the pores and seams can scratch and damage the surface. If

the vehicle is under solar radiation for long periods, the leather should be

protected to prevent it from fading. However, slight colour variations in high-

quality natural leather are normal.

Caution Do not use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, spot removers or similar

products on leather.

To avoid damage, stubborn stains should be removed by a qualified

workshop.

Seat belts cleaning

A dirty belt may not work properly.

Check all seat belts regularly and keep them clean.

Seat belts cleaning

Pull the dirty seat belt right out and unroll it.

Clean the dirty seat belts with a gentle soap solution.

Allow it to dry.

Do not roll the seat be

If large stains form on the bel

belt retractor.

WARNING

Do not use chemical clea impair the strength of the w contact with corrosive fluids

Check all seat belts cond belt webbing, fittings, retra damaged, the belt must be

Do not attempt to repair must not be removed or mod

Caution After cleaning, allow seat bel

Otherwise, the belt retractors

Accessories, parts replacement and modifications208

r the CE mark (European Union manufacturer

phone holders or drink holders, should never ithin the working range of the airbags. Other- ry if the airbag is triggered in an accident.

tions

ys be carried out according to our

the electronic components or software in the

ns. Due to the way the electronic components

s, other indirect systems may be affected by the

ir safety, lead to excessive wear of compo-

r vehicle registration documents.

es cannot be held liable for any damage

or work incorrectly performed.

d you that all work should be performed by an

ng genuine and SEAT approved parts and

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 208 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Accessories, parts replacement and modifications

Accessories and parts

Always consult an Authorised Service Centre before

purchasing accessories and parts.

Your vehicle is designed to offer a high standard of active and passive safety.

Before purchasing accessories and parts, and before making technical

changes to your car, we recommend you to consult your Authorised Service

Centre.

SEAT dealerships will be happy to provide you with the latest information

about the use, legal requirements and recommendations from the manufac-

turer regarding accessories and parts.

We recommend you use only SEAT Approved Accessories and SEAT Approved Spare Parts. This way, SEAT can guarantee that the product in

question is suitable, reliable and safe. SEAT Authorised Service Centres have

the necessary experience and facilities to ensure that parts are correctly and

professionally installed.

Despite a continuous observation of the market, SEAT is not able to assess

the reliability, safety and suitability of those parts SEAT has not approved. For

this reason, SEAT cannot assume responsibility for any non-genuine parts

used, even if these parts have been approved by an official testing agency or

are covered by an official approval certificate.

Any equipment subsequently installed which has a direct effect on the

vehicle and/or the way it is driven (e.g. cruise control system or electronically-

controlled suspension) must be approved by SEAT and bear the e mark (the

European Union's authorisation symbol).

If any additional electrical components are fitted so that they do not serve to

control the vehicle itself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop or ventilator

fan, etc.), then they must bea

conformity declaration).

WARNING

Accessories, for example tele be fitted on the covers of, or w wise, there is a danger of inju

Technical modifica

Modifications must alwa

specifications.

Unauthorised modifications to

vehicle may cause malfunctio

are linked together in network

faults. This can seriously impa

nents, and also invalidate you

SEAT Authorised Service Centr

caused by modifications and/

For this reason, we recommen

Authorised Service Centre usi

accessories.

Accessories, parts replacement and modifications 209

Safety Fir Technical Data

arily on driving. If you are distracted while cident.

ne mountings to the surfaces covering the nge of the airbags. There is a high danger of ed.

instructions of your mobile telephone / two-way

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 209 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

WARNING

Incorrectly performed modifications or other kind of work on your vehicle can lead to malfunctions and cause accidents.

Roof aerial*

The vehicle may be fitted with a foldable* and anti-theft* aerial that may be

positioned parallel to the roof.

To fold down

Unscrew the rod, position parallel to the roof and tighten once again.

To return to working position

Continue in the reverse order to the previous instruction.

Caution If an automatic car wash tunnel is used, before entering the tunnel, put the

aerial down parallel to the roof and do not tighten to avoid damage.

Mobile telephones and radiotelephones

First consult your Authorised Service Centre if you wish to use a mobile tele-

phone or a two-way radio with a transmitting power output in excess of

10 watts. Here you will receive information concerning the technical possibil-

ities for retrofitting this equipment.

Mobile telephones and two-way radios should be only fitted by a qualified

workshop, for example an Authorised Service Centre.

WARNING

Always concentrate prim driving you could have an ac

Never attach the telepho airbag units or within the ra injury if the airbag is trigger

Note Please observe the operating

radio.

Checking and refilling levels210

e right, until the point of feeling a click.

, without unscrewing the cap, clockwise

se the flap until it clicks into place. The

h an anti-loss attachment

he vehicle on the right.

operated correctly, it will switch itself off as

er attempt to fill beyond this point, as this will

el may leak out if ambient conditions are warm.

vehicle is given on a sticker on the inside of the

n fuel can be found.

e and can cause serious burns and other inju-

y naked flame when filling the fuel tank of the nister, with fuel. This is an explosion hazard.

nts for the use of spare fuel canisters.

do not recommend carrying a spare fuel e canister could be damaged in an accident

ances, you have to carry a spare fuel canister, points:

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 210 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Checking and refilling levels

Refuelling

The tank flap is released manually. The tank holds approxi-

mately 55 litres. For four-wheel drive vehicles, the tank

capacity is approximately 60 litres.

Unscrewing the tank cap

Lift the lid.

Grip the cap and then insert the key into the lock and rotate 180

to the left.

Unscrew the cap, turning it anti-clockwise.

Closing the tank cap

Screw the tank cap to th

Turn the key in the lock

through 180.

Remove the key and clo

tank cap is secured wit

The tank flap is at the rear of t

If the automatic filler nozzle is

soon as the tank is full. Nev

fill the expansion chamber. Fu

The correct fuel grade for your

fuel tank flap. Further notes o

WARNING

Fuel is highly inflammabl ries.

Never smoke or use an vehicle, or a spare fuel ca

Follow legal requireme

For safety reasons we canister in the vehicle. Th and leak.

If, in exceptional circumst please observe the following

Fig. 155 Tank flap open

Checking and refilling levels 211

Safety Fir Technical Data

are listed on a sticker inside the fuel

ponding to the standard DIN EN 228, may be

ic converters (EN = European Standard).

by the octane rating, e.g: 91, 95, 98 RON (RON

r, unit for determining the knock resistance of

ith a higher octane number than the one recom-

ever, this has no advantage in terms of fuel

er.

or your vehicle is specified in your engine tech-

l Data.

may be mixed with small quantities of ethanol.

thanol fuels available at commercial establish-

85, which contain a high percentage of ethanol,

l damage the fuel system.

d fuel would permanently impair the efficiency

ll throttle can damage the engine when using

ower than the correct grade for the engine.

nvironment el would seriously impair the efficiency of the

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 211 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Never fill the spare fuel canister inside the vehicle or on it. An elec- trostatic charge could build up during filling, causing the fuel fumes to ignite. This may be fatally explosive. Always place the canister on the ground to fill it.

Insert the fuel nozzle into the mouth of the canister as far as possible.

If the spare fuel canister is made of metal, the filling nozzle must be in contact with the canister during filling. This helps prevent an electro- static charge building up.

Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the luggage compartment. Fuel vapours are explosive. Danger of death.

Caution Fuel spills should be removed from the paintwork immediately.

Never run the tank completely dry. An irregular fuel supply could cause

misfiring. As a result, unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and

cause damage.

For the sake of the environment Do not try to put in more fuel after the automatic filler nozzle has switched off;

this may cause the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.

Petrol

Petrol types

The correct petrol types

tank flap.

Only unleaded petrol, corres used for vehicles with catalyt

Fuel types are differentiated

= Regulation Octane Numbe

petrol). You may use petrol w

mended for your engine. How

consumption and engine pow

The appropriate type of fuel f

nical table. Section Technica

Caution Petrol that follows EN 228

However, the so-called bioe

ments with reference E50 or E

may not be used, as they wil

Even one tankful of leade

of the catalytic converter.

High engine speed and fu

petrol with an octane rating l

For the sake of the e Just one full tank of leaded fu

catalytic converter.

WARNING (continued)

Checking and refilling levels212

e can also be consulted to know if the vehicle

el use.

l (biodiesel)

cle using biodiesel maybe somewhat reduced.

icle using biodiesel may be slightly higher.

cold down to approx. -10C.

C, we recommend using winter diesel fuel.

be refuelled with up to a maximum of 7%

ce with standard DIN 51628.

fuel system in vehicles which are not suitably

sel in your vehicle, please use only RME fuel

nt.

oes not meet the required standard, the fuel

peratures and a fuel biodiesel percentage of

in gas emission may occur during operation of

clogged when fuel is changed to biodiesel. For

u that, when having run 300 or 400 km after a

nge must also be done. Also note the instruc-

intenance plan.

arked for more than about two weeks, we

k with biodiesel and driving about 50 km in

injection system.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 212 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Petrol additives

Petrol additives improve the quality of the petrol.

The quality of the petrol influences running behaviour, performance and

service life of the engine. For this reason, you should use good quality petrol

containing additives. These additives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the

fuel system clean and prevent deposits from building up in the engine.

If good quality petrol with additives is not available or engine problems occur,

the required additives must be added during refuelling.

Diesel

Diesel*

Diesel fuel must correspond to DIN EN 590 (EN = European standard). It

must have a cetane number (CN) of at least 51. The cetane number indicates

the ignition quality of the diesel fuel.

Notes on filling with fuel page 210.

Biodiesel*

The biodiesel fuel must comply with the DIN EN 14.214 (FAME) Standard.

Biodiesel is a methylester obtained from rapeseed oil.

DIN is the German abbreviation for Deutsches Institut fr Normung e.V.,

the German standards institute.

EN means European Norm.

FAME is the English abbreviation for Fatty Acid Methyl Ester.

Your Authorised Service Centr

has been prepared for biodies

Things to note about RME fue

The performance of a vehi

Fuel consumption of a veh

RME fuel is resistant to the

At temperatures below -10

Your vehicle is designed to

blended biodiesel in accordan

Caution RME fuel can damage the

adjusted.

If you decide to use biodie

which is DIN E 14,214 complia

If you use biodiesel that d

filter could become clogged.

Note In case of low exterior tem

higher than 50%, an increase

the independent heating.

The fuel filter may become

this reason, we recommend yo

fuel change, the fuel filter cha

tions in the Inspection and Ma

If the vehicle is to remain p

recommend filling the fuel tan

order to avoid damage to the

Checking and refilling levels 213

Safety Fir Technical Data

gine compartment

working in the engine compartment

the engine compartment or on the

out cautiously.

n the engine or in the engine compart-

nd remove the key from the ignition.

neutral or the selector lever to position P.

cool down.

m the vehicle.

ge 215.

n the engine compartment unless you know

obs and have the correct tools! Have the work

rkshop if you are uncertain.

ables, e.g. coolant, engine oil, spark plugs and

ly developed. SEAT provides a constant flow of

Service Centres concerning modifications. For

ou to have service fluids and consumables

rvice Centre. Please observe the relevant

e engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 213 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Winter driving

Diesel can thicken in winter.

Winter-grade diesel

When using summer-grade diesel fuel, difficulties may be experienced at

sub-zero temperatures because the fuel thickens due to wax separation.

Therefore, winter-grade diesel fuel is available in some countries during

the cold months. It can be used at temperatures as low as -22C.

In countries with different climatic conditions the diesel fuel generally sold

has different temperature characteristics. Check with an Authorised Service

Centre or filling stations in the country concerned regarding the type of diesel

fuels available.

Filter pre-heater

Your vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter pre-heater, making it well equipped for

operation in winter. This ensures that the fuel system remains operational to

approx. -24C, provided you use winter-grade diesel which is safe to -15C.

However, if the fuel has waxed to such an extent that the engine will not start

at temperatures of under -24C, simply place the vehicle in a warm place for

a while.

Caution Do not mix fuel additives (thinners, or similar additives) with diesel fuel.

Working in the en

Safety instructions on

Any work carried out in

engine must be carried

Before starting any work o

ment:

1. Switch off the engine a

2. Apply the handbrake.

3. Move the gear stick to

4. Wait for the engine to

5. Keep children away fro

6. Raise the bonnet pa

You should not do any work i

exactly how to carry out the j

carried out by a qualified wo

All service fluids and consum

batteries, are being constant

information to the Authorised

this reason, we recommend y

replaced by an Authorised Se

instructions page 208. Th

hazardous area .

Checking and refilling levels214

ormed when the engine is started or with the ditional, potentially fatal, safety risk from the ive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., and n system. You should also observe the

cal wiring of the ignition system.

loose clothing and long hair do not get e parts. Danger of death. Before starting any e back and cover hair, and wear tight-fitting

about pressing the accelerator if a gear is matic or manual gearbox. The vehicle could

ake is applied. Danger of death.

ut on the fuel system or on electrical compo- ollowing safety notes in addition to the above

battery. The vehicle must be unlocked when e alarm will be triggered.

flames.

nguisher on hand.

service fluids, make absolutely certain that you

servoirs. Failure to observe this point will result

ngine damage!

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 214 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

WARNING

All work on the engine or in the engine compartment, e.g. checking and refilling fluids, involves the danger of injury and scalding as well as the risk of accident or fire.

Never open the bonnet if you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping from the engine compartment. Otherwise, there is a risk of sustaining burns. Wait until no more steam or coolant is emitted, then allow the engine to cool before carefully opening the bonnet.

Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.

Apply the handbrake and move the gear stick to neutral or selector lever to position P.

Keep children away from the vehicle.

Never touch hot engine parts. There is a risk of burns.

Never spill liquids on a hot engine or on a hot exhaust gas system. This is a fire hazard.

Avoid causing short-circuits in the electrical system, particularly at the points where the jump leads are attached page 263. The battery could explode.

Never touch the radiator fan. It is temperature controlled and could start automatically, even when the engine has been switched off and the key removed from the ignition!

Do not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot. If the coolant is hot, the cooling system will be pressurised!

Protect face, hands and arms by covering the cap with a large, thick cloth to protect against escaping coolant and steam.

Always make sure you have not left any objects, such as cleaning cloths and tools, in the engine compartment.

If you have to work underneath the vehicle, you must use suitable stands additionally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of accident!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient for securing the vehicle and there is a risk of injury.

If any work has to be perf engine running, there is an ad rotating parts, such as the dr from the high-voltage ignitio following points:

Never touch the electri

Ensure that jewellery, trapped in rotating engin work remove jewellery, ti clothes.

Always think carefully engaged in either an auto move, even if the handbr

If work has to be carried o nents, you must observe the f warnings:

Always disconnect the this is done, otherwise th

Do not smoke.

Never work near naked

Always have a fire exti

Caution When changing or topping up

fill the fluids into the correct re

in serious malfunctions and e

WARNING (continued)

Checking and refilling levels 215

Safety Fir Technical Data

t ensure that the windscreen wipers are in

pull the lever under the dashboard

tion indicated (arrow). The bonnet will be

ction .

he release lever (arrow) and open the

y and secure it in fixture designed for this

f you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping nt.

Fig. 157 Arrester hook for bonnet.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 215 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

For the sake of the environment Service fluids leaks are harmful to the environment. For this reason you

should make regular checks on the ground underneath your vehicle. If you

find spots of oil or other fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a qualified

workshop.

Opening the bonnet

The bonnet is released from inside the vehicle.

Before opening the bonne

rest position.

To release the bonnet,

fig. 156 in the direc

released by a spring a

Lift the bonnet using t

bonnet.

Release the bonnet sta

in the bonnet.

WARNING

Hot coolant can scald!

Never open the bonnet i from the engine compartme

Fig. 156 Detail of foot- well area on driver's side: lever for unlocking the bonnet.

Checking and refilling levels216

s

st conform with exact specifications.

ial, high quality, multi grade oil that can be

r except for those regions affected by extreme

s essential for the correct operation of the

, when topping up or replacement is necessary

rm to the requirements of the VW standards.

onforming to the VW standards then oil

I standards with an appropriate viscosity at

uld be used instead. The use of this type of oil

on the performance of the engine for example,

consumption and a higher emission level.

ferent oils may be mixed as long as they all

rds) set out in the following page should

service oil; the container will display together

rol and diesel engines, the oil can be used for

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 216 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Wait until no more steam, smoke or coolant is emitted from the bonnet, then carefully open the bonnet.

When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 213.

Closing the bonnet

Raise the bonnet slightly.

Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its support.

At a height of about 30 cm let it fall so it is locked.

If the bonnet does not close, do not press downwards. Open it once more and

let it fall as before.

WARNING

If the bonnet is not closed properly, it could open while you are driving and completely obscure your view of the road. Risk of accident.

After closing the bonnet, always check that it is properly secured. The bonnet must be flush with the surrounding body panels.

If you notice that the bonnet latch is not secured when the vehicle is moving, stop the vehicle immediately and close the bonnet properly. Risk of accident.

Engine oil

Engine oil specification

The engine oil used mu

Specifications

The engine comes with a spec

used in all seasons of the yea

cold.

As the use of high quality oil i

engine and its long useful life

use only those oils that confo

If it is not possible to find oil c

conforming to the ACEA or AP

atmospheric temperature sho

may have some repercussions

long starting time, increased

If a top up is required then dif

conform to the VW standards.

The specifications (VW standa

appear on the container of the

the different standards for pet

both types of engines.

WARNING (continued)

Checking and refilling levels 217

Safety Fir Technical Data

climate that is constantly very cold or very

mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration

not covered by the warranty.

end finding an engine oil that conforms to the

ions and keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the

be available for a top-up if needed.

il level

indicates the level of the oil.

Fig. 159 Engine oil dipstick.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 217 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Oil properties

Viscosity

The viscosity class of the oil is selected according to the diagram.

When the ambient temperature falls outside the limits of the scale for a short

period, an oil change is not required.

Mono-grade oil

Single grade oils are generally not suitable for all year round use, due to

ranges of viscosity21).

These oils are only useful in a

warm.

Engine oil additives

No type of additive should be

caused by these additives is

Note Before a long trip, we recomm

corresponding VW specificat

correct engine oil will always

Checking the engine o

The engine oil dipstick

Engine type Specification

Petrol VW 501 01/ VW 502 00/ VW 504 00

Diesel VW 505 01/ VW 507 00/ VW 506 01

Diesel Engines with Particulate filter

(DPF)a)

a) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the engine.

VW 507 00

Fig. 158 Types of oil according to temperature

21) Viscosity: oil density

Checking and refilling levels218

a do not start the engine. This could result

catalytic converter. Contact an Authorised

all quantities of oil.

, read and observe the warnings in

rking in the engine compartment on

ller opening fig. 160.

unts, using the correct oil.

AA

Fig. 160 In the engine compartment: Engine oil filler cap

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 218 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Checking oil level

Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the service temperature

is reached then stop.

Wait two minutes.

Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and

insert it again, pushing it in as far as it will go.

Then pull it out once more and check the oil level page 217,

fig. 159. Top up with engine oil if necessary.

Oil level in area

Do not add oil.

Oil level in area

Oil can be topped up. The indicated oil level should be after zone

Oil level in area

Oil must be topped up. The indicated oil level should be after in zone .

Depending on how you drive and the conditions in which the car is used, oil

consumption can be up to 0.5 l/1,000 km. Oil consumption is likely to be

higher for the first 5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level must be

checked at regular intervals, preferably when filling the tank and before a

journey.

WARNING

Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously.

When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 213

Caution If the oil level is above the are

in damage to the engine and

Service Centre.

Topping up engine oil

Top up gradually with sm

Before opening the bonnet

Safety instructions on wo

page 213.

Unscrew cap from oil fi

Top-up oil in small amo

AA

AB

AA

AC

AA

Checking and refilling levels 219

Safety Fir Technical Data

changed at the intervals given in the

e the engine oil changed by an Authorised

hown in the Maintenance Programme .

if you have the specialist knowledge required!

et, read and observe the warnings tions on working in the engine compartment.

ol down. Hot oil may cause burn injuries.

void injuries caused by splashes of oil.

rain plug with your fingers, keep your arm hori- m running down your arm.

ly if it comes into contact with engine oil.

Used oil must be stored in a safe place out of is disposed of.

with engine oil. This could result in engine

by the use of such additives would not be

ty.

nvironment roblems, the necessary special tools and

d, we recommend that you have the engine oil

orised Service Centre.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 219 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

To avoid over-filling with engine oil, you should top-up using

small quantities, wait a while and check the oil level before

adding any more oil.

As soon as the oil level is in area , carefully close the cap.

The position of the oil filler opening is shown in the corresponding engine

compartment diagram page 273.

Engine oil specification page 216.

WARNING

Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil comes into contact with hot engine components when topping up.

Caution If the oil level is above the area do not start the engine. This could result

in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact a qualified work-

shop.

For the sake of the environment The oil level must never be above area . Otherwise oil can be drawn in

through the crankcase breather and escape into the atmosphere via the

exhaust system.

Changing engine oil

The engine oil must be

service schedule.

We recommend that you hav

Service Centre.

The oil change intervals are s

WARNING

Only change the oil yourself

Before opening the bonn page 213, Safety instruc

Wait for the engine to co

Wear eye protection to a

When removing the oil d zontal to help prevent oil fro

Wash your skin thorough

Engine oil is poisonous! the reach of children until it

Caution No additives should be used

damage. Any damage caused

covered by the factory warran

For the sake of the e Because of the disposal p

specialist knowledge require

and filter changed by an Auth

AB

AA

AA

Checking and refilling levels220

+ must be added in sufficient quantities to n at the coldest ambient temperatures that ly cold ambient temperatures, the coolant icle to breakdown. As the heater would also

ere is a risk of suffering exposure!

onsiderably inferior corrosion protection. The

ing system can lead to a loss of coolant,

e engine.

(purple) can be mixed with the additive G 12

(red colour) with G 11.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 220 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Never pour oil down drains or into the ground.

Use a suitable container when draining the used oil. It has to be large

enough to hold all the engine oil

Coolant

Coolant specifications

Coolant is a mixture of water and at least 40% coolant addi-

tive.

The cooling system must be filled with a mixture of water and at least 40 % of

our coolant additive G 12+ or an additive with the specification TT-VW 774 F

(it is dyed purple). This mixture gives the necessary frost protection down to

-25 C and protects the alloy parts of the cooling system against corrosion. It

also prevents scaling and raises the boiling point of the coolant.

The concentration of coolant must always be at least 40% - even if frost

protection is not required.

If greater frost protection is required in very cold climates, the proportion of

the antifreeze additive G 12+ can be increased. However, the percentage of

coolant additives should not exceed 60%, as this would reduce the frost

protection. It would also reduce the cooling effect. A mixture with 60%

coolant additive will give frost protection to approx. -40 C.

WARNING

The coolant additive is toxic. There is a toxic risk. Always keep the coolant additive in the original container which should be stored out of the reach of children. The same applies to coolant which you have drained off.

The coolant additive G 12 provide anti-freeze protectio can be expected. At extreme could freeze, causing the veh not work in this situation, th

Caution Other additives may give c

resulting corrosion in the cool

causing serious damage to th

The coolant additive G 12+

(red) or G 11. Never mix G12

WARNING (continued)

Checking and refilling levels 221

Safety Fir Technical Data

th the MIN mark, top up with coolant.

AX mark.

sion tank

n tightly.

pansion reservoir is shown in the corresponding

page 273.

eets the required specifications page 220.

additive if coolant additive G 12+ is not avail-

ter and bring the coolant concentration back up

s possible by putting in the specified additive

nt.

ark. Otherwise the excess coolant will be forced

en the engine is hot.

yed purple) may be mixed with G 12 (dyed red)

engine compartment or on the engine must be

ine compartment, always observe the safety

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 221 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Checking the coolant level and topping up

The correct coolant level is important for fault-free func-

tioning of the engine cooling system.

Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings in

Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment on

page 213.

Opening the coolant expansion tank

Switch off the engine and allow it to cool.

To prevent scalding, cover the cap on the expansion tank with a

thick cloth and carefully unscrew the cap .

Checking coolant level

Look into the open coolant expansion tank and read off the

coolant level.

If the level is undernea

Topping up coolant

Only use new coolant.

Do not fill above the M

Closing the coolant expan

Screw the cap on agai

The position of the coolant ex

engine compartment diagram

Make sure that the coolant m

Do not use a different type of

able. In this case use only wa

to the correct level as soon a

page 220.

Always top up with new coola

Do not fill above the MAX m

out of the cooling system wh

The coolant additive G 12+ (d

and also with G 11.

WARNING

Any work carried out in the carried out cautiously.

When working in the eng warnings page 213.

Fig. 161 In the engine compartment: Coolant expansion tank cap

Checking and refilling levels222

windscreen wiper blades

he windscreen should always be

.

e headlight washing system are supplied with

her fluid container in the engine compartment.

right-hand side of the engine compartment.

ean the windscreen and headlights. We recom-

roduct to the windscreen washer fluid.

g products exist on the market with high deter-

s, these may be added all-year-round. Please

s on the packaging.

Fig. 162 In the engine compartment: Cap of windscreen washer fluid reservoir.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 222 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

When the engine is warm or hot, the cooling system is pressurised! Do not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot. This is a burn injury risk.

Caution When mixed with other additives the colour of G 12 will change to brown.

If this occurs you should have the coolant changed immediately. Failure to do

so will result in engine damage!

If a lot of coolant has been lost, wait for the engine to cool down before

putting in cold coolant. This avoids damaging the engine. Large coolant

losses are an indication of leaks in the cooling system. See a specialised

workshop immediately and have the cooling system checked. Otherwise,

there is a risk of engine damage.

Washer fluid and

Topping up washer fluid

The water for cleaning t

mixed with washer fluid

The windscreen washer and th

fluid from the windscreen was

The reservoir is located on the

Plain water is not enough to cl

mend that you always add a p

Approved windscreen cleanin

gent and anti-freeze propertie

follow the dilution instruction

WARNING (continued)

Checking and refilling levels 223

Safety Fir Technical Data

iper blades

blades are in perfect condition, you

roved visibility. Damaged wiper

ced immediately.

Fig. 163 Windscreen wipers in the service posi- tion

Fig. 164 Changing the front wiper blades

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 223 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

WARNING

Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously.

When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 213.

Caution Never put radiator anti-freeze or other additives into the windscreen

washer fluid.

Always use approved windscreen cleansing products diluted as per

instructions. If you use other washer fluids or soap solutions, the tiny holes

in the fan-shaped nozzles could become blocked.

Changing windscreen w

If the windscreen wiper

will benefit from an imp

blades should be repla

Checking and refilling levels224

good visibility through all windows!

er blades and all windows regularly.

be changed once or twice a year.

en wipers could scratch the windscreen.

h remover, paint thinner or similar products to

damage the windscreen wiper blades.

n wiper or windscreen wiper arm manually. This

wipers forward unless they are in the service

t could be damaged.

ved to the service position only when the

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 224 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

To change the blades it is necessary to change the rest position of

the wipers to the service position.

Service position (For changing wiper blades)

Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.

Turn ignition on and off and then (before approx. 8 seconds have

elapsed), move the windscreen wiper lever to the intermittent

wipe position. The windscreen wipers will move to the service

position.

Changing the windscreen wiper blades

Lift the wiper arm away from the windscreen.

Push the side buttons, free the blade and pull in the direction of

the arrow fig. 164.

Fitting the wiper blade

Insert a blade of identical length and design into the wiper arm.

Slide the blade until it clicks into position.

Push the wiper arms back against the windscreen.

The windscreen wiper arms return to their original position when the ignition

is turned on and the windscreen wiper lever is operated, or when driving

faster than 6 km/h.

If the windscreen wipers smear, they should be replaced if they are damaged,

or cleaned if they are soiled.

If this does not produce the desired results, the setting angle of the wind-

screen wiper arms might be incorrect. They should be checked by a qualified

workshop and corrected if necessary.

WARNING

Do not drive unless you have

Clean the windscreen wip

The wiper blades should

Caution Damaged or dirty windscre

Never use fuel, nail varnis

clean the windows. This could

Never move the windscree

could cause damage.

Do not pull the windscreen

position. Otherwise the bonne

Note The wiper arms can be mo

bonnet is properly closed.

Checking and refilling levels 225

Safety Fir Technical Data

y from the glass page 225, fig. 165.

r in the direction of the arrow and remove

, fig. 165.

e top end of the wiper arm.

wn in the page 225, fig. 166 and slide

l it fits into place.

iper blade regularly. Change as required.

es, it should be replaced if damaged, or cleaned

o a qualified workshop.

e good visibility through all windows!

per blades and all windows regularly.

be changed once or twice a year.

w wiper could scratch the rear window.

h remover, paint thinner or similar products to

en wiper by hand. This could cause damage.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 225 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Changing the rear wiper blade

A good rear wiper blade is essential for clear rear vision.

Damaged wiper blades should be replaced immediately.

Removing the wiper blade

Lift the wiper arm awa

Slide the blade adapte

the blade page 225

Fitting the wiper blade

With one hand, hold th

Place the blade as sho

the adapter along unti

Check the condition of the w

If the windscreen wiper scrap if soiled.

If this is not sufficient, refer t

WARNING

Do not drive unless you hav

Clean the windscreen wi

The wiper blades should

Caution A damaged or dirty windo

Never use fuel, nail varnis

clean the window.

Never move the windscre

Fig. 165 Remove rear window wiper blade

Fig. 166 Mount rear window wiper blade

Checking and refilling levels226

n noticeably in a short time, or drops below the

ak in the brake system. A display on the instru-

e brake fluid level is too low page 73.

check the brake fluid level, read and observe

d

m indicates the brake fluid change

the brake fluid changed by an Authorised

lease read and follow the warnings in

g in the engine compartment on page 213 in

rtment.

In the course of time, it will absorb water from

ntent in the brake fluid is too high, the brake

o considerably reduces the boiling point of the

rakes may then cause a vapour lock which

t.

ly brake fluid compliant with the US standard

end the use of Genuine SEAT brake fluid.

brake fluid impairs the braking effect.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 226 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Brake fluid

Checking the brake fluid level

The brake fluid is checked at the intervals given in the service

schedule.

Read off the fluid level at the transparent brake fluid reservoir. It

should always be between the MIN and MAX marks.

The position of the brake fluid reservoir is shown in the corresponding engine

compartment diagram page 273. The brake fluid reservoir has a black and

yellow cap.

The brake fluid level drops slightly when the vehicle is being used as the

brake pads are automatically adjusted as they wear.

However, if the level goes dow

MIN mark, there may be a le

ment panel will warn you if th

WARNING

Before opening the bonnet to the warnings page 213.

Changing the brake flui

The Maintenance Progra

intervals.

We recommend that you have

Service Centre.

Before opening the bonnet, p

Safety instructions on workin

Working in the engine compa

Brake fluid absorbs moisture.

the ambient air. If the water co

system could corrode. This als

brake fluid. Heavy use of the b

could impair the braking effec

It is important that you use on

FMVSS 116 DOT 4. We recomm

WARNING

Brake fluid is poisonous. Old

Fig. 167 In the engine compartment: Brake fluid reservoir cover

Checking and refilling levels 227

Safety Fir Technical Data

the battery

er of injury and chemical burns as well as the working on the battery and the electrical

tect your eyes, skin and clothing from acid and

sive and caustic. Wear protective gloves and e batteries. This could spill acid through the m eyes immediately for several minutes with cal care immediately. Neutralize any acid hing with a soapy solution, and rinse off with allowed by mistake, consult a doctor immedi-

ts and smoking are prohibited. When handling ent, avoid causing sparks and electrostatic

tection

s very corrosive and caustic. Wear protective

ye protection!

, naked lights and smoking are prohibited!

osive mixture of gases is released when the

er charge.

away from acid and batteries!

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 227 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Before opening the bonnet to check the brake fluid level, read and observe the warnings page 213.

Brake fluid should be stored in the closed original container in a safe place out of reach of children. There is a toxic risk.

Complete the brake fluid change according to the Maintenance Program. Heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid is left in the system for too long. This would seriously affect the efficiency of the brakes and the safety of the vehicle. This may cause an accident.

Caution Brake fluid could damage the paintwork. Wipe off any brake fluid from the

paintwork immediately.

For the sake of the environment Brake fluid must be drained and disposed of in the proper manner observing

environmental regulations.

Battery

Warnings on handling

WARNING

Always be aware of the dang risk of accident or fire when system:

Wear eye protection. Pro particles containing lead.

Battery acid is very corro eye protection. Do not tilt th vents. Rinse battery acid fro clear water. Then seek medi splashes on the skin or clot plenty of water. If acid is sw ately.

Fires, sparks, naked ligh cables and electrical equipm

WARNING (continued)

Wear eye pro

Battery acid i

gloves and e

Fires, sparks

A highly expl

battery is und

Keep children

Checking and refilling levels228

ng in cold conditions for a long period, protect

ezes it will be damaged.

e level

uld be checked regularly in high-

countries and in older batteries.

en the battery cover at the front in

working in the engine compartment on

rnings on handling the battery on

y in the "magic eye" on the top of the

n the window, tap the window gently until

hown in the corresponding engine compart-

e) on the top of the battery changes colour,

l and electrolyte level of the battery.

olourless or bright yellow, the electrolyte level

the battery checked by a qualified workshop.

re used by the workshops for diagnostic

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 228 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

charge. Never short the battery terminals. High-energy sparks can cause injury.

A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery is under charge. The batteries should be charged in a well-ventilated room only.

Keep children away from acid and batteries.

Before working on the electrical system, you must switch off the engine, the ignition and all consumers. The negative cable on the battery must be disconnected. When a light bulb is changed, you need only switch off the light.

Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by unlocking the vehicle before you disconnect the battery! The alarm will otherwise be triggered.

When disconnecting the battery from the vehicle electrical system, disconnect first the negative cable and then the positive cable.

Switch off all electrical consumers before reconnecting the battery. Reconnect first the positive cable and then the negative cable. Never reverse the polarity of the connections. This could cause an electrical fire.

Never charge a frozen battery, or one which has thawed. This could result in explosions and chemical burns. Always replace a battery which has frozen. A flat battery can freeze at temperatures around 0

Ensure that the vent hose is always connected to the battery.

Never use a defective battery. This may be fatally explosive. Replace a damaged battery immediately.

Caution Never disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched on or if the engine

is running. This could damage the electrical system or electronic compo-

nents.

Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight over a long period of time, as

the intense ultraviolet radiation can damage the battery housing.

If the vehicle is left standi

the battery from frost. If it fre

Checking the electrolyt

The electrolyte level sho

mileage vehicles, in hot

Open the bonnet and op

Safety instructions on

page 213 in Wa

page 227.

Check the colour displa

battery.

If there are air bubbles i

they disperse.

The position of the battery is s

ment diagram page 273.

The round window (magic ey

depending on the charge leve

If the colour in the window is c of the battery is too low. Have

The colours green and black a

purposes.

WARNING (continued)

Checking and refilling levels 229

Safety Fir Technical Data

nvironment nces such as sulphuric acid and lead. They

iately and must not be disposed of with ordinary

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 229 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Charging and changing the vehicle battery

The battery is maintenance-free and is checked during the

inspection service. All work on the vehicle battery requires

specialist knowledge.

If you often drive short distances or if the vehicle is not driven for long

periods, the battery should be checked by a qualified workshop between the

scheduled services.

If the battery has discharged and you have problems starting the vehicle, the

battery might be damaged. If this happens, we recommend you have the

vehicle battery checked by an Authorised Service Centre where it will be re-

charged or replaced.

Charging the battery

The vehicle battery should be charged by a qualified workshop only, as

batteries using special technology have been installed and they must be

charged in a controlled environment.

Replacing a vehicle battery

The battery has been developed to suit the conditions of its location and has

special safety features.

Genuine SEAT batteries fulfil the maintenance, performance and safety spec-

ifications of your vehicle.

WARNING

We recommend you use only maintenance-free or cycle free leak-proof batteries which comply with the standards T 825 06 and VW 7 50 73. This standard applies as of 2001.

Before starting any work on the batteries, you must read and observe the warnings in Warnings on handling the battery on page 227.

For the sake of the e Batteries contain toxic substa

must be disposed of appropr

household waste.

Wheels and tyres230

ften not readily visible. If you notice unusual

one side, this may indicate that one of the tyres

be checked immediately by an Authorised

attern

ndicates the direction of rotation on tyres with

rve the direction of rotation indicated when

ees optimum grip and helps to avoid aqua-

wear.

ximum grip in the first 500 km. Drive particu- f accident.

d tyres. This may cause an accident.

ation or if the vehicle pulls to one side when ediately and check the tyres for damage.

e can be seen on the sticker on the

nflation pressure from the sticker. The

tyres. For Winter tyres, you must add 0.2

on the sticker.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 230 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Wheels and tyres

Wheels

General notes

Avoiding damage

If you have to drive over a kerb or similar obstacle, drive very

slowly and as near as possible at a right angle to the kerb.

Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.

Inspect the tyres regularly for damage (cuts, cracks or blisters,

etc.). Remove any foreign objects embedded in the treads.

Storing tyres

Mark tyres when you remove them to indicate the direction of

rotation. This ensures you will be able to install them correctly

when you replace them.

When removed, the wheels and/or tyres should be stored in a

cool, dry and preferably dark location.

Store tyres in a vertical position if they are not fitted on wheel

rims.

New tyres

New tyres have to be run in page 190.

The tread depth of new tyres may vary, according to the type and make of tyre

and the tread pattern.

Concealed damage

Damage to tyres and rims is o

vibrations or the car pulling to

is damaged. The tyres should

Service Centre.

Tyres with directional tread p

An arrow on the tyre sidewall i

directional tread. Always obse

fitting the wheel. This guarant

planing, excessive noise and

WARNING

New tyres do not have ma larly carefully to avoid risk o

Never drive with damage

If you notice unusual vibr driving, stop the vehicle imm

Checking tyre pressure

The correct tyre pressur

inside of the tank flap.

1. Read the required tyre i

values refer to Summer

bar to the values given

Wheels and tyres 231

Safety Fir Technical Data

ng*

toring system constantly checks the

ensors of the ABS wheels. It operates by

uency spectrum of each wheel.

e genuine SEAT tyres. In addition, check and

ly.

are changed or one or more tyres are changed,

y pressing the SET switch on the central console.

n the event of a loss of pressure by means of

e instrument cluster display. The system uses

epends on tyre temperature. Tyre pressure

ach 10C in tyre temperature increase. The tyre

being driven and the tyre pressure will rise

you should only adjust the tyre pressures when

tely at ambient temperature).

re monitoring system works reliably, you should

st the tyre pressures at regular intervals and

eference values) in the system.

bel is attached to the inside of the fuel tank flap.

re when the tyres are hot. This may damage or accident!

tyre flexes a lot more at high speeds and f the tyre. Under these conditions, the tyre tyre may burst. Risk of accident!

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 231 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

2. The tyre pressures should only be checked when the tyres are

cold. The slightly raised pressures of warm tyres must not be

reduced.

3. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load you are carrying.

Tyre pressure

The correct tyre pressure is especially important at high speeds. The pressure

should therefore be checked at least once a month and before starting a

journey.

The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the inside of the

tank flap. The tyre pressure values given are for cold tyres. The slightly raised

pressures of warm tyres must not be reduced .

WARNING

Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Checking tyre pressure value is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is an increased danger of accidents - particularly at high speeds.

A tyre can easily burst if the pressure is too low, causing an accident!

At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes more. In this way it becomes too hot, and this can cause tread separation and tyre blow-out. Always observe the recommended tyre pressures.

If the tyre pressure is too low or too high, the tyres will wear prema- turely and the vehicle will not handle well. Risk of accident!

For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption.

Tyre pressure monitori

The tyre pressure moni

pressure of the tyres.

The system uses the speed s

analysing the speed and freq

For optimum performance, us

adjust tyre pressures regular

Whenever the tyre pressures

the system should be Reset b

The system warns the driver i

symbols and messages in th

ESP page 185.

Note that tyre pressure also d

increases about 0.1 bar for e

heats up while the vehicle is

accordingly. For this reason,

they are cold (i.e. approxima

To ensure that the tyre pressu

check and, if necessary, adju

store the correct pressures (r

A tyre pressure information la

WARNING

Never adjust tyre pressu even burst the tyres. Risk of

An insufficiently inflated causes significant heating o bead may be released or the

Wheels and tyres232

dependent on tyre pressure, driving

Fig. 168 Tyre tread wear indicators

Fig. 169 Diagram for changing wheels

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 232 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres lead to increased fuel consumption and tyre wear.

Significant tyre pressure loss

The tyre symbol is displayed and indicates that the tyre pressure for a least

one tyre is insufficient.

Stop the vehicle.

Switch the engine off.

Check the tyre(s).

Change the wheel if necessary page 240.

Tyre service life

The service life of tyres is

style and fitting.

Wheels and tyres 233

Safety Fir Technical Data

accidents if a tyre bursts during driving!

ed at the latest when the tread is worn down to ilure to do so could result in an accident. Worn h speeds on wet roads. There is also a greater

eds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes heat. This can cause tread separation and tyre

lways observe the recommended tyre pres-

ear, you should have the running gear checked ntre.

oil, fuel and brake fluid away from tyres.

res must be replaced immediately!

nvironment ase fuel consumption.

w you to continue driving even with a

ajority of cases.

nti-puncture22) tyres from the factory indi-

ure on the instrument panel.

country.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 233 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Wear indicators

The original tyres on your vehicle have 1.6 mm high tread wear indicators

page 232, fig. 168, running across the tread. Depending on the make,

there will be six to eight of them evenly spaced around the tyre. Markings on

the tyre sidewall (for instance the letters TWI or other symbols) indicate the

positions of the tread wear indicators. The minimum tread depth required by

law is 1.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves next to the tread wear indica-

tors). Worn tyres must be replaced. Different figures may apply in export

countries .

Tyre pressure

Incorrect tyre pressure causes premature wear and could cause tyre blow-out.

For this reason, the tyre pressure should be checked at least once per month

page 230.

Driving style

Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard braking all increase tyre wear.

Changing wheels around

If the front tyres are worn considerably more than the rear ones it is advisable

to change them around as shown page 232, fig. 169. All the tyres will then

last for about the same time.

Wheel balance

The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. However, various factors encoun-

tered in normal driving can cause them to become unbalanced, which results

in steering vibration.

Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as they otherwise cause excessive

wear on steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must also be rebalanced

when a new tyre is fitted.

Incorrect wheel alignment

Incorrect wheel alignment causes excessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of

the vehicle. If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the wheel align-

ment checked by an Authorised Service Centre.

WARNING

There is a serious danger of

The tyres must be replac the tread wear indicators. Fa tyres do not grip well at hig risk of aquaplaning

At continuously high spe more. This causes it to over blow-out. Risk of accident. A sures.

If tyres show excessive w by an Authorised Service Ce

Keep chemicals such as

Damaged wheels and ty

For the sake of the e Under-inflated tyres will incre

Anti-puncture tyres

Anti-puncture tyres allo

punctured tyre, in the m

Vehicles equipped with a

cate the loss of tyre press

22) Depending upon version and

Wheels and tyres234

of the tyres,

to continue driving even using anti-puncture

severely damaged in an accident, etc. If a tyre

e is a risk that parts of the tread can be thrown

uel lines, brake pipes or fuel filler.

driving if severe vibrations occur, or if the wheel

ff smoke.

onditions, the driving quality of the vehicle is

speed of 80 km/h is subject to road and bserve legal requirements when doing so.

id manoeuvres, and brake earlier than usual.

les (for example kerbs) or potholes.

g driven in emergency conditions, the driving ired and there is a risk of accident.

not deflate on losing pressure because they

d sides. Therefore defects in the tyre can not be

ion.

used on front tyres used in emergency

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 234 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Driving with anti-puncture tyres (emergency gear)

Leave the ESP/TCS (electronic stabilisation programme)

switched on, or switch on page 185.

Continue driving carefully and slowly (80 km/h maximum).

Avoid sudden manoeuvres and sharp turns.

Avoid driving over obstacles (for example kerbs) or potholes.

Look out for the ESP/TCS intervening often, smoke coming from

the tyres or the smell of rubber, the vehicle vibrating or a clat-

tering noise. If any of these occur, stop the vehicle.

The anti-puncture tyres have a tag on the side of the tyre, with the description:

DSST, Eufonia, RFT, ROF, RSC, SSR or ZP.

The sides of this type of tyre are reinforced. When the tyres lose air they are

supported on the sides (emergency driving).

The loss of pressure in the tyre is shown on the instrument panel. You can

then drive a maximum of 80 km and if the circumstances are favourable (for

example, low load), even more.

The damaged tyre should be changed as soon as possible. The rim should be

checked in a specialist workshop to detect possible damage and replace it if

necessary. We recommend you contact Technical Service. If more than one

tyre is being used under emergency conditions, this reduces the distance

which can be travelled.

Starting driving in emergency conditions

When the loss in tyre pressure is displayed on the instrument panel, this

implies that at least one tyre is being driven in emergency conditions .

End of emergency operation

Do not drive on if:

smoke is coming from one

there is a smell of rubber,

the vehicle vibrates,

there is a rattling noise.

When is it no longer possible tyres?

If one of the tyres has been

has been badly damaged ther

off and cause damage to the f

It is also advisable to stop

starts overheating and gives o

WARNING

When driving in emergency c considerably impaired.

The maximum permitted weather conditions. Please o

Avoid sharp turns and rap

Avoid driving over obstac

If one or more tyres is bein quality of the vehicle is impa

Note The anti-puncture tyres do

are supported on the reinforce

detected with a visual inspect

Snow chains must not be

conditions.

Wheels and tyres 235

Safety Fir Technical Data

as well as the proper facilities for disposing of

e has full information on the technical require-

nging tyres, wheels or wheel trims.

drive, all four tyres must always be fitted with

nd tread pattern, as otherwise the driveline can

ifferences in the wheel speeds. For the same

el with the same tyre dimensions as the normal

e the factory-supplied compact temporary spare

use only wheels and tyres which have been odel. Failure to do so could impair vehicle

e on tyres that are more than six years old. If should drive slowly and with extra care at all

ose with an unknown history of use.

ted, you must ensure that the flow of air to the s could cause them to overheat.

fitted with radial tyres of the same type, size he same tread pattern.

nvironment f according to the laws in the country concerned.

s not generally possible to use the wheels from

apply to wheels of the same model. The use of

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 235 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

New tyres and wheels

New tyres and wheels have to be run-in.

The tyres and wheel rims are an essential part of the vehicle's design. The

tyres and rims approved by SEAT are specially matched to the characteristics

of the vehicle and make a major contribution to good road holding and safe

handling .

Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs and not individually (i.e. both front

tyres or both rear tyres together). A knowledge of tyre designations makes it

easier to choose the correct tyres. Radial tyres have the tyre designations

marked on the sidewall, for example:

195/65 R15 91T

This contains the following information:

195 Tyre width in mm

65 Height/width ratio in %

R Tyre construction: Radial

15 Rim diameter in inches

91 Load rating code

T Speed rating

The tyres could also have the following information:

A direction of rotation symbol

Reinforced denotes heavy-duty tyres.

The manufacturing date is also indicated on the tyre sidewall (possibly only

on the inner side of the wheel).

DOT... 1103... means, for example, that the tyre was produced in the 11th

week of 2003.

We recommend that work on tyres and wheels is carried out by an Authorised

Service Centre. They are familiar with the procedure and have the necessary

special tools and spare parts

the old tyres.

Any Authorised Service Centr

ments when installing or cha

On vehicles with four-wheel tyres of the same type, make a

be damaged by continuous d

reason, only use a spare whe

road wheels. You may also us

wheel.

WARNING

We recommend that you approved by SEAT for your m handling. Risk of accident.

Avoid running the vehicl you have no alternative, you times.

Never use old tyres or th

If wheel trims are retrofit brakes is not restricted. Thi

All four wheels must be (rolling circumference) and t

For the sake of the e Old tyres must be disposed o

Note For technical reasons, it i

other vehicles. This can also

Wheels and tyres236

el bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

e the vehicles handling on snow and

es will considerably improve the vehicles

er tyres (width, rubber compound, tread

and snow.

o a pressure 0.2 bar higher than the pressures

e sticker on tank flap).

all four wheels.

er tyre sizes can be found in the vehicle's regis-

adial winter tyres. All tyre sizes listed in the

pply to winter tyres.

eness when the tread is worn down to a depth

e 235, New tyres and wheels determines the

ter tyres:

hich can exceed the speed rating of the fitted

sticker in the driver's field of view. These

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 236 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

wheels or tyres which have not been approved by SEAT for use with your

model may invalidate the vehicle's type approval for use on public roads.

If the spare tyre is not the same as the tyres that are mounted on the

vehicle - for example with winter tyres - you should only use the spare tyre for

a short period of time and drive with extra care. Refit the normal road wheel

as soon as possible.

Wheel bolts

Wheel bolts must be tightened to the correct torque.

The design of wheel bolts is matched to the rims. If different wheel rims are

fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right length and correctly shaped bolt

heads must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the

brake system functions correctly.

In certain circumstances, you may not use wheel bolts from a different car -

even if it is the same model page 208.

After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts

should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench . The tight-

ening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

WARNING

If the wheel bolts are not tightened correctly, the wheel could become loose while driving. Risk of accident.

The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easily. Never apply grease or oil to them.

Use only wheel bolts which belong to the wheel.

If the torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen whilst the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and threads can be damaged.

Caution The prescribed torque for whe

Winter tyres

Winter tyres will improv

ice.

In winter conditions winter tyr

handling. The design of summ

pattern) gives less grip on ice

Winter tyres must be inflated t

specified for summer tyres (se

Winter tyres must be fitted on

Information on permitted wint tration documents. Use only r

vehicle documentation also a

Winter tyres lose their effectiv

of 4 mm.

The speed rating code pag

following speed limits for win

Q max. 160 km/h

S max. 180 km/h

T max. 190 km/h

H max. 210 km/h

In some countries, vehicles w

tyre must have an appropriate

Wheels and tyres 237

Safety Fir Technical Data

ectly tightened in accordance with the manu- will prevent the chains coming into contact

hains to drive on roads which are free of snow.

ndling, damage the tyres and wear out very

eed limit for using snow chains is 50 km/h. The

ntry should be followed.

sk your Approved Service Centre for information

and snow chain size.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 237 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

stickers are available from your Authorised Service Centre. The legal require-

ments of each country must be followed.

Do not have winter tyres fitted for unnecessarily long periods. Vehicles with

summer tyres handle better when the roads are free of snow and ice.

If you have a flat tyre, please refer to the notes on the spare wheel

page 235, New tyres and wheels.

WARNING

The maximum speed for the winter tyres must not be exceeded. Otherwise, this could lead to tyre damage and thus, an accident risk.

For the sake of the environment Fit your summer tyres in good time. They are quieter, do not wear so quickly

and reduce fuel consumption.

Snow chains

Snow chains are only permitted on the front wheels and only for

tyres195/65R15 and 205/55R16. These tyres may only be fitted with fine-

pitch link chains which do not protrude more than 15 mm page 235.

Snow chains must have fine-pitch links which do not protrude more than 9

mm, including tension device.

Remove wheel hub covers and trim rings before fitting snow chains. For safety

reasons cover caps, available in any Authorised Service Centre, must then be

fitted over the wheel bolts.

Four-wheel drive: where snow chains are compulsory on certain roads, this

normally also applies to cars with four-wheel drive. Snow chains may only be

fitted to the front wheels (also on vehicles with four-wheel drive).

WARNING

Snow chains should be corr facturer's instructions. This with the wheel housing.

Caution You must remove the snow c

Otherwise they will impair ha

quickly.

Note In some countries, the sp

legal requirements of the cou

We recommend that you a

about appropriate wheel, tyre

If and when238

factory is only designed for changing wheels t attempt to use it for lifting heavier vehicles .

, level ground.

en the vehicle is on the jack. Risk of accident.

underneath the vehicle, this must be secured e, there is a risk of injury.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 238 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

If and when

Tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel

Vehicle Tools

The vehicle onboard tools are located under the floor panel in

the luggage compartment.

Lift the cover of the luggage compartment, by pulling it up with a

finger in the fitting.

Take the onboard tools out of the vehicle.

The tool kit includes:

Jack*

Hook for removing wheel covers* or hub caps*

Box spanner for wheel bolts*

Reversible screwdriver with handle (including hexagonal interior) for the

wheel bolts. The screwdriver is a combination tool.

Towing eye

Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*

Some of the items listed are only provided in certain models / model years,

or are optional extras.

WARNING

Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to tighten the wheel bolts as with this it is not possible to tighten the bolts to the required torque. Risk of accident.

The jack* supplied by the on this model. On no accoun or other loads. Risk of injury

Use the jack* only on firm

Never start the engine wh

If work is to be carried out by suitable stands. Otherwis

WARNING (continued)

If and when 239

Safety Fir Technical Data

hains must not be used on the compact tempo-

on one of the front wheels when using snow

orary spare in place of one of the rear wheels.

chains to the wheel taken from the rear and use

ctured front wheel.

be checked and corrected as soon as possible. e for dimensions 125/70R16 125/70R18 other tyre dimensions please refer to the label so could result in an accident.

0 km/h. Higher speeds can cause an accident.

, hard braking and fast cornering. Risk of acci-

ompact spare tyres at the same time, risk of

rmal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on re wheel rim.

hicles not including a spare wheel) is

anel in the luggage compartment.

the Tyre Mobility System Tyre repair kit.

a container with sealing compound to repair the

generate the required tyre pressure. The kit will

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 239 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Compact temporary spare wheel*

The compact spare wheel (emergency wheel for vehicles

without the anti-puncture kit) should only be used when

strictly necessary.

The temporary spare wheel is stored under the floor panel in the luggage

compartment and is attached by a thumbnut.

How to use the compact temporary spare wheel

Should you ever have a punctured tyre, the compact temporary spare wheel

is only intended for temporary use until you can reach a workshop. The

standard-size road wheel should be replaced as soon as possible.

Please note the following restrictions when using the compact temporary

spare wheel. This spare wheel has been specially designed for your vehicle,

thus, it cannot be changed with the spare wheel from another vehicle.

No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on the

compact temporary spare wheel rim.

Snow chains

For technical reasons, snow c

rary spare wheel.

If you should have a puncture

chains, fit the compact temp

You can then attach the snow

this wheel to replace the pun

WARNING

The tyre pressures must The emergency tyre pressur 135/90R16 is 4.2 bar; for all on the fuel cap. Failure to do

Do not drive faster than 8

Avoid heavy acceleration dent.

Never use two or more c accident.

No other type of tyre (no the compact temporary spa

Tyre repair kit

The tyre repair kit (for ve

stored under the floor p

Your vehicle is equipped with

The tyre repair kit consists of

puncture and a compressor to

Fig. 170 Luggage compartment. Access to the spare wheel

If and when240

on and place the warning triangle in position. d also warns other road users.

on a gradient, block the wheel opposite the

ng a stone or similar object under it to prevent

ents when doing so.

ribed below

o see page 241.

s.

ack in the corresponding zone.

then mount the spare wheel

firmly with the box spanner.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 240 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

reliably seal punctures up to a size of about 4 mm caused by the penetration

of a foreign body into the tyre.

Note Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not

possible with the sealing compound.

Wheel change

Preparation work

What you must do before changing a wheel.

If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the vehicle as far away

from the flow of traffic as possible. Choose a location that is as

level as possible.

All passengers should leave the vehicle. They should wait in a

safe area (for instance behind the roadside crash barrier).

Switch off the engine. Switch on the hazard warning lights.

Apply the handbrake firmly.

Engage the first gear, or put the selector lever to position P for

those vehicles with an automatic gearbox.

If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from your vehicle.

Take the vehicle tools and the spare wheel out of the luggage

compartment.

WARNING

Put the hazard warning lights This is for your own safety an

Caution If you have to change the tyre

wheel being changed by placi

the vehicle from rolling away.

Note Please observe legal requirem

Changing a wheel

Change the wheel as desc

Pull off the hub cap. Als

Slacken the wheel bolt

Raise the car with the j

Remove the wheel and

Lower the vehicle.

Tighten the wheel bolts

Replace the hub cap.

If and when 241

Safety Fir Technical Data

e removed to gain access to the wheel

ook from the tools into the designated

the bolt hole covers of the wheel cover

Fig. 171 Changing the wheel: Removing a hub cap

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 241 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

After changing a wheel

After changing the wheel there are still tasks to complete.

Put the tools and jack back in the luggage compartment.

Place the wheel with the defective tyre in the luggage compart-

ment and secure it.

Check the tyre pressure of the newly fitted tyre as soon as

possible.

Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as

possible with a torque wrench. The prescribed torque must be

120 Nm.

Note If you notice that the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to turn when

changing a wheel, they must be replaced before having the wheel bolt torque

checked.

For your safety, drive at moderate speeds until the wheel bolt torque has

been checked.

Wheel trims

The wheel trims must b

bolts.

Removing

Insert the extraction h ring, located in one of

fig. 171.

Pull off the hub cap.

If and when242

lts

loosened before raising the vehicle.

ar as it will go over the wheel bolt.

y the end turn it about one full turn to the

ar as it will go over the wheel bolt.

close to the end and turn the bolt to the

o unscrew or tighten the anti-theft wheel

Fig. 172 Changing the wheel: loosen the wheel bolts

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 242 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Wheel covers*

The wheel covers must be removed for access to the wheel

bolts

Removing

Remove the wheel cover using the wire hook.

Hook this into one of the cut-outs of the wheel cover.

Fitting

Fit the wheel cover onto the wheel rim by pressing it firmly. Put

pressure initially on the point of the cut-out for the valve. Then

press the wheel cover onto the steel rim so that it engages all

round.

Loosening the wheel bo

The wheel bolts must be

Loosening

Fit the box spanner as f

Grasp the box spanner b

left fig. 172.

Tightening

Fit the box spanner as f

Grasp the box spanner

right until it is secured.

An adapter is required t

bolts.

If and when 243

Safety Fir Technical Data

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 243 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

WARNING

Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn before raising the vehicle with the jack, loosening the wheel bolts more than one turn can result in an acci- dent.

Note Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or

tighten the wheel bolts.

If the wheel bolt is very tight, you may be able to loosen it by pushing

down the end of the spanner carefully with your foot. Hold on to the vehicle

for support and take care not to slip.

If and when244

t under the door sill closest to the wheel

73.

jacking point and turn the crank until the

ly below the vertical rib under the door

e arm of the jack fits around the rib under

vable base plate of the jack is flat on the

efective wheel is just clear of the ground.

of the door sills mark the jacking points

n made for each wheel. Do not fit the jack

jack may cause the vehicle to slip off the jack.

ted on solid ground offering good support. Use

essary. On a hard, slippery surface (such as

ilar to prevent the jack from slipping.

at the base of the jack does not slip. Failure to ent.

ed if the jack is not applied at the correct a risk of injury since the jack can slip off engaged.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 244 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Raising the vehicle

In order to remove the wheel, the vehicle must be raised with

a jack.

Locate the jacking poin

to be changed fig. 1

Place the jack under the

arm of the jack is direct

sill.

Align the jack so that th

the door sill and the mo

ground fig. 174.

Raise the jack until the d

Recesses at the front and rear

fig. 173. A position has bee

anywhere else.

An unstable surface under the

Therefore, the jack must be fit

a large and stable base, if nec

tiles) use a rubber mat or sim

WARNING

Take all precautions so th do so could result in an accid

The vehicle can be damag jacking points. There is also suddenly if it is not properly

Fig. 173 The jacking points

Fig. 174 Fitting the jack

If and when 245

Safety Fir Technical Data

e wheel

the wheel, the following tasks must be

bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack,

ibed below:

g the hexagonal tool in the handle of the

ol) and place them on a clean surface

lts and tighten them lightly using the

e screwdriver handle.

Fig. 176 Changing the wheel: Hexagonal socket in screwdriver handle to turn the wheel bolts

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 245 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Jack position points for vehicles with skirting*

Vehicles with plastic skirting, with cover*

Remove the cap to access the anchor point for the vehicle jack

fig. 175.

Pull on the cover and remove it from its allotment in the direction

of the arrow fig. 175.

Once the cover has been released, it will remain connected to its

strap so that is not lost.

Removing and fitting th

For removal and fitting

completed.

After loosening the wheel

cange the wheel as descr

Removing a wheel

Unscrew the bolts usin

screwdriver (vehicle to

fig. 176.

Fitting a wheel

Screw in the wheel bo

hexagonal socket in th

Fig. 175 Plastic skirting with jack allotment cover

AA

If and when246

the wheel bolt and push it on as far as it

ar as it will go over the adapter.

heel bolt as appropriate.

eft wheel bolt is stamped onto the front part of

oted and kept in a safe place, as it is only by

duplicate adaptor can be obtained from an

ead pattern

ad pattern must be fitted so that they

ction.

be identified by arrows on the sidewall that

on. Always note the direction of rotation indi-

This is important so that these tyres can give

ssive noise, tread wear and aquaplaning.

to fit the spare wheel so it rotates in the wrong

mely carefully. The tyre will not give optimum

rly important when driving on wet roads.

s of tyres with this type of tread pattern, the

ced as soon as possible so that all tyres again

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 246 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

The wheel bolts should be clean and easily screwed. Before fitting the spare

wheel, inspect the wheel condition and hub mounting surfaces. These

surfaces must be clean before fitting the wheel.

The hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle makes it easier to turn the

wheel bolts. The reversible screwdriver blade should be removed when the

tool is used for this purpose.

If tyres with a specific direction of rotation are fitted, note the direction of

rotation.

Note Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or

tighten the wheel bolts.

Anti-theft wheel bolts

A special adapter is required to turn the anti-theft wheel

bolts.

Insert the adapter onto

will go fig. 177.

Fit the box spanner as f

Loosen or tighten the w

Error code

The code number of the anti-th

the adaptor.

The code number should be n

using the code number that a

Authorised Service Centre.

Tyres with directional tr

Tyres with directional tre

rotate in the correct dire

A directional tread pattern can

point in the direction of rotati

cated when fitting the wheel.

maximum grip and avoid exce

If, in an emergency, you have

direction, you must drive extre

performance. This is particula

To benefit from the advantage

defective tyre should be repla

rotate in the correct direction.

Fig. 177 Anti-theft wheel bolt

If and when 247

Safety Fir Technical Data

if the repair of a tyre puncture is not possible

aken before repairing a tyre.

r puncture, park the vehicle as far away

as possible.

irmly.

ut the selector lever to position P.

leave the vehicle. They should wait in a

behind the roadside crash barrier).

is possible using the Tyre Mobility System

nd safety notes.

from the affected wheel.

out of the luggage compartment.

s on and place the warning triangle in position. nd also warns other road users.

to repair a tyre on a slope.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 247 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Tyre repair kit (Tyre-Mobility-System)*

General information and safety notes

Your vehicle is equipped with a tyre repair kit: the Tyre Mobility System.

In the event of a tyre puncture, a sealing compound and an air compressor are

located in the luggage compartment under the floor panel.

The Tyre Mobility System will reliably seal punctures caused by the penetra-

tion of a foreign body of up to about 4 mm in diameter.

It is not necessary to remove the foreign body from the tyre.

Instructions for the sealing compound are located on the sealing compound

container.

Notes for the proper use of the air compressor are included in an additional

instruction leaflet.

WARNING

Do not attempt to repair a puncture with the sealing compound if the tyre has been damaged by driving the car after the tyre has lost its air.

Always observe warnings and follow instructions concerning compressor and sealing compound carefully.

Do not drive faster than 80 km/h, avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering.

Tyres which have been repaired with sealing compound are only suit- able for temporary use over a short period. Therefore, please drive carefully to the next available qualified workshop.

For the sake of the environment Used sealing compound containers should be disposed of at a proper facility.

Note Seek professional assistance

with the sealing compound.

Preparation work

Certain steps must be t

If you have a flat tyre o

from the flow of traffic

Apply the handbrake f

Engage first gear, or p

All passengers should

safe area (for instance

Check whether a repair

General information a

Unscrew inflation cap

Take the tyre repair kit

WARNING

Put the hazard warning light This is for your own safety a

Caution Take special care if you have

If and when248

with tyre pressure control, enter the new tyre

n on the central console.

ver be allowed to run for longer than 6

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 248 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Note Please observe legal requirements when doing so.

Tyre repair

The following sections describe the procedures for repairing

a tyre.

Using the sealing compound

The instructions on the can give detailed information on how to

use the sealing compound.

Inflating the tyre.

Remove the air compressor and hose from the container.

Screw the retaining nut onto the valve.

Plug the compressor cable into a 12 volt power point.

Turn on compressor and monitor the pressure shown on the pres-

sure gauge.

Completing the repair

Remove the compressor hose from the valve.

Fit the valve cap.

Unplug the compressor from the socket.

Return all tools to their proper storing location.

Note If the vehicle is equipped

pressures using the SET butto

The compressor should ne

minutes.

If and when 249

Safety Fir Technical Data

e steering wheel

and the component concerned.

e failed component page 251.

m inside the fuse cover, fit it onto the

e fuse out.

e (which will have a melted metal strip)

same ampere rating.

partment

and its failed electrical component.

r in the engine compartment by pressing

entre of the cover fig. 179.

e failed component page 251.

m inside the fuse cover (at left-hand end

t onto the blown fuse and pull the fuse out.

e (which will have a melted metal strip)

same ampere rating.

ver back on to ensure no water can enter

its are protected by fuses. The fuses are located

d end of the dash panel and on the left-hand

ent.

tected by circuit breakers. These reset automat-

en the overload (caused for example by frozen

.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 249 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Fuses

Changing a fuse

Blown fuses must be replaced

Fuse cover underneath th

Switch off the ignition

Identify the fuse for th

Take the plastic clip fro

blown fuse and pull th

Replace the blown fus

with a new fuse of the

Fuse cover in engine com

Switch off the ignition

Prise off the fuse cove

the tabs towards the c

Identify the fuse for th

Take the plastic clip fro

of the dash panel), fit i

Replace the blown fus

with a new fuse of the

Carefully fit the fuse co

the fuse box.

The individual electrical circu

behind a cover at the left-han

side of the engine compartm

The electric windows are pro

ically after a few seconds wh

windows) has been corrected

Fig. 178 Left side of dash panel: Fuse box cover

Fig. 179 Fuse box cover in engine compartment

If and when250

ated in the following tables, there are others

echnical Service.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 250 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Fuses colour code

WARNING

Never repair damaged fuses and never replace them with fuses with a higher rating. Failure to comply could result in fire. This could also cause damage to other parts of the electrical system.

Note If a newly replaced fuse blows again after a short time, the electrical

system must be checked by a qualified workshop as soon as possible.

If you replace a fuse with higher-rating fuse, you could cause damage to

another location in the electrical system.

Always keep some spare fuses in the vehicle. These are available from

SEAT dealers.

Apart from the fuses indic

which must be replaced by a T Colour Amperes

light brown 5

Red 10

Blue 15

Yellow 20

Natural (white) 25

Green 30

orange 40

Red 50

white 80

Blue 100

grey 150

violet 200

If and when 251

Safety Fir Technical Data

ent 10

ng assistant) / Gear lever/ ESP 10

sensor/ Alarm horn 5

sensor / Light switch 10

pling automatic gearbox 20

20

creen) 10

r / Switchboard wiring 20

/ socket 20

40

ent 10

ent 10

ent 10

it (coupling) 15

Consumer Amps

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 251 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Fuses on left side of dash panel

Fuses

Number Consumer Amps

1 Vacant

2 Vacant

3 Vacant

4 Vacant

5 Vacant

6 Vacant

7 Vacant

8 Vacant

9 Airbag 5

10 RSE input (roof screen) 10

11 Vacant

11 Vacant

12 Left xenon headlight 10

13

Instrument panel (oil level)/Switchboard wiring

(BCM)/Heater / ABS, ESP/ Park Pilot/ Gate-

way/Flow meter

5

14 Gearbox/Servosteering/Brake light sensor/

Trailer/ ABS, ESP/ Haldex/ Light switch 10

15

Heated windscreen / Instrument lighting / Diag-

nosis switchboard/Engine management/Addi-

tional heating/AFS headlamps/Park Pilot

10

16 Right xenon headlight 10

17 Engine managem

18 Vacant

19 Vacant

20 Park Pilot (Parki

switchboard

21 Vacant

22 Volumetric alarm

23 Diagnosis / Rain

24 Vacant

25 Switchboard cou

26 Vacuum pump

27 RSE input (roof s

28 Rear wiper moto

29 Vacant

30 Cigarette lighter

31 Vacant

32 Vacant

33 Heater

34 Vacant

35 Vacant

36 Engine managem

37 Engine managem

38 Engine managem

39 Trailer control un

Number

If and when252

, while correct at the time of printing, is subject

should occur, please refer to the sticker on the

correct information for your model.

mpartment, left part

Consumer Amps

rs 20

30

it 5

20

15

l/Steering column 5

40

15

om Navigator 5

ent 5

ent 10

l unit 5

odule supply 15

odule supply 30

20

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 252 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Some of the electrical items listed in the table are only fitted on certain

models or are optional extras.

Please note that the above list

to alterations. If discrepancies

inside of the fuse cover for the

Fuses layout, engine co

Fuses

40 Trailer control unit (indicators, brakes and left

side) 20

41 Trailer control unit (fog light, reversing light and

right side) 20

42 BCM wiring switchboard 20

43 Trailer pre-installation 40

44 Rear window heater 25

45 Electric windows (front) 30

46 Rear electric windows 30

47 Engine (Fuel control unit, petrol relay) 15

48 Convenience controls 20

49 Heating controls 40

50 Heated seats 30

51 Sunroof 20

52 Headlight washer system 20

53 Vacant 20

54 Taxi (taximeter power supply) 5

55 Vacant 20

56 Taxi (taximeter power supply) 15

57 Vacant

58 Central locking control unit 30

Number Consumer Amps

Number

1 Windscreen wipe

2 DQ200 gearbox

3 Cable control un

4 ABS

5 AQ gearbox

6 Instrument pane

7 Ignition key

8 Radio

9 Telephone/TomT

10 Engine managem

Engine managem

11 Vacant

12 Electronic contro

13 Petrol injection m

Diesel injection m

14 Coil

If and when 253

Safety Fir Technical Data

st turn off the failed component.

Fingerprints vaporise in the heat, causing a

condensation on the mirror surface, thus

d by one of the same type. The type is inscribed

ss part or on the base.

keep a box of spare bulbs in the vehicle. At the

e bulbs, which are essential for road safety,

.

recting 4)

bulb changes must be made by the SEAT dealer, given

e removed from the vehicle and a reset must be made

m incorporated.

5 times the light flux and have an average lifespan of 5

n bulbs, this means that, except due to unusual circum-

hange the bulbs for the whole life of the vehicle.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 253 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Bulb change

General notes

Before changing any bulb, fir

Do not touch the bulb glass.

reduction in the bulb life and

reducing efficiency.

A bulb should only be replace

on the bulb, either on the gla

It is highly recommended to

very least, the following spar

should be kept in the vehicle

Main headlights

Dipped beam - H7

Main beam - H1

Position - W5W

Indicator - PY21W

Xenon headlights23) /self-di

Dipped and full beam - D1S2

Daylight - P21W SLL

Position W5W

Indicators PY21W

15 Engine management 5

Pump relay 10

16 Right lighting 30

17 Horn 15

18 Vacant

19 Clean 30

20 Water pump 10

Pressure sensor pump for 1.8 engine 20

21a) Lambda probe 15

22 Brake pedal, speed sensor 5

23a)

Engine management 5

Engine management 10

Engine management 15

24 AKF, gearbox valve 10

25a) ABS pump 40

26 Left lighting 30

27a) Engine management 40

Engine management 50

28 Vacant

29a) Electric windows (front and back) 50

Electric windows (front) 30

30 Ignition key 50

a) Ampere rating according to motorisation

Number Consumer Amps

23) On this type of headlight, the

that complex elements must b

on the automatic control syste 24) The Xenon bulbs discharge 2.

times more than that of haloge

stances, there is no need to c

If and when254

Fig. 180 Main headlight lamps

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 254 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Fog lights

Fog lights - H3

Fixed rear light

Stop/Position - P21W25)

Indicator - P21W

Rear tailgate light unit

Fog light (driver's side) - P21W

Reverse (passenger's side) - P21W

Position - W5W

Side indicator

Side indicator - W5W

Registration plate light

Registration plate light - C5W

Note Depending on weather conditions (cold or wet), the front lights, the fog

lights, the rear lights and the indicators may be temporarily misted. This has

no influence on the life expectancy of the lighting system. By switching on the

lights, the area through which the beam of light is projected will quickly be

demisted. However, the edges may continue to be misted.

Please check at regular intervals that all lighting (especially the exterior

lighting) on your vehicle is functioning properly. This is not only in the interest

of your own safety, but also in that of all other road users.

Due to the difficulty in accessing the lamps, any replacement work should

be done by a SEAT dealer. However, the following is a description of how to

change the lamps except for the fog lights* and interior lamps.

Main headlight lamps

Indicator

Dipped headlights

Main beam headlights

Side lights

25) Electronically controlled single filament bulb for Stop/side bulbs. If the bulb blows it

will not work in either position or Stop.

AA

AB

AC

AD

If and when 255

Safety Fir Technical Data

Fig. 182 Dipped head- lights

Fig. 183 Dipped head- lights

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 255 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Turn signal lamps

Raise the bonnet.

Rotate the lamp holder fig. 181 to the left and pull.

Remove the bulb by pressing on the lamp holder and rotating at

the same time to the left.

Installation is done in the reverse order.

Dipped beam lights

Raise the bonnet.

Fig. 181 Turn signal lamps

AA

If and when256

. 184 by pulling on this.

fig. 185 from the bulb.

185 inwards and to the right.

the replacement so that it sits correctly

reflector.

he reverse order.

Fig. 185 Main beam headlights

AC

A1

A2

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 256 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Remove the loops page 255, fig. 182 in the direction of

the arrow and remove the cover.

Remove the connector page 255, fig. 183 from the bulb.

Disengage the retainer spring page 255, fig. 183 pressing

inwards to the right.

Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so that the rim of the

attachment plate is on the reflector cut-out.

Main beam lights

Raise the bonnet.

Remove the cover fig

Remove the connector

Press the spring fig.

Extract the bulb and fit

into the cut-out on the

Installation is done in t

A1

A2

A3

Fig. 184 Main beam headlights

If and when 257

Safety Fir Technical Data

r fig. 187 outwards.

lling this out and inserting the replace-

the reverse order.

light

ntifog.

osition.

A1

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 257 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Side lights

Raise the bonnet.

Remove the cover fig. 186 by pulling on this.

Extract the lamp holde

Replace the bulb by pu

ment.

Installation is done in

Rear lights

On the body

Indicator, side and brake

On the tailgate

Left side: position and a

Right side: reverse and p

Fig. 186 Side lights

Fig. 187 Side lights

AD

If and when258

the left fig. 189.

nd change it for a new one.

in reverse order, taking special care when

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 258 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Indicator, side and brake lights on the bodywork

Remove the cover of the luggage compartment lateral panel

fig. 188.

Turn the lampholder to

Extract the failed bulb a

To refit follow the steps

fitting the lamp holder.

Fig. 188 Lights on vehicle body

Fig. 189 Lights on vehicle body

If and when 259

Safety Fir Technical Data

ut pressing on the securing pins and

b and replace it with another.

in reverse order, taking special care when

.

the left.

b and replace it with another.

verse order.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 259 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Position light, fog light and reverse light on the tailgate

Side lights

Open the tailgate.

Pull the cover off.

Take the lampholder o

extract it outwards.

Remove the blown bul

To refit follow the steps

fitting the lamp holder

Antifog and reverse light

Open the tailgate.

Pull the cover off.

Turn the lampholder to

Remove the blown bul

Installation is in the re

Fig. 190 Lights on the tailgate

Fig. 191 Side lights

If and when260

lights

ssing on the inside edge of this -arrow-

screwdriver fig. 193.

Fig. 193 Luggage compartment light

Fig. 194 Luggage compartment light

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 260 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Side indicators

Press the indicator to the left or to the right to remove the lamp.

Remove the lamp holder from the indicator.

Remove the failed glass bulb and replace with a new bulb.

Insert the lamp holder in the indicator guide until it clicks into

place.

First place the indicator in the opening in the bodywork, fixing

the tabs fig. 192, arrow .

Insert the bulb as shown by the arrow fig. 192.

Luggage compartment

Remove the bulb by pre

using the flat side of a

Fig. 192 Side indicator

A1

A2

If and when 261

Safety Fir Technical Data

aped fitting, unscrew the bolts fig. 195.

ing it in the direction of the arrow and

the reverse order.

Fig. 196 Registration light

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 261 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Press the lamp sideways and remove it from the housing

page 260, fig. 194.

Registration light

To remove the tulip-sh

Remove the bulb, mov

outwards fig. 196.

Installation is done in Fig. 195 Registration light

If and when262

ng it in the direction of the arrow and

e a sufficient wire cross section.

use of a discharged battery, the battery can be

other vehicle to start the engine.

the standard DIN 72553 (see manufacturer's

s section must be at least 25 mm2 for petrol

for diesel engines.

h each other, otherwise electricity could flow as

are connected.

st be properly connected to the vehicle elec-

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 262 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Sunroof light

Carefully remove the lamp, using the flat side of the screwdriver,

as shown in the figure fig. 198.

Remove the bulb, movi

outwards fig. 198.

Jump-starting

Jump leads

The jump lead must hav

If the engine fails to start beca

connected to the battery of an

Jump leads

Jump leads must comply with

documentation). The wire cros

engines and at least 35 mm2

Note The vehicles must not touc

soon as the positive terminals

The discharged battery mu

trical system.

Fig. 197 Removing sunroof light

Fig. 198 Removing sunroof light

If and when 263

Safety Fir Technical Data

of the black jump lead to a solid metal

olted on to the engine block, or onto the

he vehicle with the flat battery. Do not

ar the battery .

uch a way that they cannot come into

g parts in the engine compartment.

vehicle with the boosting battery and let

car with the flat battery and wait one or

ngine is running.

jump leads, switch off the headlights (if

wer and rear window heater in the vehicle

is helps minimise voltage peaks which are

ads are disconnected.

nning, disconnect the leads in reverse

en above.

o they have good metal-to-metal contact with

itch off the starter after about 10 seconds and

inute.

AX

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 263 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

How to jump start: description

fig. 199 shows the flat battery and the charged battery.

Jump lead terminal connections

Switch off the ignition on both vehicles .

1. Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive fig. 199

terminal of the vehicle with the flat battery .

2. Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive

terminal in the vehicle providing assistance.

3. Connect one end of the black jump lead to the negative terminal

on the battery of the vehicle providing assistance.

4. Connect the other end

component which is b

engine block itself of t

connect it to a point ne

5. Position the leads in s

contact with any movin

Starting

6. Start the engine of the

it run at idling speed.

7. Start the engine of the

two minutes until the e

Removing the jump leads

8. Before you remove the

they are switched on).

9. Turn on the heater blo

with the flat battery. Th

generated when the le

10. When the engine is ru

order to the details giv

Connect the battery clamps s

the battery terminals.

If the engine fails to start, sw

try again after about half a m

Fig. 199 How to connect the jump leads

AA AB

A+

A+

A-

If and when264

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 264 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

WARNING

Please note the safety warnings referring to working in the engine compartment page 213, Working in the engine compartment.

The battery providing assistance must have the same voltage as the flat battery (12V) and approximately the same capacity (see imprint on battery). Failure to comply could result in an explosion.

Never use jump leads when one of the batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even after the battery has thawed, battery acid could leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.

Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes away from batteries, danger of explosion. Failure to comply could result in an explosion.

Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump leads.

Do not connect the negative cable from the other vehicle directly to the negative terminal of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of explosion.

Do not attach the negative cable from the other vehicle to parts of the fuel system or to the brake line.

The non-insulated parts of the battery clamps must not be allowed to touch. The jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not touch metal parts of the vehicle, this can cause a short circuit.

Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.

Do not bend over the batteries. This could result in chemical burns.

Note The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as

soon as the positive terminals are connected.

If and when 265

Safety Fir Technical Data

ing points if you use a tow-rope:

towing vehicle

til the tow-rope is taut. Then accelerate

rs cautiously. If you are driving an auto-

te gently.

ke servo and power steering are not

you are towing. Brake earlier than you

ith a more gentle pressure on the brake.

towed vehicle

pe remains taut at all times when towing.

vehicle with a tow-bar. You should only use a

tow-bar.

elastic to reduce the loading on both vehicles.

pe made of synthetic fibre or similarly elastic

w-bar only to the towing eyes provided or a

ence, especially when using a tow-rope. Both

h the technique required for towing. Inexperi-

mpt to tow-start or tow away another vehicle.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 265 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Towing and tow-starting

Tow-starting

The use of jump leads is preferable to tow-starting.

We recommend that you do not tow-start your vehicle. Jump-starting

is preferable page 262.

However, if your vehicle has to be tow-started:

Engage the 2nd or the 3rd gear.

Keep the clutch pressed down.

Switch the ignition on.

Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch.

As soon as the engine starts, press the clutch and move the gear

lever into neutral. This helps to prevent driving into the towing

vehicle.

WARNING

The risk of accidents is high when tow-starting. The vehicle being towed can easily collide with the towing vehicle.

Caution When tow-starting, fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.

General notes

Please observe the follow

Notes for the driver of the

Drive slowly at first un

gradually.

Begin and change gea

matic vehicle, accelera

Remember that the bra

working in the vehicle

would normally, but w

Notes for the driver of the

Ensure that the tow-ro

Tow-rope or tow-bar

It is easier and safer to tow a

tow-rope if you do not have a

A tow-rope should be slightly

It is advisable to use a tow-ro

material.

Attach the tow-rope or the to

towing bracket.

Driving style

Towing requires some experi

drivers should be familiar wit

enced drivers should not atte

If and when266

d when the vehicle has no electrical power. The

ith the front wheels raised. Towing should be

on.

ays be kept in the vehicle..

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 266 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle and take care to avoid jerking the

tow-rope. When towing on an unpaved road, there is always a risk of over-

loading and damaging the anchorage points.

The ignition of the vehicle being towed must be switched on to prevent the

steering wheel from locking and also to allow the use of the turn signals,

horn, windscreen wipers and washers.

As the brake servo does not work if the engine is not running, you must apply

considerably more pressure to the brake pedal than you normally would.

As the power assisted steering does not work if the engine is not running, you

will need more strength to steer than you normally would.

The vehicle must not be towed faster than 50 km/h.

The vehicle must not be towed faster than 50 km/h.

Towing vehicles with an automatic gearbox

Put the selector lever into position N.

Do not drive faster than 50 km/h when towing a vehicle.

Do not tow further than 50 km.

If a breakdown vehicle is used, the vehicle must be towed with the front

wheels raised.

Note Observe legal requirements when towing or tow-starting.

Switch on the hazard warning lights of both vehicles. However, observe

any regulations to the contrary.

For technical reasons, vehicles with an automatic gearbox must not be

tow-started.

If damage to your vehicle means that there is no lubricant in the gearbox,

you must raise the drive wheels while the vehicle is being towed.

If the vehicle has to be towed more than 50 km, the front wheels must be

raised during towing, and towing should be carried out by a qualified person.

The steering wheel is locke

vehicle must then be towed w

carried out by a qualified pers

The towing eye should alw

If and when 267

Safety Fir Technical Data

er down and leave the cover hanging on

e screw hole, insert a screwdriver into the

ntly.

s shown by the arrow anti-clockwise to the

nt fig. 200 or rear fig. 201 threaded

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 267 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Towing rings

Fitting the towing eye

Take the towing ring from the onboard tool set.

Pull the lower front cov

the vehicle.

Remove the cover of th

lower slot and lever ge

Screw the towing eye a

limit position in the fro

hole.

Fig. 200 The front right section of the vehicle: Fitting the front towing eye

Fig. 201 Fitting the towing eye to the rear of the vehicle

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 268 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

General notes on the technical data 269

Safety Fir tips Technical Data

iations used in this paragraph of the Technical Data

evia- n

Meaning

Kilowatt, engine power measurement.

p Brake horse power, formerly used to denote engine power

pm Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

km Fuel consumption in litres per 100 km.

m Carbon dioxide emissions in grams per km travelled.

2 Carbon dioxide

N Cetane number, indication of the diesel combustion power.

N Research octane number, indication of the knock resistance

of petrol.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 269 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical

Technical Data

General notes on the technical data

Outstanding information

Important considerations

All data in the official vehicle documents take precedence

over this data.

All data provided in this manual are valid for the standard model in Spain. The

vehicle data card included in the inspection and maintenance schedule in the

vehicles registration documents show which engine is installed in the

vehicle.

The figures may be different depending on if additional equipment is fitted,

for different models, for special vehicles and for other countries.

Abbrev

Abbr tio

kW

bh

at r

Nm

l/100

g/k

CO

C

RO

General notes on the technical data270

he inside of the spare wheel recess in the

rovided on the vehicle data sticker: fig. 202.

in the Maintenance Program.

er

ber (chassis number)

ne power output

letters

ior trim code

s

ided in the Maintenance Program.

km) / CO2 emissions (g/km) urban.

km) / CO2 emissions (g/km) road.

km) / CO2 emissions (g/km) combination.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 270 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Vehicle identification data

The most important data are given on the type plate and the

vehicle data sticker.

Vehicles for certain export countries do not have a type plate.

Type plate

The type plate is located on the left rib inside the engine compartment.

Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number (chassis number) can be read from outside

the vehicle through a viewer in the windscreen. This is located on the left-

hand side of the vehicle in the lower area of the windscreen. It is also located

on the right hand side of the engine compartment.

Vehicle data

The data sticker is placed on t

luggage compartment.

The following information is p

These data are also provided

Production control numb

Vehicle identification num

Model code number

Model designation / engi

Engine and gearbox code

Paintwork number / inter

Optional equipment code

Consumption values

CO2 emissions values.

Data from 2 to 9 are also prov

Consumption figures and CO2

Consumption (litres/100

Consumption (litres/100

Consumption (litres/100

Fig. 202 Vehicle data sticker boot

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

A8

A9

AA

AB

AC

General notes on the technical data 271

Safety Fir Technical Data

vary from quoted test values, depending on

nd traffic conditions, the weather and the

ic model with a fuel tank filled to 90% capacity

he figure quoted includes 75 kg to allow for the

onal equipment fittings or for the addition of

e vehicle will increase .

tre of gravity may shift when transporting ct the vehicle's handling and lead to an acci- eed and driving style to suit road conditions

xle weight rating or the gross vehicle weight ad or the allowed total weight is exceeded, the e vehicle may change, leading to accidents, ehicle.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 271 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Data on fuel consumption

Fuel consumption

The consumption and emission details shown on the vehicle

data sticker differ from one vehicle to another.

The fuel consumption and CO2 emissions of the vehicle can be found on the

vehicle data sticker.

The fuel consumption and emissions figures given are based on the vehicle

weight category, which is determined according to the engine/gearbox

combination and the equipment fitted.

The consumption and emission figures are calculated in accordance with the

EC test requirements 1999/100/EC. These test requirements specify a real-

istic test method based on normal everyday driving.

The following test conditions are applied:

Note Actual consumption may

personal driving style, road a

vehicle condition.

Weights

Kerb weight refers to the bas

and without optional extras. T

weight of the driver.

For special versions and opti

accessories, the weight of th

WARNING

Please note that the cen heavy objects; this may affe dent. Always adjust your sp and requirements.

Never exceed the gross a rating. If the allowed axle lo driving characteristics of th injuries and damage to the v

Urban cycle The urban cycle starts with an engine cold start. City driving

is then simulated.

Extra urban

cycle

In the extra urban cycle simulation the vehicle frequently

accelerates and brakes in all gears, as in normal everyday

driving. The road speed ranges from 0 to 120 km/h.

Total con-

sumption

The average total consumption is calculated with a weighting

of around 37% for the urban cycle and 63% for the extra

urban cycle.

CO2 emis-

sions

The exhaust gases are collected during both driving cycles to

calculate carbon dioxide emissions. The gas composition is

then analysed to evaluate the CO2 content and other emis-

sions.

General notes on the technical data272

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 272 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Towing a trailer

Trailer weights

Trailer weights

The trailer weights and drawbar loads approved are selected in intensive

trials according to precisely defined criteria. The approved trailer weights are

valid for vehicles in the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (in certain

circumstances up to 100 km/h). The figures may be different in other coun-

tries. All data in the official vehicle documents take precedence over these

data .

Drawbar load

The maximum permitted weight exerted by the trailer drawbar on the ball joint

of the towing bracket must not exceed 75 kg.

In the interest of road safety, we recommend that you always tow

approaching the maximum drawbar load. The response of the trailer on the

road will be poor if the drawbar load is too small.

If the maximum permissible drawbar load cannot be met (e.g. with small,

empty and light-weight single axle trailers or tandem axle trailers with an axle

base of less than 1 metre), at least 4% of the actual trailer weight is a legal

stipulation for a drawbar load.

WARNING

For safety reasons, do not exceed the 80 km/h limit. This is also valid in countries where higher speeds are permitted.

Never exceed the maximum trailer weights or the draw bar loading. If the permissible axle load or the permissible total weight is exceeded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.

Technical Data 273

Safety Fir Technical Data

tions and restrictions on the technical data are

.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 273 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Technical Data

Checking fluid levels

From time to time, the levels of the different fluids in the

vehicle must be checked. Never fill with incorrect fluids,

otherwise serious damage to the engine may be caused.

Coolant expansion tank

Windscreen washer fluid reservoir

Engine oil filler cap

Engine oil dipstick

Brake fluid reservoir

Vehicle battery (underneath the cover)

The checking and refilling of service fluids are carried out on the components

mentioned above. These operations are described in the page 213.

Overview

Further explanations, instruc

contained as of page 269

Fig. 203 Diagram for the location of the various elements

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

Technical Data274

ON or regular unleaded 91 RONa)

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 274 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Petrol engine 1.4 63 kW (85 bhp)

General engine data

Performance figures

Weights

Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 63 (85)/ 5000

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 132/ 3800

No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1390

Compression 10,5 0,3

Fuel Premium unleaded 95 R

a) With a slight power loss

Maximum speed in km/h 169

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 9,9

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 15,1

Gross vehicle weight in kg 1950

Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1405

Front gross axle weight in kg 934

Rear gross axle weight in kg 1033

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Technical Data 275

Safety Fir Technical Data

ON or regular unleaded 91 RONa)

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 275 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Trailer weights

Engine oil capacity

Petrol engine 1.4 92 kW (125 bhp)

General engine data

Performance figures

Trailer without brakes 700

With brakes, gradients up to 8% 1200

With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1000

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 2.8 litres

Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 92 (125)/ 5000

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 200/ 1500-4000

No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1390

Compression 10

Fuel Premium unleaded 95 R

a) With a slight power loss

Maximum speed in km/h 194

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 7,0

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 10,5

Technical Data276

RON or Premium unleaded 95 RONa)

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 276 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Weights

Trailer weights

Engine oil capacity

Petrol engine 1.6 75 kW (102 bhp)

General engine data

Gross vehicle weight in kg 2023

Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1478

Front gross axle weight in kg 1004

Rear gross axle weight in kg 1036

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer without brakes 730

With brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500

With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1300

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 3.3 litres

Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 75 (102)/ 5600

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 148/ 3800

No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1595

Compression 10,3 0,5

Fuel Super Plus unleaded 98

a) With a slight power loss

Technical Data 277

Safety Fir Technical Data

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 277 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Performance figures

Weights

Trailer weights

Engine oil capacity

Maximum speed in km/h 181

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 8,7

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 13,0

Gross vehicle weight in kg 1979

Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1434

Front gross axle weight in kg 971

Rear gross axle weight in kg 1025

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer without brakes 710

With brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500

With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1200

Engine oil capacity with oil filter change. 4.1 litres

Technical Data278

ON or regular unleaded 91 RONa)

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 278 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Petrol engine 1.8 litre 118 kW (160 hp). Manual

General engine data

Performance figures

Weights

Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 118 (160)/4500-6200

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250/ 1500-4500

No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1798

Compression 9,6-0,5

Fuel Premium unleaded 95 R

a) With a slight power loss

Maximum speed in km/h 210

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,0

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 8,6

Gross vehicle weight in kg 2050

Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1505

Front gross axle weight in kg 1068

Rear gross axle weight in kg 1043

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Technical Data 279

Safety Fir Technical Data

ON or regular unleaded 91 RONa)

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 279 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Trailer weights

Engine oil capacity

Petrol engine 1.8 litre 118 kW (160 hp). Automatic

General engine data

Performance figures

Trailer without brakes 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400

Engine oil capacity with oil filter change. 4.6 litres

Power output in kW (HP) rpm 118 (160)/ 4500-6200

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250/ 1500-4500

No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1798

Compression 9,6-0,5

Fuel Premium unleaded 95 R

a) With a slight power loss

Maximum speed in km/h 210

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,0

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 8,6

Technical Data280

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 280 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Weights

Trailer weights

Engine oil capacity

Diesel engine 1.9 TDI 77 kW (105 bhp).

General engine data

Gross vehicle weight in kg 2070

Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1525

Front gross axle weight in kg 1068

Rear gross axle weight in kg 1043

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer without brakes 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400

Engine oil capacity with oil filter change. 4.6 litres

Power output in kW (HP) rpm 77 (105) 4000

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250/1900

No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/1896

Compression 18,5

Fuel Min. 51 CZ

Technical Data 281

Safety Fir Technical Data

Automatic

183

8,2

12,7

Automatic

2094

1549

1080

1031

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 281 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Performance figures

Weights

Trailer weights

Engine oil capacity

Manual

Maximum speed in km/h 183

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 8,4

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 12,6

Manual

Gross vehicle weight in kg 2064

Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1519

Front gross axle weight in kg 1050

Rear gross axle weight in kg 1031

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer without brakes 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres

Technical Data282

Automatic

201

6,7

10,0

Automatic

2124

1579

1112

1029

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 282 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Diesel engine 2.0l 103 kW (140 bhp).

General engine data

Performance figures

Weights

Power output in kW (HP) rpm 103 (140)/ 4000

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320/ 1750 - 2500

No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1968

Compression 18,5 0,5

Fuel Min. 51 CZ

Manual

Maximum speed in km/h 201

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 7,0

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 10,0

Manual

Gross vehicle weight in kg 2089

Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1544

Front gross axle weight in kg 1082

Rear gross axle weight in kg 1024

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Technical Data 283

Safety Fir Technical Data

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 283 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Trailer weights

Engine oil capacity

Diesel engine 2.0l 125 kW (170 bhp)

General engine data

Performance figures

Trailer without brakes 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres

Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 125 (170)/ 4200

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 350/ 1750-2500

No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1968

Compression 16,5

Fuel Min. 51 CZ

Maximum speed in km/h 211

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,2

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 8,7

Technical Data284

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 284 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Weights

Trailer weights

Engine oil capacity

Gross vehicle weight in kg 2089

Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1544

Front gross axle weight in kg 1082

Rear gross axle weight in kg 1024

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer without brakes 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400

Engine oil capacity with oil filter change. 4,8 litres

Technical Data 285

Safety Fir Technical Data

m

Rear

1,506 mm

1,514 mm

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 285 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Dimensions and capacities

Dimensions

Length, width 4,467 mm/ 1,768 m

Height at kerb weight 1,575 mm

Front and rear projection 913 mm/ 976 mm

Wheelbase 2,578 mm

Turning circle 10.7 m

Track widtha)

a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.

Front

1,527 mm

1,535mm

Capacities

Fuel tank 55 l. Reserve 7 l.

Windscreen washer fluid container with headlight washer 3 l/ 5.5 l

Tyre pressure

Summer-grade tyres:

The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the inside of the tank flap.

Winter tyres:

The pressure of these tyres is the same as the summer tyre pressure plus 0.2 bar.

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 286 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Index 287

tery

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

tension device

Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

diesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

ke assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

ke fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

ke pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

ke servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183, 190

ke system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

kes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

king distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

b changes

general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

b defect

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

zer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116, 165

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 287 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Index

A ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Acoustic signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Acoustic warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Adjusting the seat belt height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

AFS (curve lights) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Air conditioner*

2C-Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Air conditioning system

General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Air recirculation mode

2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Alarm system

Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Alternator

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Ambient temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 69

Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Anti-puncture tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Anti-theft wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Aquaplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Ashtray* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror*

Activating the anti-dazzle function . . . . . . 125

Deactivating anti-dazzle function . . . . . . . . 125

Automatic car wash tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox . 170

Automatic lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Automatic mode

2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Automatic wiper/wash function for the rear window

124

Auxiliary audio connection: AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . 146

B Ball coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Bat

Belt

Belt

Bio

Bio

Bon

Bra

Bra

Bra

Bra

Bra

Bra

Bra

Bul

Bul

Buz

Index288

k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

seat covers cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

es hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

pit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

rol lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

rol lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

rols

lectric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

ight switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

enience closing

liding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

indows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

enience opening

indows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

ant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220, 221

oolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

ant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

ant level

arning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

ant Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

ant temperature

isplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

afety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

e control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

arning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

e control*

urning off the cruise control system . . . . 182

in airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

escription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

unction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

afety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 288 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

C Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

CD changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Automatic speed dependent locking and un-

locking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Emergency unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Locking system for involuntary unlocking . . 93

Selective unlocking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Unlocking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Central locking button

Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Centre arm rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Cetane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Changing gear

See Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Changing the lamps

Main headlight lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Changing the main headlight lamps

dipped beam lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

main beam lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

turn signal lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Changing the rear light lamps

Position light, fog light and rear light on the

tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Changing the rear lights

Indicator, side and brake lights on the

bodywork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

luggage compartment lights . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Changing windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . . . . 223

Chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Checking battery electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . 228

Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Categorisation in groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Group 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Group 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Group 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Groups 0 and 0+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Child seats

on the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Cigarette lighter* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Cleaning alloy wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Cleaning and caring for your vehicle . . . . . . . . 199

Cleaning chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Cleaning engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Cleaning steel wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Cleaning windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Climatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Climatronic

General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Cloc

Cloth

Cloth

Cock

Cont

Cont

Cont

E

L

Conv

S

W

Conv

W

Cool

C

Cool

Cool

w

Cool

Cool

D

S

Cruis

W

Cruis

T

Curta

D

F

S

Index 289

tronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

tronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 166

tronic stabilisation program . . . . . . . . . . . 185

tronic stabilisation programme . . . . . . . . . . 81

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

tronic stabilisation programme (ESP)

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

rgency braking function . . . . . . . . . . 115, 183

rgency manual locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

rgency opening

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

ssion control system

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

ine

Running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

ine compartment

Working in the engine compartment . . . . . 213

ine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

ine fault

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

ine management

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

ine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

ine oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 289 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

D Danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger

seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Dash panel cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Daytime lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Diesel engine

Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Diesel engine particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Differential lock fault (EDL)

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Dipped headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Disabling front passenger airbag

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Disabling the airbag

Disabling front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . 43

Display (without warning or information texts) . 58

Displays in the Multi-function display

Memory displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Disposal

Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Door lock cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Doors

Childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Drinks holders at the front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Drive wheels traction control system . . . . . . . . 184

Driveshaft differential

XDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Driving

Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Economical/ Environtmental . . . . . . . . . . . 192

With a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Driving programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Driving with an automatic gearbox / DSG automatic

gearbox* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Dust filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Dynamic curve lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . 113

E Ecological driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

EDS

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Electric steering system

warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Electrical sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Elec

Elec

Elec

Elec

Elec

Eme

eme

Eme

Emi

Eng

Eng

Eng

Eng

Eng

Eng

Eng

Index290

s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

shift pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

ral overview of the engine compartment 273

e compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

arning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

arning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79, 175

rd warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

restraints

djusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 130

djustment of the head restraint angle . . . 130

emoving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

restraints, correct adjustment . . . . . . . . . 13

n-use and non-use positions . . . . . . . . . . . 14

light flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

light range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

lights

riving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

og lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

asher system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

ed front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

ed window

C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 290 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Engine oil pressure

monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Environmental friendliness . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Environmental tip

Avoiding pollution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 185

Example of menu use

Program a speed limit warning . . . . . . . . . . 65

To activate and deactivate the speed limit

warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Example of the use of the menus

Open the Configuration menu with the MFD

lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Open the Configuration menu with the steering

wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Examples of menu use

Open the main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Open the winter tyres menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

To close the winter tyres menu . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Exhaust gasses purification system . . . . . . . . 191

Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

F Fabric trim cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

folding table* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Folding the seat backrests down . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Foot brake

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Four wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Front interior light type 1

Switching light off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Switching light on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Front interior light type 2

Switching light off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Switching light on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Front passenger airbag deactivation . . . . . . . . . 43

Front reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Front seat adjustment

Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Frontal airbags

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Fuel

Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Fuel level

Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

warning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Fuel Tank

Opening the fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Fuel tank

See Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Fuel: saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Fuse

G G 12

Gear

Gene

Glov

Glow

W

H Hand

W

Haza

head

A

a

R

head

I

Head

Head

Head

D

F

W

Heat

Heat

2

Index 291

IA-IN* connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

age display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

ors

Exterior mirrors, electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Make-up mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

ile telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

ti-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

ti-purpose* mobile stowage compartment 142

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

ber of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

ervations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

ane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

-touch opening and closing

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

ning and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 291 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

High pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

I Identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Indicators

indication lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Information texts in the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Instrument and switch lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Instrument panel menu

Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Example of menu use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Lights and visibility menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Instrument panel menus

Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Vehicle status menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Intermittent wipe, windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

J Jack position points

Skirting with cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

K Key tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

L Leather cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Load compartment in the boot

See Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 148

See also Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 17

Luggage compartment cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Luggage compartment retaining net . . . . . . . . 139

M Main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109, 116

Main beam headlights

Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Main headlight lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Maintenance

airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Manual mode

2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

MED

MFD

Mile

Mirr

Mob

Mul

Mul

N Num

O Obs

Oct

Oil

Oil

Oil

One

Ope

Index292

irs

irbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

acement keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

ounter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

rse gear

anual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

back function

liding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

indows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

aerial* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

carrier* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

stowage compartment* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

er seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

ing in

ngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

ty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

ty equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

ty instructions

oolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

ty notes

irbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

elt tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

urtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

isabling front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . 44

rontal airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

ide airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 292 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Overview

Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

P Paintwork

Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Parking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Parking system plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Petrol additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Petrol engines, starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Physical principles of a frontal collision . . . . . . 20

Plastic key tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Plastic parts cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 199

R Radio frequency remote control

Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Radio navigation Steering wheel controls

audio + telephone version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

audio version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Radio wave remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Rain sensor* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Rear drink holder*

Armrest* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Rear fog light

Indication lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Rear interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Rear reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Rear seat bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Rear window heating

Heating element wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Rear-view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Recommended gear display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Registration light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Remote control key

Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Synchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Removing and fitting the wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Repa

a

Repl

Rev c

Reve

M

Roll-

S

W

Roof

Roof

Roof

Rubb

Runn

E

S Safe

Safe

Safe

Safe

C

Safe

A

B

C

D

f

s

Index 293

wage area

Centre arm rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Other stowage areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

wage compartment

Front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

wage in the luggage compartment . . . . . . . 138

visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

roof blind

Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

tch

Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

tches

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Electrical exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

tching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Emergency opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

k

fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

reserve indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 293 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Safety system- safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 131, 133

Seat belt position

Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Seat belt release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Seat belt warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Incorrectly fastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Not worn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Seat belts cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Seat belts protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Selective opening* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Selector lever locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Self directional headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

servotronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Shoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Sitting position

Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Incorrect sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Sitting position, occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Soot accumulation in the diesel engine particulate

filter

Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Spare wheel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Starting on an uphill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Starting Petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166, 167

After the fuel tank has been run dry . . . . . . 167

Steam jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Steering wheel audio controls

audio + telephone version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

audio version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Steering wheel height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 163

Sto

Sto

Sto

Sun

Sun

Sun

Sun

Swi

Swi

Swi

T Tail

Tan

TCS

Index294

metric sensor*

ctivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

eactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

ing lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

ing lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

ing reports

ed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

ellow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

ing texts in the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

ing triangle and first-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . 147

her fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

hing by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

hing with high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . 201

r

arning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

r in the windscreen washer tank . . . . . . . 222

r indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

el bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

orque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

el change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

el trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

els . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

assume the correct sitting position? . . . . . 29

should head restraints be correctly adjusted?

13

to wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 29

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 294 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

TCS (Traction control system)

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

The danger of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . 21

Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Towing bracket, fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Towing eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Traction control system

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Trailer

Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Trailer turn signals

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Trips, checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 116

Turning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Type plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Tyre Mobility-System (Tyre repair kit) . . . . . . . 239

Tyre monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239, 247

Tyre-Mobility-System (Tyre repair kit) . . . . . . . 247

Tyres and wheels

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Tyres service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Tyres tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Tyres with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . 230

U Underbody sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Unlocking and locking

Personalisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Using the Tiptronic gear system . . . . . . . . . . . 173

V Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Vehicle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Vehicle Maintenance

Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Vehicle modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Vehicle paintwork

Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . 199

Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Vehicle tools

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Vehicle wallet storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Vehicle washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Volu

A

D

W Warn

Warn

Warn

R

Y

Warn

Warn

Was

Was

Was

Wate

w

Wate

Wea

Whe

T

Whe

Whe

Whe

Why

Why

Why

Why

Index 295

AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 295 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Windscreen washer fluid

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Windscreen wiper blades

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Changing blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Changing the rear blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Winter driving

Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Wiper/wash automatic function . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Wooden trim cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . 213

SE AT

A LT

EA X

L O

W N

ER S

M A

N U

A L

In gl

s 5P

80 12

00 3B

H (

11 .0

8) (

G T9

)

5P 80

12 00

3B H

A LT

EA X

L In

gl s

(1 1.

08 )

Portada ALTEA XL.qxd 23/12/08 09:53 Pgina 3

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Altea XL Seat works, you can view and download the Seat Altea XL 2008 Owner’s Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Seat Altea XL as well as other Seat manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Seat Altea XL. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Seat Altea XL 2008 Owner’s Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Seat Altea XL 2008 Owner’s Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Seat Altea XL 2008 Owner’s Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Seat Altea XL 2008 Owner’s Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Seat Altea XL 2008 Owner’s Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.